Garmin Pilatus Pc 6

2015-05-27

: Garmin Garmin-Pilatus-Pc-6-721001 garmin-pilatus-pc-6-721001 garmin pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 510

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

G950

Integrated Avionics System
Pilot’s Guide

G950 Pilot’s Guide

Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
p:913.397.8200
f:913.397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
p:503.391.3411
f:503.364.2138

Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road
Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
p:886/02.2642.9199
f:886/02.2642.9099

Pilatus PC-6

Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
p:44 (0) 23 8052 4000
f:44 (0) 23 8052 4004
Aviation Support:44 (0) 87 0850 1243

www.garmin.com
190-00870-02
Revision A

Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM

AUDIO PANEL & CNS

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

APPENDICES

INDEX

Copyright © 2012, 2014 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 0935.06 or later. Some differences in operation may be observed when
comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913/397.8200 Fax: 913/397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503/391.3411 Fax: 503/364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd., Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park, Southampton, SO40 9LR, U.K
Tel: 44 (0) 23 8052 4000 Fax: 44 (0) 23 8052 4004 Aviation Support:44 (0) 87 0850 1243
Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road, Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
Tel: 886/02.2642.9199 Fax: 886/02.2642.9099
For after-hours emergency, aircraft on ground (AOG) technical support for Garmin panel mount and integrated avionics systems, please
contact Garmin’s AOG Hotline at 913.397.0836.
Website Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin®, G950®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without
the express permission of Garmin.
Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International, Inc.; NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen,
Inc.; Stormscope® is a registered trademark of L-3 Communications; Avidyne® and TCAD® are registered trademarks of Avidyne Corporation.
SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio are provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio, Inc. S-TEC® is a registered trademark of S-TEC
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”) expressly disclaim all warranties,
with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including negligence, shall AOPA be liable for any
incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even if
AOPA or an AOPA authorized representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action, claims or losses related to any actual
or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for
incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
AC-U-KWIK and its related organizations (hereafter collectively “AC-U-KWIK Organizations”) expressly disclaim all warranties with
respect to the AC-U-KWIK information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AC-U-KWIK Organizations do not warrant or
make any representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Licensee agrees not to sue AC-U-KWIK Organizations and, to the
maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AC-U-KWIK Organizations from any cause of action, claims or losses related
to any actual or alleged inaccuracies in the information arising out of Garmin’s use of the information in the datasets. Some jurisdictions
do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to licensee.
October 2014
Printed in the U.S.A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES

WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain avoidance

feature. The terrain avoidance feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance
and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight. The
terrain avoidance feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance. Terrain data is obtained from
third party sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be

relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current
aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: The altitude calculated by G950 GPS receivers is geometric height above Mean Sea Level and

could vary significantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters, such as the GDC 74 Air Data
Computer, or other altimeters in aircraft. GPS altitude should never be used for vertical navigation. Always
use pressure altitude displayed by the G950 PFD or other pressure altimeters in aircraft.
WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used in the G950 system must be updated

regularly in order to ensure that the information remains current. Pilots using any outdated database do so
entirely at their own risk.
WARNING: Do not use basemap (land and water data) information for primary navigation. Basemap data is

intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid to
enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.

The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic

within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not rely on information from a lightning detection system display as the sole basis for hazardous

weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate or
incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous

weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: For safety reasons, G950 operational procedures must be learned on the ground.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES

WARNING: The Garmin system, as installed in this aircraft, has a very high degree of functional integrity.

However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and/or self-test capability for all conceivable
system failures is not practical.
WARNING: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible

for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy
and performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the Garmin G950 utilize GPS as a precision electronic
NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the G950 can be
misused or misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and understand all aspects of the G950

Pilot’s Guide documentation and the G950 Integrated Avionics System in the Airplane Flight Manual.
Thoroughly practice basic operation prior to actual use. During flight operations, carefully compare indications
from the G950 to all available navigation sources, including the information from other NAVAIDs, visual
sightings, charts, etc. For safety purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation.
WARNING: Do not use the system to attempt to penetrate a thunderstorm. The illustrations in this guide are

only examples. Both the FAA Advisory Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms, and the Aeronautical Information
Manual (AIM) recommend avoiding any thunderstorm identified as severe of giving intense radar echo by
at least 20 miles.
WARNING: Lamp(s) inside this product may contain mercury (HG) and must be recycled or disposed of

according to local, state, or federal laws. For more information, refer to our website at www.garmin.com/
aboutGarmin/environment/disposal.jsp.
WARNING: Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, operating the system within the following

areas could result in loss of reliable attitude and heading indications. North of 72° North latitude at all
longitudes; South of 70° South latitude at all longitudes; North of 65° North latitude between longitude
75° W and 120° W. (Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W.
(Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia);
South of 55° South latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New
Zealand)
WARNING: Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ by a

system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that
may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be positioned
in error as displayed.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES

CAUTION: The PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a special anti-reflective coating that is very

sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE
ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an
eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.
CAUTION: The Garmin G950 does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Repairs should only be made by

an authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty
and the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
NOTE: When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby

thunderstorms that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of
two or more discharge points in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points
reappear after the screen has been cleared.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the G950 panel and

displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current G950 system and aviation databases.
Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of

attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California

to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to
our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

iii

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES

NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent avionics of the

following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory guidance and information
related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System.
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen are assured compliance with all data quality requirements (DQRs) by virtue
of a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the FAA. A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each database
and can be viewed at http://fly.garmin.com by selecting ‘Type 2 LOA Status.’
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for compliance with
established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures
that may be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established
AFM(S) and regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusion list as discussed

in SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what data may be incomplete. The database exclusion list can be viewed at
www.flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Database Exclusions List.’
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts and consider their

impact on the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed at www.flygarmin.com by
selecting ‘Aviation Database Alerts.’
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product Support to

coordinate the revised DQRs.
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.

These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles
and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go
to FlyGarmin.com and select ‘Report An Aviation Data Error Report.’

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Revisions
Part Number
190-00870-00

Revision
A

Date
12/1/09

190-00870-00

6/11/10

i – I-6

190-00870-01

1/12/12

i – I-6

190-00870-02

10/20/14

i – I-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Page Range
Description
i – I-6
Initial release for 9.15 software.
Revised to add the following optional functionality:
• TAWS-B
• KTA 870
• WX 500
Initial release for 12.01 software.
Added the following functionality to the PG
• Profile Display
• SVS, Terrain SVS
• Aux Video
• FliteCharts
• Chartview
• Checklists
• SiriusXM Radio
• XM WX Satellite Weather
Initial release for 14.02 software
Added AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory
Added User Defined Holding Patterns
Added Landing Field Elevation enty
Added temperature compensated altitude
Added import/export of Pilot Profiles
Added LP and LP+V approach service levels
Added Auto North Up
Updated System Message Advisories
Updated Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
Updated database loading procedures
Removed SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Added other GDU 14.02 parameters

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4

1.5

1.6

1.7

SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Line Replaceable Units............................................ 2
Secure Digital (SD) Cards........................................ 7
System Power-up...................................................... 8
System Operation..................................................... 9
Display Operation.......................................................... 9
G950 System Annunciations......................................... 10
System Status.............................................................. 11
AHRS Operation.......................................................... 13
GPS Receiver Operation............................................... 14
G950 Controls......................................................... 19
PFD/MFD Controls....................................................... 19
Softkey Function.......................................................... 21
Accessing G950 Functionality............................... 27
Menus........................................................................ 27
Data Entry.................................................................. 28
Page Groups............................................................... 29
System Settings........................................................... 33
System Utilities............................................................ 43
Display Backlighting.............................................. 47

SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 Flight Instruments.................................................. 52
Airspeed Indicator....................................................... 52
Attitude Indicator........................................................ 54
Altimeter.................................................................... 55
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)........................................ 58
Vertical Deviation........................................................ 58
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................... 59
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)................................... 64
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data..................................... 71
Outside Air Temperature............................................... 71
Wind Data.................................................................. 72
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications............................ 73
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions......... 74
System Alerting........................................................... 74
Marker Beacon Annunciations...................................... 75
Traffic Annunciation..................................................... 75
Terrain Annunciations.................................................. 76
Altitude Alerting.......................................................... 76
Low Altitude Annunciation........................................... 77
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting....... 77

2.4 Abnormal Operations............................................ 79
Abnormal GPS Conditions............................................ 79
Heading Failure Modes................................................ 80
Unusual Attitudes........................................................ 80
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4

SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Engine Display........................................................ 84
System Display....................................................... 86
Fuel Display............................................................. 88
EIS Display in Reversionary Mode........................ 90
EIS Softkeys................................................................ 91

SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.1 Overview................................................................. 93
PFD Controls and Frequency Display.............................. 94
GMA 347 Audio Panel Controls..................................... 96
4.2 COM Operation....................................................... 98
COM Transceiver Selection and Activation...................... 98
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning................................... 99
Quick-tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz................... 100
Auto-tuning the COM Frequency................................. 101
Auto-tuning from the MFD......................................... 102
Frequency Spacing..................................................... 105
Automatic Squelch..................................................... 106
Volume..................................................................... 106
4.3 NAV Operation...................................................... 107
NAV Radio Selection and Activation............................ 107
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning...................................... 108
Auto-tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD................ 110
Auto-tuning NAV Frequencies on Approach Activation.. 114
Marker Beacon Receiver............................................. 115
4.4 GTX 33 Mode S Transponder............................... 116
Transponder Controls................................................. 116
Transponder Mode Selection....................................... 117
Entering a Transponder Code...................................... 120
IDENT Function......................................................... 121
ADS-B TX.................................................................. 121
Flight ID Reporting.................................................... 122
4.5 Additional Audio Panel Functions...................... 123
Power-Up.................................................................. 123
Mono/Stereo Headsets............................................... 123
Speaker.................................................................... 123
Intercom................................................................... 124

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Passenger Address (PA) System................................... 127
Clearance Recorder and Player.................................... 127
Split COM Operation.................................................. 128
Entertainment Inputs................................................. 129
Multifunction Controls............................................... 130

4.6 Audio Panel Preflight Procedure........................ 131
4.7 Abnormal Operation............................................ 132
Stuck Microphone...................................................... 132
COM Tuning Failure.................................................... 132
Audio Panel Fail-safe Operation.................................. 132
PFD Failure (Reversionary Mode)................................ 132
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.1 Introduction.......................................................... 133
Navigation Status Box................................................ 134
5.2 Using Map Displays.............................................. 136
Map Orientation........................................................ 136
Map Range............................................................... 138
Map Panning............................................................. 140
Measuring Bearing and Distance................................. 145
Topography............................................................... 146
Map Symbols............................................................ 149
Airways.................................................................... 155
Track Vector.............................................................. 157
Wind Vector.............................................................. 158
Nav Range Ring........................................................ 159
Fuel Range Ring........................................................ 160
Field of View (SVT)..................................................... 161
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc.................................... 162
5.3 Waypoints.............................................................. 163
Airports.................................................................... 164
Intersections............................................................. 171
NDBs........................................................................ 173
VORs........................................................................ 175
User Waypoints......................................................... 177
5.4 Airspaces............................................................... 183
5.5 Direct-to-Navigation ........................................... 187
5.6 Flight Planning...................................................... 192
Flight Plan Creation................................................... 193
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan................. 198
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan.................................. 200
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan................... 203

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Flight Plan Storage.................................................... 210
Flight Plan Editing..................................................... 212
Along Track Offsets.................................................... 215
Parallel Track............................................................. 217
Activating a Flight Plan Leg........................................ 220
Inverting a Flight Plan................................................ 221
Flight Plan Views....................................................... 222
Closest Point of FPL................................................... 224
User-Defined Holding Patterns.................................... 224

5.7 Vertical Navigation.............................................. 229
Altitude Constraints................................................... 231
5.8 Procedures............................................................ 235
Departures................................................................ 236
Arrivals .................................................................... 239
Approaches .............................................................. 242
5.9 Trip Planning......................................................... 250
Trip Planning............................................................. 250
5.10 RAIM Prediction................................................... 254
5.11 Navigating a Flight Plan...................................... 258
5.12 Abnormal Operation............................................ 286
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 Airborne Color Weather Radar........................... 290
System Description.................................................... 290
Principles of Pulsed Airborne Weather Radar................ 290
Safe Operating Distance............................................. 294
Basic Antenna Tilt Setup............................................. 295
Weather Mapping and Interpretation.......................... 296
Ground Mapping and Interpretation............................ 306
Weather Radar Overlay on the Navigation Map Page.... 307
System Status............................................................ 309
6.2 Stormscope Lightning.......................................... 311
Setting Up Stormscope on the Navigation Map............ 311
Selecting the Stormscope Page................................... 315
6.3 Terrain Proximity.................................................. 316
Displaying Terrain Proximity Data................................ 316
6.4 Profile View Terrain.............................................. 321
Profile View Display................................................... 321
6.5 Terrain-SVS............................................................ 324
Displaying Terrain-SVS Data........................................ 325
Terrain-SVS Page....................................................... 327
Terrain-SVS Alerts...................................................... 329

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.6 TAWS-B.................................................................. 333
Displaying TAWS-B Data............................................. 334
TAWS-B Page............................................................ 337
TAWS-B Alerts........................................................... 339
System Status............................................................ 344
6.7 Traffic Information Service (TIS)......................... 346
Displaying Traffic Data............................................... 347
Traffic Map Page........................................................ 349
TIS Alerts.................................................................. 350
System Status............................................................ 351
6.8 Traffic Advisory System (TAS)............................. 354
TAS Symbology.......................................................... 354
Operation................................................................. 355
Altitude Display......................................................... 358
Traffic Map Page Display Range.................................. 358
TAS Alerts................................................................. 360
System Status............................................................ 360
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 S-TEC Fifty Five X Autopilot (Optional)............. 363
Flight Director Mode Annunciation.............................. 363
Altitude Preselect...................................................... 363
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)...................... 366
SVT Operation........................................................... 367
SVT Features............................................................. 369
Field of View............................................................. 378
8.2 SafeTaxi................................................................. 380
SafeTaxi Database Cycle Number and Revision............. 383
8.3 ChartView.............................................................. 386
ChartView Softkeys.................................................... 387
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 388
Chart Options............................................................ 396
Day/Night View......................................................... 402
ChartView Cycle Number and Expiration Date.............. 404
8.4 FliteCharts............................................................. 407
FliteCharts Softkeys................................................... 408
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 409
Chart Options............................................................ 416
Day/Night View......................................................... 420
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date.............. 422

viii

8.5 Airport Directory.................................................. 425
Airport Directory Database Cycle Number and Revision.426
8.6 Auxiliary Video (Optional)................................... 428
Video Setup.............................................................. 429
Display Selection....................................................... 429
Input Selection.......................................................... 430
Zoom/Range............................................................. 430
8.7 Scheduler............................................................... 432
8.8 Electronic Checklists............................................ 434
8.9 Flight Data Logging............................................. 436
8.10 Abnormal Operation............................................ 438
SVT Troubleshooting.................................................. 438
Reversionary Mode.................................................... 438
Unusual Attitudes...................................................... 439
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts.............................................. 441
G950 System Annunciations....................................... 445
G950 System Message Advisories............................... 447
Flight Plan Import/Export Messages............................ 456
Pilot Profile Import/Export Messages........................... 456
Terrain-SVT Alerts...................................................... 457
Terrain-SVT System Status Annunciations..................... 457
TAWS-B ALERTS......................................................... 458
TAWS-B System Status Annunciations.......................... 459
Database Management................................................. 461
Navigation Databases................................................ 462
Garmin Databases..................................................... 466
Garmin Aviation Glossary............................................. 473
Frequently Asked Questions......................................... 481
General TIS Information................................................ 485
Introduction.............................................................. 485
TIS vs. TAS/TCAS........................................................ 485
TIS Limitations.......................................................... 485
Map Symbols.................................................................. 487

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW

• GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display (PFD)

• GDC 74A Air Data Computer (ADC)

• GDU 1040 Multi Function Display (MFD)

• GTX 33 Mode S Transponder

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The G950 Integrated Flight Deck System presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation, communication,
and identification information to the pilot using flat-panel color displays. The system is distributed across the
following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):

• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units (IAU)

EIS

• GMA 347 Audio Panel with Integrated Marker Beacon • GRS 77 Attitude and Heading Reference System
Receiver
(AHRS)
• GMU 44 Magnetometer

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 1-1 shows interactions between the LRUs. Additional/optional equipment are shown in Figure 1-2. The
G950 is capable of interfacing with the following optional equipment:
• GTX 33 ES Mode S Transponder
• GWX 68/70 Weather Radar

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• S-TEC 55X Autopilot
• KTA 870 Traffic System
• WX 500 Lightning Detection System

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.1 LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• GDU 1040 (2) – The left-hand GDU is configured as a Primary Flight Display (PFD) and the right-hand GDU
as a Multi Function Display (MFD). Both feature 10.4-inch LCD screens with 1024 x 768 resolution. The
displays communicate with each other through a High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection. Each
display is also paired with an Ethernet connection to an IAU.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• GMA 347 (1) – The Audio Panel integrates navigation/communication radio (NAV/COM) digital audio, intercom,
and marker beacon controls, and is installed between the displays. This unit communicates with both IAUs
using an RS-232 digital interface.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

• GIA 63W (2) – The Integrated Avionics Units (IAU) function as the main communication hubs, linking all
LRUs with the on-side display. Each IAU contains a GPS SBAS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, and
system integration microprocessors, and is paired with the on-side display via HSDB connection. The IAUs are
not paired together and do not communicate with each other directly.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

• GDC 74A (1) – The Air Data Computer (ADC) processes data from the pitot/static system and outside air
temperature (OAT) sensor. The ADC provides pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed, and OAT information
to the G950 System, and it communicates with the primary IAU, displays, and AHRS using an ARINC 429
digital interface.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• GEA 71 (1) – (optional) The Engine Airframe Unit receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe
sensors. This unit communicates with both IAUs using an RS-485 digital interface.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• GTX 33 (1) – The solid-state Transponder provides Modes A, C, and S capability and communicates with both
IAUs through an RS-232 digital interface.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• GRS 77 (1) – The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) provides aircraft attitude and heading
information via ARINC 429 to both PFDs and the primary IAU. The AHRS contains advanced sensors (including
accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the Magnetometer to obtain magnetic field information,
with the ADC to obtain air data, and with both IAUs to obtain GPS information. AHRS operation is discussed
in Section 1.4, System Operation.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• GMU 44 (1) – The Magnetometer measures local magnetic field and sends data to the AHRS for processing to
determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the AHRS and communicates with
it via an RS-485 digital interface.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

• GWX 68 (1) – (optional) Provides airborne weather and ground mapped radar data to the MFD, through the
GDL 69A, via HSDB connection.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• GDL 69/69A (1) (if installed) – A SiriusXM satellite radio receiver that provides real-time weather information
to the MFD (and, indirectly, to the inset map of the PFD) as well as digital audio entertainment. The GDL 69A
communicates with the MFD via HSDB connection. A subscription to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio service is
required to enable the GDL 69A audio entertainment capability.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

GDU 1040

Multi Function Display

Primary Flight Display

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Display Backup
Button

GMA 347

Audio Panel

EIS

G
GDC
74A
A
Air Data
Computer
C
r

System Inegration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope

GRS 77
AHRS
Attitude
Rate of Turn
Slip/Skid

Integrated Avionics Unit
System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

GPS Output

No. 2 GIA 63W

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

OAT
Airspeed
Altitude
Vertical Speed
Ve
ed

No. 1 GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Unit

GPS Output

GMU 44
Magnetometer
Heading

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

GTX 33 or
optional
GTX 33 ES
Transponder

AFCS

GEA 71
Engine/Airframe
Unit

Figure 1-1 Basic G950 Block Diagram
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

No. 1 GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Unit

No. 2 GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Unit

System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope

KN 63
DME

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

(optional)

KR 87
ADF
(optional)

KTA 870
TAS
(optional)

WX 500
Stormscope
(optional)

GWX 68/70

Weather Radar
(optional)

Figure 1-2 G950 With Optional/Additional Equipment

NOTE: For information on non-Garmin optional/additional equipment shown in Figure 1-2, consult the

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

applicable optional interface user’s guide. This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with
the operation of this additional equipment.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

1.2 SECURE DIGITAL (SD) CARDS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: Ensure the G950 System is powered off before inserting an SD card.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix B for instructions on updating the aviation database.

EIS

The PFD and MFD data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the upper right side of the
display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for aviation database
and system software updates as well as terrain database storage.
Installing an SD card:
1) Insert the SD card in the SD card slot (the front of the card should be flush with the face of the display bezel).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) To eject the card, gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

SD Card Slots

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 1-3 Display Bezel SD Card Slots

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.3 SYSTEM POWER-UP

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The G950 System is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical
busses. The PFD, MFD, and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features
that exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, external inputs, and outputs to provide safe operation.

EIS

NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for system-specific annunciations and alerts.

During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed, as shown in Figure 1-4. All system annunciations
should disappear typically within the first minute of power-up. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also
become momentarily illuminated on the Audio Panel, the MFD Control Unit, and the display bezels.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize and displays “AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level”. The AHRS should
display valid attitude and heading fields typically within the first minute of power-up. The AHRS can align itself
both while taxiing in a straight line and during level flight.
When the MFD powers up, the Power-up screen (Figure 1-5) displays the following information:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• System version
• Airport Terrain database name and version
• Copyright
• Obstacle database name and effective dates
• Land database name and version
• Navigation database name and effective dates
• Safe Taxi database name and effective dates
• Airport Directory name and effective dates
• Terrain database name and version
Current database information includes valid operating dates, cycle number, and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to
continue.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Pressing the ENT Key (or right-most softkey) acknowledges this information, and the Navigation Map Page is
displayed upon pressing the key a second time. When the system has acquired a sufficient number of satellites to
determine a position, the aircraft’s current position is shown on the Navigation Map Page.

Figure 1-5 Example MFD Power-up Screen

INDEX

Figure 1-4 PFD Initialization

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

1.4 SYSTEM OPERATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: The G950 system alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to the Appendices

for further information regarding system-specific alerts.
The displays are connected together via a single Ethernet bus for high-speed communication. As shown in
Figure 1-1, each IAU is connected to the on-side display. This section discusses normal and reversionary G950
display operation, AHRS modes, GPS receiver operation, and G950 System Annunciations.

EIS

DISPLAY OPERATION
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD (see Section 1.7). In

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

reversionary mode, it can be adjusted from the remaining display(s).

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information). The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see
the Flight Management Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System
(see the EIS Section). Both displays offer control for COM and NAV frequency selection.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Figure 1-6 G950 System Normal Operation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

In the event of a display failure, the G950 System automatically switches to reversionary (backup) mode. In
reversionary mode, all important flight information is presented on the remaining display(s) in the same format
as in normal operating mode.
• PFD failure – MFD enters reversionary mode.

APPENDICES

• MFD failure – PFD enters reversionary mode.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

If a display fails, the appropriate IAU-display Ethernet interface is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer
communicate with the remaining display (refer to Figure 1-1), and the NAV and COM functions provided to
the failed display by the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup
paths for the AHRS, ADC, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is
completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
If the system fails to detect a display problem, reversionary mode may be manually activated by pressing the
display backup button installed in the cockpit. Pressing this button again deactivates reversionary mode.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NAV1 and COM1 (provided by the
failed PFD) Flagged Invalid

Figure 1-7 G950 Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

G950 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed over the instrument experiencing
failed data (Figure 1-8 displays all possible flags and responsible LRUs). Upon G950 power-up, certain
instruments remain invalid as equipment begins to initialize. All instruments should be operational within one
minute of power-up. If any instrument remains flagged, the G950 should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized
repair facility.
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units

GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units

AFCS

GDC 74A Air
Data Computer
GRS 77 AHRS
OR
GMU 44
Magnetometer

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
OR
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Unit

GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units

INDEX

GDC 74A Air
Data Computer

Figure 1-8 G950 System Failure Annunciations

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

GTX 33 Transponder
OR
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM STATUS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The System Status Page displays the statuses, serial numbers, and software version numbers for all detected
system LRUs. Active LRUs are indicated by green check marks; failed, by red ‘X’s. Failed LRUs should be noted
and a service center or Garmin-authorized dealer informed.
Viewing LRU information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘LRU Info’ Box,

EIS

a) Press the LRU Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

b) With ‘Select LRU Window’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view LRU status information.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 1-9 Example System Status Page

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed on this page. Refer to the Appendices and
Additional Features sections for more information about databases.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Viewing database information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘Database’ Box,
a) Press the DBASE Softkey.
Or:
EIS

a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Highlight ‘Select Dbase Window’ and press the ENT Key.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view database status information.

The G950 uses aural tones to convey the priority of airframe-specific alerts. The alerting system’s annunciation
tone may be tested from the System Status Page. Refer to the Appendices for airframe-specific alerts.
Testing the system annunciation tone:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) Press the ANN TEST Softkey.
Or:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

a) Press the MENU Key.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

b) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AHRS OPERATION
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating normally may degrade AHRS accuracy.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

In addition to using internal sensors, the GRS 77 AHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and air
data to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the AHRS relies upon GPS and magnetic field
measurements. If either of these external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the AHRS uses air data
information for attitude determination. Four AHRS modes of operation are available (see Figure 1-14) and
depend upon the combination of available sensor inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor inputs
is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts.

EIS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

YES

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Mag Data AND Air Data
Available and Reliable?

YES

Mag Data Available and Reliable?

YES

GPS Data Available and Reliable?

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The AHRS (GRS 77) corrects for shifts and variations in the Earth’s magnetic field by applying the Magnetic
Field Variation Database. The Magnetic Field Variation Database is derived from the International Geomagnetic
Reference Field (IGRF). The IGRF is a mathematical model that describes the Earth’s main magnetic field and its
annual rate of change. The database is updated approximately every 5 years. See the Appendices for information
on updating the Magnetic Field Variation Database. The system will prompt you on startup when an update is
available. Failure to update this database could lead to erroneous heading information being displayed to the
pilot.

YES

Air Data Available and Reliable?

AFCS

AHRS Normal
Mode

AHRS no-Mag/
no-Air Mode

Heading Invalid

AHRS no-GPS
Mode

AHRS coast-on-gyros
until invalid

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AHRS no-Mag
Mode

APPENDICES

Attitude/Heading Invalid

Figure 1-10 AHRS Operation

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

Loss of GPS, magnetometer, or air data inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts. Any
failure of the internal AHRS inertial sensors results in loss of attitude and heading information (indicated by red
‘X’ flags over the corresponding flight instruments).

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Two GPS inputs are provided to the AHRS. If GPS information from one of the inputs fails, the AHRS uses
the remaining GPS input and an alert message is issued to inform the pilot. If both GPS inputs fail, the AHRS
can continue to provide attitude and heading information to the PFD(s) as long as magnetometer and airspeed
data are available and valid.
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS continues to output valid attitude information. If GPS-based track
information is available while magnetometer input has failed, the HSI displays the ground track instead of
heading using HSI Track Mode. In this mode, a magenta ‘TRK’ annunciation and track readout appear on the
HSI. In addition, a yellow ‘HDG’ annunciation with a red X appear above the ‘TRK’ annunciation to indicate
the HSI is displaying track instead of heading.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

If both the heading and track are unavailable, the HSI displays a yellow ‘HDG’ annunciation with a red X over
the heading readout box. The system also removes directional numbers and letters from the HSI.

HSI Track Mode (Heading Unavailable, Track Available)

Heading and Track Unavailable

Figure 1-11 Heading Failure Displays on the HSI

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Failure of the air data input has no effect on the AHRS output while AHRS is receiving valid GPS information.
Invalid/unavailable airspeed data in addition to GPS failure results in loss of all attitude and heading information.

GPS RECEIVER OPERATION

AFCS

Each Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Internal system checking is performed to ensure
both GPS receivers are providing accurate data to the PFD. When both GPS receivers are providing accurate
data, the GPS receiver producing the better solution is used by the system. Information collected by the
specified receiver (GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the AUX - GPS Status Page.
Viewing GPS receiver status information:

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

1) Use the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Auxiliary Page Group (see Section 1.6 for information on
navigating MFD page groups).
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select GPS Status Page (third page in the AUX Page Group).

APPENDICES

3) To change the selected GPS receiver:

Press the desired GPS Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.

INDEX

b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Satellite Constellation
Diagram

Satellite Signal
Information

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

GPS
Receiver
Status

EIS

RAIM
Availability
Prediction

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Satellite
Signal
Strength
Bars

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 1-11 GPS Status Page

AFCS

GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has acquired
satellites before the other or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired an SBAS signal. While the aircraft
is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by obstructions causing one GPS receiver to have difficulty
acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning the aircraft may result in one of the GPS receivers
temporarily losing the SBAS signal. If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Page and compare the
information for GPS1 and GPS2. Discrepancies may indicate a problem.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

GPS RECEIVER STATUS

APPENDICES

The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active
GPS receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the receiver is
in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data
(collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be
in view. ACQUIRING is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired
for computing a solution.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D differential GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS)
status should be indicated as INACTIVE at this point. When acquisition is complete, the solution status
changes to 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS becomes active.
15

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• SBAS Selection (SBAS Softkey is pressed)
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the SBAS coverage area, it may
be desirable to disable EGNOS, MSAS or WAAS (although it is not recommended). When disabled, the SBAS
field in the GPS Status box indicates DISABLED. There may be a small delay for the GPS Status box to be
updated upon EGNOS, MSAS or WAAS enabling/disabling.
Disabling SBAS
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, press the SBAS Softkey.

EIS

3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Turn either FMS Knob to select ‘EGNOS’ or ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’, as necessary.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

5) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

6) Repeat steps 4 & 5 as necessary, then press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.

Figure 1-12 Enable/Disable SBAS

RAIM PREDICTION

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to
calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0
nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of
flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.

APPENDICES

The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time. In most cases
performing RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected approach may be outside
the SBAS coverage area and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for the intended approach.

INDEX

Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
G950 automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by
the messages “Approach is not active”. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the missed approach
procedure must be flown.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Predicting RAIM availability:
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) Press the RAIM Softkey.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window.
5) Enter the desired waypoint:

EIS

a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier, facility, or city name and press the ENT Key. Refer
to Section 1.7 for instructions on entering alphanumeric data into the G950.
Or:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

a) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
b) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST, RECENT, or AIRWAY waypoints, if required.
c) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint. The G950 automatically fills in the identifier,
facility, and city fields with the information for the selected waypoint.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

d) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
6) Enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
7) Enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

8) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:

• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination

• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress

• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date

AFCS

• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date

Predicting RAIM availability at present position
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
4) Press the MENU Key.

APPENDICES

5) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

8) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination

9) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:

• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress

• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date

• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date

EIS

SATELLITE INFORMATION

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a satellite constellation diagram.
This sky view is always oriented north-up, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle
representing 45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead. Each satellite
is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite identification
number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor satellite
coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed
for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for WAAS) below each
bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal bar appearance:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
- Cyan bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
- Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
- “D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations

AFCS

Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Using the current satellite signal information, they system calculates the aircraft’s GPS position, time,
altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft (displayed below the satellite signal accuracy measurements
for reference). The following quantities denote the accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix:
• Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU)—A statistical error indication; the radius of a circle centered on an
estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of lying

APPENDICES

• Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)—Measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites
received and where they are relative to each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting
better accuracy

INDEX

• Horizontal and Vertical Figures of Merit (HFOM and VFOM)—Measures of horizontal and vertical position
uncertainty; the current 95% confidence horizontal and vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS
receiver

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

1.5 G950 CONTROLS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The G950 controls have been designed to simplify operation of the system and minimize workload and the time
required to access sophisticated functionality. Controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels, MFD Control
Unit, and Audio Panel. PFD and MFD controls and softkeys are discussed in this section. Audio Panel controls
are described in the Audio Panel and CNS section; see the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information
about NAV/COM controls.

PFD/MFD CONTROLS
2

EIS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AFCS

Figure 1-13 PFD/MFD Controls

Turn to control NAV audio volume (shown in the NAV Frequency Box as a percentage)
Press to toggle Morse code identifier audio ON/OFF

2 NAV Frequency

Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

1 NAV VOL/ID Knob

Transfer Key
Turn to tune NAV receiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz)
Press to toggle cyan tuning box between NAV1 and NAV2

4 Heading Knob

Turn to manually select a heading
Press to display a digital heading momentarily to the left of the HSI and synchronize the
Selected Heading to the and current heading

APPENDICES

3 NAV Knob

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

5 Joystick

Turn to change map range
Press to activate Map Pointer for map panning
Moves the Quick Select Box or cursor on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD when joystick
is moved left, right, up, or down.

6 CRS/BARO Knob

Turn large knob for altimeter barometric pressure setting
Turn small knob to adjust course (only when HSI is in VOR or OBS Mode)
Press to re-center the CDI and return course pointer directly TO bearing of active waypoint/
station

7 COM Knob

Turn to tune COM transceiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz)
Press to toggle cyan tuning box between COM1 and COM2
The selected COM (green) is controlled with the COM MIC Key (Audio Panel).

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

8 COM Frequency
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies
Transfer Key (EMERG) Press and hold 2 seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into the
active frequency field

9 COM VOL/SQ Knob

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

10 Direct-to Key (

Turn to control COM audio volume level (shown as a percentage in the COM Frequency Box)
Press to turn the COM automatic squelch ON/OFF
)

11 FPL Key

Displays flight plan information

12 CLR Key

Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus
Press and hold to display the MFD Navigation Map Page (MFD only).

AFCS

(DFLT MAP)
13 MENU Key

Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or making setting
changes

14 PROC Key

Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport

15 ENT Key

Validates/confirms menu selection or data entry

16 FMS Knob

Press to turn the selection cursor ON/OFF.
Data Entry: With cursor ON, turn to enter data in the highlighted field (large knob moves
cursor location; small knob selects character for highlighted cursor location)
Scrolling: When a list of information is too long for the window/box, a scroll bar appears,
indicating more items to view. With cursor ON, turn large knob to scroll through the list.
Page Selection: Turn knob on MFD to select the page to view (large knob selects a page
group; small knob selects a specific page from the group)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

(Flight Management
System Knob)

APPENDICES

Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and
establish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier, chosen from the
active route)

17 Softkey Selection

Press to select softkey shown above the bezel key on the PFD/MFD display

Keys
Sets the Selected Altitude, shown above the Altimeter (the large knob selects the thousands, the
small knob selects the hundreds)

INDEX

18 ALT Knob

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

The NAV, CRS/BARO, COM, FMS, and ALT knobs are concentric dual knobs, each having small (inner)
and large (outer) control portion. When a portion of the knob is not specified in the text, either may be used.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Large (Outer) Knob
Small (Inner) Knob

EIS

Figure 1-14 Dual Concentric Knob

SOFTKEY FUNCTION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The softkeys are located along the bottoms of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level
or page being displayed. The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey. When
a softkey is selected, its color changes to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned
off, at which time it reverts to white text on black background. When a softkey function is disabled, the softkey
label is subdued (dimmed).

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity.
Softkey
On
Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (Press)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Softkey Names
(Displayed)
Figure 1-15 Softkeys (Third-Level PFD Configuration)

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

PFD SOFTKEYS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

The PFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and lightning (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be selected to return to the
previous level. The ALERTS Softkey is visible at all softkey levels (label changes if messages are issued).

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

The CDI, IDENT, TMR/REF, NRST, and ALERTS softkeys undergo a momentary change to black text on
gray background and automatically switch back to white text on black background when selected.

INSET
OFF

DCLTR (3)

Displays Inset Map in PFD lower left corner
Removes Inset Map
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:

DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible

DCLTR-1: Declutters land data

DCLTR-2: Declutters land and SUA data

DCLTR-3: Removes everything except for the active flight plan

TRAFFIC

Displays traffic information on Inset Map

TRAFFIC: No Traffic displayed on Inset Map

TRFC-1: Traffic displayed on Inset Map

TRFC-2: Traffic Only display shown
Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and elevation scale on
Inset Map
Displays terrain information on Inset Map
Displays Stormscope information on Inset Map (if installed)
Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD configurations
Displays the softkeys for enabling or disabling Synthetic Vision features
Displays rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the
active flight plan
Enables synthetic terrain depiction
Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line
Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm of the current aircraft
position. Airport identifiers are displayed when the airport is within approximately 9 nm.
Resets PFD to default settings, including changing units to standard
Displays softkeys to select wind data parameters
Displays headwind/tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components
Displays wind direction arrow with numeric speed
Displays wind direction arrow with numeric headwind/tailwind and cross-wind speed
components
Information not displayed
Displays DME Information Window
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through NAV1 or GPS waypoint identifier and
GPS-derived distance information, and ADF/frequency.

TOPO

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

TERRAIN
STRMSCP
PFD

SYN VIS
PATHWAY

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

SYN TERR
HRZN HDG
APTSIGNS

APPENDICES

DFLTS
WIND
OPTN 1
OPTN 2
OPTN 3

INDEX

OFF
DME
BRG1

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
HSI FRMT

ALT UNIT

Displays the softkeys for selecting the two HSI formats
Displays HSI as a 360° compass rose
Displays HSI as a 140° viewable arc
Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through NAV2 or GPS waypoint identifier and
GPS-derived distance information, and ADF/frequency.
Displays softkeys for setting the altimeter and BARO settings to metric units
When enabled, displays altimeter in meters
Press to display the BARO setting as inches of mercury

HPA

Press to display the BARO setting as hectopacals

STD BARO
OBS
CDI
DME
XPDR
STBY
ON
ALT

Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if metric units are selected)
Selects OBS mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with active leg)
Cycles through GPS, VOR1, and VOR2 navigation modes on the CDI
Displays the DME Tuning Window, allowing tuning and selection of the DME (optional)
Displays transponder mode selection softkeys
Selects standby mode (transponder does not reply to any interrogations)
Selects Mode A (transponder replies to interrogations)
Selects Mode C – altitude reporting mode (transponder replies to identification and
altitude interrogations)
Manually selects Ground Mode, the transponder does not allow Mode A and Mode C
replies, but it does permit acquisition squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode S
interrogations
Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in the U.S.A. only)
Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7
Use numbers to enter code
Removes numbers entered, one at a time
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds, identifying the
transponder return on the ATC screen
Displays Timer/References Window
Displays Nearest Airports Window
Displays Alerts Window

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

TMR/REF
NRST
ALERTS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

VFR
CODE

0—7
BKSP
IDENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

GND

EIS

METERS
IN

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

360 HSI
ARC HSI
BRG2

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

(optional)
INSET

PFD

OBS

CDI

DME

XPDR

IDENT

TMR/REF

ALERTS

BACK

ALERTS

APPENDICES

NRST

Press the CDI Softkey to cycle through
navigation sources:
- GPS
- NAV1 (VOR/LOC)
- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)

Figure 1-16 Top Level PFD Softkeys

DCLTR

Garmin G950
Pilot’s
Guide for the Pilatus PC-6
TOPO
TERRAIN STRMSCP

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A OFF

INSET

(if installed)

(optional)
INSET

PFD

OBS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

CDI

XPDR

DME

IDENT

Press the CDI Softkey to cycle through
navigation sources:
GPS
Press- the
CDI Softkey to cycle through
- NAV1
(VOR/LOC)
navigation
sources:
NAV2 (VOR/LOC)
-- GPS

TMR/REF

NRST

ALERTS

BACK

ALERTS

BACK

ALERTS

- NAV1 (VOR/LOC)
- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)

INSET

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

INSET

(if installed)

OFF

DCLTR

TOPO

TERRAIN STRMSCP
(if installed)

EIS

OFF

DCLTR

TOPO

DCLTR-1

TRFC-1

Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.

DCLTR-2
DCLTR-1

TRFC-2
TRFC-1

Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.

DCLTR-3
DCLTR-2

TRFC-2

DCLTR-3

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

TERRAIN STRMSCP

PFD

Figure 1-17 INSET Softkeys

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

PFD

(optional)
SYN VIS

DFLTS

WIND

DME

BRG1

HSI FMT

BRG2

ALT UNIT STD BARO

BACK

ALERTS

HSI FMT

BRG2

ALT UNIT STD BARO

BACK

ALERTS

(optional)
DFLTS

DME

WIND

BRG1

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

SYN VIS

Press the BRG1/BRG2
softkeys to display/remove
the Bearing Information
Press
the and
BRG1/BRG2
windows
cycle through
softkeys
to display/remove
bearing sources:
the Bearing
Information
- NAV1/NAV2
windows
and
- GPS cycle through
bearing sources:
NAV1/NAV2
360 HSI -ARC
HSI
- GPS

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

360 HSI

OPTN1

OPTN2

OPTN3

APPENDICES

OPTN1
OPTN2
OPTN3
PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS

Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.

ARC HSI

METERS

HPA

METERS

HPA

BACK

ALERTS

BACK

ALERTS

BACK

ALERTS

BACK

ALERTS

OFF

BACK

ALERTS

OFF

BACK

ALERTS
ALERTS

PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS

ALERTS

XPDR

INDEX

Figure 1-18 PFD Configuration Softkeys
XPDR
STBY

STBY

ALT

GND

VFR

CODE

IDENT

BACK

GND

VFR

CODE

IDENTPress

ALERTS

BACK
ALERTS
the BACK
Softkey
to return
to the top-level softkeys.

to return
Rev. A
Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6Press the BACK Softkey190-00870-02
3

IDENTto

ALERTS
theBKSP
top-levelBACK
softkeys.

OPTN1

OPTN2

OPTN3

BACK

OFF

ALERTS

SYSTEMALERTS
OVERVIEW

PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

XPDR

ALT

GND

VFR

CODE

IDENT

BACK

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

STBY

ALERTS

Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.

IDENT

BKSP

BACK

EIS

ALERTS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.

Figure 1-19 XPDR Softkeys

MFD SOFTKEYS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

MFD softkeys vary depending on the page selected. EIS and Navigation Map Page (default MFD page)
softkeys are described here.
MAP

ENGINE

DCLTR

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

DCLTR-1
DCLTR-2
DCLTR-3

FUEL

ENGINE

SYSTEM

FUEL

TRAFFIC PROFILE

TOPO

BACK

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

SYSTEM

AFCS

ENGINE

BACK

DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL

BACK

AIRWY ON

Select the BACK softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.

APPENDICES

(if installed)
TERRAIN AIRWAYS STRMSCP

AIRWY LO

INDEX

AIRWY HI

Figure 1-20 MFD Softkeys (EIS, Navigation Map Page, and Checklist)

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
ENGINE
ENGINE
SYSTEM

Displays second-level engine softkeys
Displays engine data in EIS Strip (see the Engine Instruments section)
Displays system data in EIS Strip (see the Engine Instruments section)

FUEL

Displays fuel data in EIS Strip and displays fuel system softkeys (see the Engine
Instruments section)
Decreases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Resets displayed fuel remaining to maximum fuel capacity for aircraft and fuel used to
zero
Returns to top-level softkeys
Enables second-level Navigation Map Page softkeys
Displays/removes traffic information on Navigation Map Page
Displays profile view on Navigation Map Page
Displays/removes topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) on
Navigation Map Page
Displays/removes terrain information on Navigation Map Page
Selects the desired display of Airways; cycles through:

AIRWY ON: All Airways displayed

AIRWY LO: Low Altitude (Victor) Airways displayed

AIRWY HI: High Altitude Airways (Jetways) displayed

AIRWAYS: Airways are not displayed
Displays Stormscope information on Navigation Map (optional)
Returns to top-level softkeys
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:

DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible

DCLTR-1: Removes land data

DCLTR-2: Removes land and SUA data

DCLTR-3: Removes everything except the active flight plan

EIS

DEC FUEL
INC FUEL
RST FUEL

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

BACK
MAP
TRAFFIC
PROFILE
TOPO

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

TERRAIN
AIRWAYS

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

STRMSCP
BACK
DCLTR (3)

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

1.6 ACCESSING G950 FUNCTIONALITY
MENUS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS

The G950 has a dedicated MENU Key that when pressed displays a context-sensitive list of options. This
options list allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to
the currently displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to
additional submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘NO OPTIONS’
when there are no options for the window/page selected. The main controls used in association with all
window/page group operations are described in Section 1.5, G950 Controls.
Navigating a menu:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the menu.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar always appears to the right of the
window/box when the option list is longer than the window/box).
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
No Options for
NRST Window

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

4) Press the CLR Key or the FMS Knob to remove the menu and cancel the operation.
Options for FPL Window

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 1-21 Page Menu Examples

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

DATA ENTRY

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

In some instances, such as when entering an identifier, the G950 tries to predict the desired identifier based
on the characters being entered. In this case, if the desired identifier appears, use the ENT Key to confirm the
entry without entering the rest of the identifier manually. This can save the pilot from entering all the characters
of the identifier.

The method for directly entering alphanumeric data (e.g., Flight ID, waypoint identifiers, barometric minimum
descent altitude) into the G950 is by using the FMS Knob corresponding to the display (PFD, MFD).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Besides character-by-character data entry, the system also provides a shortcut for entering waypoint identifiers.
When the cursor is on a field awaiting entry of a waypoint identifier, turning the small FMS Knob counterclockwise accesses five different lists of waypoint identifiers for quick selection: flight plan (FPL), nearest
(NRST), recently-entered (RECENT), user-defined (USER), and airway (AIRWAY)(AIRWAY available when
active leg is part of an airway). The G950 automatically fills in the identifier, facility, and city fields with the
information for the selected waypoint.
Using the FMS Knob to enter data:
1) If needed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

2) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field.
3) Begin entering data.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

a) To quickly enter a waypoint identifier, turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of waypoints
in the active flight plan (list is titled FPL). If desired, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to scroll through lists
of other waypoints (NRST, USER, AIRWAY, RECENT).
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to select a character for the first placeholder.

AFCS

Turning the knob clockwise scrolls through the alphabet (where appropriate) toward the letter Z, starting at
K, and the digits zero through nine. Afterwards, turning the knob counter-clockwise scrolls in the opposite
direction.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

b) Use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next placeholder in the field.
c) Repeat, using the small FMS Knob to select a character and the large FMS Knob to move the cursor, until the
field is complete.
d) Press the ENT Key to confirm entry.

INDEX

APPENDICES

7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to cancel data entry (the field reverts back to its previous information).

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

PAGE GROUPS
NOTE: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.

EIS

Active Page Title

Page Group

MFD

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Information on the MFD is presented on pages which are grouped according to function. The page group and
active page title are displayed in the upper center of the screen, below the Navigation Status Box. In the bottom
right corner of the screen, the page group tabs are displayed along the bottom Number of pages available in the
group are displayed in a list above the page groups. The current page group and current page within the group
are shown in cyan. For some of these pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather Information, Procedure Loading), the
active title of the page changes while the page name in the list remains the same.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Pages in
Current
Group

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Page Groups
Figure 1-22 Page Title and Page Groups

AFCS

The main page groups are navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary depending
on the configuration of optional equipment.
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

1) Turn the large FMS Knob to display the list of page groups; continue turning the large FMS Knob until the
desired page group is selected
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired page within a specific page group.

APPENDICES

There are also several pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather Information pages) which are selected first from
within a main page group with the FMS Knob, then with the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page. In
this case, the page remains set to the selected page until a different page softkey is selected, even if a different
page group is selected.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• Map Page Group (MAP)
Navigation Map

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Traffic Map
Weather Radar (optional)
Stormscope (optional)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Terrain Map

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 1-23 Map Pages

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Waypoint Pages (WPT)
Airport/Procedures Information Pages
- Airport Information
(INFO-1 Softkey)

AFCS

- Airport Directory Information
(INFO-2 Softkey)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

- Arrival Information
(STAR Softkey)

APPENDICES

- Departure Information
(DP Softkey)

Intersection Information

- Approach Information
(APR Softkey)
NDB Information

Airport/Procedures/
Weather Information
Pages

VOR Information
User Waypoint Information

INDEX

Figure 1-24 Waypoint Pages

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

• Auxiliary Page Group (AUX)
Trip Planning
Utility

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

GPS Status
System Setup
System Status
Video

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 1-25 Auxiliary Pages

Maintenance data is continuously recorded by the Central Maintenance Computer (CMC). At the discretion
of the Aircraft Manufacturer, this data may be displayed on an OEM DIAGNOSTICS Page accessible from within
the AUX Page Group.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• Nearest Page Group (NRST)
Nearest Airports
Nearest Intersections
Nearest NDB

AFCS

Nearest VOR
Nearest User Waypoints

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Nearest Frequencies
Nearest Airspaces

APPENDICES

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

Figure 1-26 Nearest Pages

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
In addition to the main page groups accessed exclusively using the FMS Knob, there are pages for flight
planning (FPL) and loading procedures (PROC) which are accessed by key. In some instances, softkeys may be
used to access the Procedure Loading pages.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Flight Plan pages are accessed using the FPL Key on the MFD. Main pages within this group are selected
by turning the small FMS Knob.
• Flight Plan Page Group (FPL)
Active Flight Plan
Flight Plan Catalog

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

- Stored Flight Plan
(NEW Softkey)

Figure 1-27 Flight Plan Pages

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The Procedure Loading pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu
is initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading page is
opened. These pages can also be accessed from the Stored Flight Plan page using the LD softkeys. Turning the
FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure Loading pages.
• Procedure Loading Page Group (PROC)
Departure Loading

AFCS

Arrival Loading

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Approach Loading

Figure 1-28 Procedure Loading Pages

INDEX

Information on optional electronic checklist pages is offered later in this section. Checklist pages may be
accessed from any page on the MFD using the CHKLIST Softkey.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM SETTINGS
The System Setup Page allows management of the following system parameters:
• Audio alert voice

• Displayed measurement units

• MFD Data Bar (Navigation Status Box) fields
(see the Flight Management Section)
• GPS Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) range
(see the Flight Instruments Section)

• Barometric Transition Alert
(see the Flight Instruments Section)

EIS

• COM transceiver channel spacing
(see the Audio Panel and CNS Section)
• Displayed nearest airports
(see the Flight Management Section)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Airspace alerts
(see the Flight Management Section)
• Arrival alert

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• Time display format (local or UTC )

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 1-29 System Setup Page

Restoring system setup defaults:
INDEX

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the DFLTS Softkey.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Or:

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Restore Defaults’ and press the ENT Key.

PILOT PROFILES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

System settings may be saved under a pilot profile. When the system is powered on, the last selected pilot
profile is shown on the MFD Power-up Splash Screen. The G950 can store up to 25 profiles; the currently
active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory available are shown at the top of
the System Setup Page in the box labeled ‘Pilot Profile’. From here, pilot profiles may be created, selected,
renamed, or deleted.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 1-31 Display Unit Settings (System Setup Page)

Creating a profile:

APPENDICES

1) Select the AUX - System Setup 1 Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CREATE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ window is displayed.

INDEX

5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Pilot profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or current system settings.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

7) Press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘CREATE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile

Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CREATE and ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
9) To cancel the process, select ‘CANCEL’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.

Selecting an active profile:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup 1 Page.

EIS

2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the Pilot Profile Box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the pilot profile list and highlight the desired profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The G950 loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
Renaming a profile:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1) Select the AUX - System Setup 1 Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘RENAME’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
6) Press the ENT Key.

7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘RENAME’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

AFCS

9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.

Deleting a profile:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup 1 Page.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘DELETE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
6) Press the ENT Key.

7) With ‘DELETE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

If an SD card is inserted into the top slot of the MFD, pilot profiles may imported from the SD card into
the system, or exported from the system to the SD card.

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Because system settings may vary from one airframe to another, always verify system settings from an
imported profile are consistent with the desired settings.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Importing a profile from an SD card:
1) Insert an SD card containing the pilot profile(s) into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup 1 Page.
3) Select the IMPORT Softkey.
Or:
EIS

a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Import Pilot Profile’ and press the ENT Key.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) The system displays the Pilot Profile Importing window with ‘IMPORT’ highlighted. To change the selected
profile to be imported from the SD card (shown as ‘SELECT FILE’), turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the
profile file name, then turn the small FMS Knob to highlight a profile from the list, and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

5) If desired, the profile name to be used after profile has been imported can be changed by turning the FMS
Knob to highlight the ‘PROFILE NAME’ field, then use the large and small FMS Knobs to enter the name, and
press the ENT Key. Imported profile names cannot begin with a blank space or be named ‘DEFAULT’, ‘GARMIN
DEFAULTS’ or ‘DEFAULT SETTINGS’.
6) With ‘IMPORT’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

7) If the imported profile name is the same as an existing profile on the system, the system displays an ‘Overwrite
existing file? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace profile on the system with the profile
imported from the SD card, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to the
Pilot Profile Importing window.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

8) If successful, the system displays ‘Pilot profile import succeeded.’ in the IMPORT RESULTS window below. With
‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT or CLR Keys or press the FMS Knob to return to the AUX - System Setup 1 Page.
The imported profile becomes the active profile.

INDEX

Pilot Profile Importing and Import
Pilot Profiles Available for Import from
Results Window
SD Card (‘STEVE’S PROFILE’ Selected)
Figure 1-32 Pilot Profile Import (AUX - System Setup 1 Page)

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

Import Successful

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Exporting a profile to an SD card:
1) Insert the SD card for storing the Pilot Profile into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup 1 Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) If necessary, activate the desired pilot profile to export. Only the currently active Pilot Profile can be exported.
4) Select the EXPORT Softkey. The system displays the Pilot Profile Exporting window.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.

EIS

b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Export Pilot Profile’ and press the ENT Key.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

5) To export the pilot profile using the current supplied name, press the ENT Key with ‘EXPORT’ highlighted. To
change the profile file name turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘SELECT FILE’ field, then enter the new
name with the large and small FMS Knobs, then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key with ‘EXPORT’
highlighted.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

6) If the profile name to be exported is the same as an existing profile file name on the SD card, the system displays
an ‘Overwrite existing file? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace the profile on the SD card
with the profile to be exported, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to
the Pilot Profile Exporting window without exporting the profile.
7) If successful, the EXPORT RESULTS window displays ‘Pilot profile export succeeded.’ With ‘OK’ highlighted,
press the ENT or CLR Keys, or press the FMS Knob to return to the AUX - System Setup 1 Page.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Export Successful
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Pilot Profile Exporting Window, Enter a
Name to Use for Exported Profile

Figure 1-33 Pilot Profile Export on the AUX - System Setup 1 Page

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
DATE/TIME

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The system time is displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Time and date format (local 12-hr,
local 24-hr, or UTC) are modified on the System Setup Page. Universal Coordinated Time (UTC; also called
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) or Zulu) date and time are calculated directly from the GPS satellites signals
and cannot be changed. An offset is provided to add or subtract the desired amount of time (hours:minutes)
from UTC to define current local time.
Configuring the system time:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.

EIS

2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Time Format’ field.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm selection. The ‘Time
Offset’ field is highlighted (for local time formats).
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) and press the ENT Key to confirm selection.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

DISPLAY UNITS
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the G950 screens can be changed on the System Setup
Page.
Changing a display units setting:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Display Units’ box.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select from a list of measurement units and press the ENT Key when the desired
unit is highlighted.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Temperature

Celsius
Fahrenheit*
Gallons*

All temperatures on PFD
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
Fuel parameters (Trip Planning Page)

Position

Pounds*
N/A
Kilograms
HDDD°MM.MM’* All positions
HDDD°MM’SS.S”

Engine Indication System (EIS)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Fuel and
Fuel Flow**
Weight

Altimeter
Vertical Speed Indicator
VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan)
Engine Indication System (EIS)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Feet*
Meters

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Altitude and
Vertical Speed

Airspeed Indicator
True Airspeed (PFD)
Wind speed vector
Map range (Traffic Page, Terrain
Page)
CDI scaling (System Setup)
Fuel range calculation (EIS)

EIS

Metric
Nautical*

Exceptions

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Distance and
Speed**

Affected Quantities
Heading
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind direction (Trip Planning Page)
Crosstrack error (HSI)
Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK fields (Navigation Status Box)
All distances on MFD
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)
Arrival Alert trigger distance (System Setup)
All speeds on MFD
All altitudes on MFD
All elevations on MFD

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Category
Settings
Navigation Angle Magnetic*
True

N/A
N/A

AFCS

* Default setting
** Contact a Garmin-authorized service center to change this setting
Table 1-1 Display Units Settings (System Status Page)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AIRSPACE ALERTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Airspace Alert feature provides a message alert when the aircraft is approaching or near a controlled or
special-use airspace. The altitude buffer setting increases the range above or below an airspace for which an
alert is generated; the default value is 200 feet. Alerts for the following airspaces can be turned on/off from
the System Setup Page:
• Class B/TMA

• Class D

• MOA (Military)

• Class C/TCA

• Restricted

• Other airspaces

EIS

Turning Airspace Alerts off does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace
boundaries depicted on the Navigation Map Page.
Turning an airspace alert on or off:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
4) Enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.

ARRIVAL ALERTS

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

The Arrival Alert Box on the System Setup Page allows the Alerts Window arrival alerts to be turned
ON/OFF, and the alert trigger distance (up to 99.9 units) set for alerts in the Alerts Window and the PFD
Navigation Status Box. An arrival alert can be set to notify the pilot with a message upon reaching a userspecified distance from the final destination (the direct-to waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight plan).
When Arrival Alerts is set to ON, and the set distance is reached, an “Arrival at waypoint” message is displayed
in the PFD Navigation Status Box, and a “WPT ARRIVAL - Arriving at waypoint - [xxxx]” is displayed in the
Alerts Window. When Arrival Alerts is set to OFF, only the PFD Navigation Status Box message “Arriving at
waypoint” is displayed, and it is displayed when the time to the final destination is approximately ten seconds.

Figure 1-30 Arrival Alert Settings (System Setup Page)

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Enabling/disabling the Alerts Window arrival alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ON/OFF field in the Arrival Alert Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.

Changing the arrival alert trigger distance:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.

EIS

2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the distance field in the Arrival Alert Box.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) Use the FMS Knob to enter a trigger distance and press the ENT Key.

AUDIO ALERTS
The gender of the voice used to announce audio alerts may be set to male or female on the System Setup
Page. See the Appendices for voice alerts.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Changing the audio alert voice:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the voice in the Audio Alert Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and highlight the desired voice and press the ENT Key.

GPS CDI

AFCS

The GPS CDI Box on the System Setup Page allows the pilot to define the scale for the Course Deviation
Indicator (CDI) when GPS is the selected navigation source and also displays the current system value for the
CDI scale. The range values represent full scale deflection for the CDI to either side. The default setting is
‘Auto’ (refer to the CDI description in the Flight Instruments Section for information on CDI scaling).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

If a lower CDI scale setting is selected (i.e., 1.0 or 0.3 nm), the higher scale settings are not selected during
any phase of flight. Note that the Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) protection limits follow
the selected CDI scale and corresponding flight phase.
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:

APPENDICES

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Selected’ in the ‘GPS CDI’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting (2 nm, 1 nm, 0.3 nm, Auto) and press the ENT Key.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
COM CONFIGURATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The COM Configuration Box on the System Setup Page allows the pilot to select 8.33 kHz or 25.0 kHz
COM frequency channel spacing.
Changing COM channel spacing:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the channel spacing field in the COM Configuration Box.
EIS

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired spacing and press the ENT Key.

NEAREST AIRPORTS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the nine nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not of appropriate surface from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway length and
“any” for runway surface type.
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria (any, hard only, hard/soft, water):
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (any, hard only, hard/soft, water) and press the
ENT Key.
Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:

AFCS

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4) Enter the minimum runway length (zero to 99,999 feet) and press the ENT Key.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM UTILITIES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

For flight planning purposes, timers, trip statistics, and a scheduler feature are provided on the AUX - Utility
Page. The timers available include a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer, and a record of the
time of departure. Trip statistics—odometer, trip odometer, and average trip and maximum groundspeeds—are
displayed from the time of the last reset. A scheduler feature is also provided so the pilot can enter reminder
messages to be displayed at specified intervals in the Alerts Window on the PFD (see Figure 1-32).

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Figure 1-31 Utility Page

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

TIMERS

APPENDICES

The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the countdown
on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before reaching zero
on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when reset, the digits are
zeroed.
Setting the generic timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (UP/DN) and press the ENT Key.

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
4) If a desired starting time is desired:
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS field.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘START?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to
‘STOP?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.

EIS

7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.

The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the
aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Setting the flight timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the flight timer.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.

Resetting the flight timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

AFCS

The G950 records the time at which departure occurs, measured from system power-up or aircraft lift off.
The displayed departure time can also be reset to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in
which the time is displayed is controlled from the System Setup Page.
Setting the departure timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the departure time.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

Resetting the departure time:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.

INDEX

3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

TRIP STATISTICS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The odometer and trip odometer record the total mileage traveled from the last reset; these odometers can
be reset independently. Resetting the trip odometer also resets the average trip groundspeed. Maximum
groundspeed for the period of time since the last reset is also displayed.
Resetting trip statistics readouts:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key. The following reset options for trip statistics are displayed:

EIS

• Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS—Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer

• Reset Odometer—Resets odometer readout only

• Reset Maximum Speed—Resets maximum speed readout only

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Reset All—Resets flight timer, departure timer, odometers, and groundspeed readouts
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the desired reset option and press the ENT Key. The selected parameters are reset
to zero and begin to display data from the point of reset.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

SCHEDULER

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., “Change oil”, “Switch
fuel tanks”, “Overhaul”). Messages can be set to display based on a specific date and time (event), once the
message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently whenever the message timer reaches
zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically reset to the original timer value once
the message is displayed. When power is cycled, messages are retained until deleted, and message timer
countdown is restarted.
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.

AFCS

2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Alerts Window and press the ENT Key.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to ‘Type’.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select set the message alert type:

• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time

APPENDICES

• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)

• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.

INDEX

8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HHH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
9) For event-based messages:

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MMM-YYY) and press the ENT Key.
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.

Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

EIS

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

5) Press the ENT Key to confirm message deletion.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Scheduler messages appear in the Alerts Window on the PFD and cause the ALERTS Softkey label to
change to ‘ADVISORY’. Selecting the ADVISORY Softkey opens the Alerts Window and acknowledges
the scheduler message. The softkey reverts to the ‘ALERTS’ label and when pressed, the Alerts Window is
removed from the display and the scheduler message is deleted from the message list.

PFD

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 1-32 PFD Alerts Window

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

1.7 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Backlighting of the PFD and MFD, and Audio Panel keys can be adjusted automatically or manually. The
automatic setting (default) uses photocells to adjust for ambient lighting conditions. Photocell calibration curves
are pre-configured to optimize display appearance through a broad range of cockpit lighting conditions. In
normal display mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD. In Reversionary Mode, it can be adjusted
from the remaining display(s).
Adjusting display backlighting manually:

EIS

1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’. No
other window can be displayed on the PFD while the PFD Setup Menu is displayed. Pressing the MENU Key
while any other PFD window is displayed does not display the PFD Setup Menu.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.

4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’ next to ‘MFD DSPL’ and repeat steps 2-4.
5) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Adjusting key backlighting manually:
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD DSPL’.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD KEY’.

4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.

AFCS

7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘MFD DSPL’.
8) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘MFD KEY’ and repeat steps 4-7.
9) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

PFD
Figure 1-33 PFD Setup Menu

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Blank Page

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

WARNING: In the event that the airspeed, attitude, altitude, or heading indications become unusable, refer

to the backup instruments.
Increased situational awareness is provided by replacing the traditional instruments on the panel with an easyto-scan Primary Flight Display (PFD) that features a large horizon, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and
course deviation information. In addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication, terrain, traffic,
and weather information are also presented on the PFD and explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.

EIS

The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
• Airspeed Indicator, showing

• References Window, showing

– True airspeed

• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators

– Airspeed awareness ranges

• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)

– Vspeed values and bugs

– Trend vector

• Horizontal Situation Indicator,
showing

– Barometric minimum descent
altitude (MDA; or decision
height, DH)

• Altimeter, showing
– Barometric setting
– Selected Altitude

– Turn Rate Indicator

• System time

– Navigation source

• Wind data

– Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)

• Vertical Navigation indications
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

– Trend vector

– Heading and course indications

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid
indication

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

– Reference

– Generic timer

– Bearing pointers and
information windows
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT)

AFCS

The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

16
15
2

EIS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

12
11

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

9
8

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

7
1

NAV Frequency Box

Turn Rate Indicator

Airspeed Indicator

Altimeter Barometric Setting

True Airspeed

Selected Altitude Bug

Current Heading

Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)

Selected Heading Bug

Altimeter

Outside Air Temperature (OAT)

Selected Altitude

Softkeys

COM Frequency Box

System Time

Navigation Status Box

Transponder Data Box

Slip/Skid Indicator

Horizontal Situation Indicator ( HSI)

Attitude Indicator

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

EIS

12
11

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

3
4

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Flight Plan Window

Selected Heading

Annunciation Window

Wind Data

10 Selected Course

Inset Map

Vertical Speed Required

DME Information Window

Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)

Bearing Information Windows

Current VNV Target Altitude

Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision
Height

Terrain Annunciation

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Traffic Annunciation

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 2-2 Primary Flight Display (Additional Information)

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for airspeed criteria and Vspeed values.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a rolling number gauge using a moving tape. The true airspeed
(TAS) is displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator. The numeric labels and major tick marks on the
moving tape are shown at intervals of 10 knots, while minor tick marks on the moving tape are indicated at
intervals of five knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 60 knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The
actual airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until reaching never-exceed
speed (VNE), at which point it appears red.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Airspeed
Trend
Vector
Speed
Ranges

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Indicated
Airspeed

Vspeed
Reference

True
Airspeed

AFCS

Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator

Figure 2-4 Red Pointer
Showing Overspeed

A color-coded (red, white, green, yellow, and red/white ‘barber pole”) speed range strip is located on the
moving tape. The colors denote flaps operating range, normal operating range, caution range, and never-exceed
speed (VNE). A red range is also present for low speed awareness.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical, magenta line that appears to the right of the color-coded speed
range strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating. One end of the magenta line is anchored to
the tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down corresponding to the rate
of acceleration or deceleration. For any constant rate of acceleration or deceleration, the moving end of the
line shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will be in six seconds. If the trend vector crosses
VNE, the text of the actual airspeed readout changes to yellow. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains
constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Vspeeds (Glide, VX, and VY,) can be changed and their bugs enabled/disabled from the References Window
(Figure 2-5). When enabled (on), the Vspeed bugs appear at their respective locations to the right of the
airspeed scale.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Changing Vspeed values and enabling/disabling Vspeed bugs:
1) Select the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired Vspeed.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to change the Vspeed in 1-kt increments (when a speed has been changed from a
default value, an asterisk appears next to the speed).

EIS

4) Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ON/OFF field

5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or select the TMR/REF Softkey.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 2-6 Timer/References Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 2-5 References Window

Enabling/disabling all Vspeed bugs together:
1) Select the TMR/REF Softkey.

AFCS

2) Press the MENU Key.
3) To view all Vspeed bugs, highlight ‘All References On’ and press the ENT Key (Figure 2-6).
4) To remove all Vspeed bugs, turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘All References Off’ and press the ENT Key.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Restoring all Vspeed defaults:
1) Select the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.

APPENDICES

3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Restore Defaults’ and press the ENT Key.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

ATTITUDE INDICATOR

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch (indicated by the yellow symbolic aircraft on the pitch scale), roll, and
slip/skid information.
9

1
EIS

7
2
6

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Roll Pointer

Roll Scale

Horizon Line

Aircraft Symbol

Land Representation

Pitch Scale

Slip/Skid Indicator

Sky Representation

Roll Scale Zero

Figure 2-7 Attitude Indicator

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up
to 25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch
marks occur every 2.5˚. If the optional Garmin Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) is activated, the pitch scale
is reduced to 10˚ up and 7.5˚ down; refer to the Additional Features section for more information about SVT.

AFCS

The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator moves with the roll pointer and
moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate lateral acceleration Slip/skid is indicated by the location of
the bar relative to the pointer. One bar displacement is equal to one ball displacement on a traditional Slip/Skid
Indicator.

INDEX

Figure 2-8 Slip/Skid Indication

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ALTIMETER

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a rolling number gauge using a
moving tape. Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at
intervals of 20 feet. The indicated altitude is displayed in the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape; if the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the corresponding edge of the tape. The metric value, when selected, is displayed in a
separate box above the Selected Altitude.

EIS

A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in 6 seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown if
altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Setting the Selected Altitude:
T urn the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude (large knob for 1000-ft increments, small knob for 100-ft
increments). If set to Metric mode, the large knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 500-meter increments; the
small knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 50-meter increments.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

If a Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) has been set, this altitude is also available for the
Selected Altitude.
Selected
Altitude
(Meters)

Selected
Altitude

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Minimum Descent
Altitude/Decision
Height Bug

Barometric
Setting
(Hectopascals)

Barometric
Setting

Figure 2-10 Altimeter (Metric Units)

APPENDICES

Figure 2-9 Altimeter

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Selected
Altitude Bug

AFCS

Indicated
Altitude

Altitude
Trend
Vector

Indicated
Altitude
(Meters)

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Selected and current altitudes can also be displayed in meters (readouts displayed above the normal readouts
in feet; Figure 2-10). Note that the altitude tape does not change scale.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Displaying altitude in meters:
1) Select the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Select the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Select the METERS Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts.
4) Select the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV
vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the aircraft
to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target Altitude,
the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.

Selecting standard barometric pressure (29.92 in Hg):
1) Select the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Select the STD BARO Softkey; STD BARO is displayed in barometric setting box.

Figure 2-11 Standard Barometric Altimeter Setting

AFCS

Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
1) Select the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Select the ALT UNIT Softkey.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Select the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).

Or, select the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa; see Figure 2-10).

INDEX

APPENDICES

4) Select the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

A Baro Transition Alert is provided to notify the pilot to change the barometric pressure setting when crossing
the baro transition altitude. If the aircraft is at least 500 feet below the transition altitude and then climbs
through this altitude and the STD BARO Softkey has not been pressed, the barometric pressure setting flashes
in cyan until the pressure setting is changed. If the aircraft is at least 500 feet above the transition altitude and
then descends through this altitude and the barometric pressure setting has not been changed from STD BARO,
the setting flashes in cyan until it is changed (Figure 2-12).
Setting the Baro Transition Alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.

EIS

2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘OFF or ON’ in the ‘BARO TRANSITION ALERT’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to turn the alert OFF or ON and press the ENT Key.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

5) With the altitude field highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired altitude and press the ENT
Key.
6) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Pressure setting flashes during descent below
transition altitude to indicate setting has not
been changed from STD BARO.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pressure setting flashes during climb above
transition altitude if the STD BARO Softkey
has not been pressed.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

Figure 2-12 Baro Transition Alert
(AUX - System Setup Page)

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI, Figure 2-13) displays the aircraft vertical speed using a non-moving tape
labeled at 1000 and 2000 fpm with minor tick marks every 500 fpm. The current vertical speed is displayed
in the pointer along the tape. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate is greater than 100
fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 2000 fpm, the pointer appears at the corresponding edge of the tape
and the rate appears inside the pointer.

EIS

A magenta chevron bug is displayed as the Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI; Figure 2-13) for reaching
a VNV Target Altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has been generated. Refer to
Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more information about VNV indications on the PFD.

VERTICAL DEVIATION

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator is only available on GPS approaches supporting SBAS vertical guidance when

SBAS is available.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI; Figure 2-13) is a magenta chevron indicating the baro-VNV vertical
deviation when Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used. The VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within
1 minute” alert. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight
Management Section for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more
information about VNV indications on the PFD.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The Glideslope Indicator (Figure 2-14) appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is
tuned in the active NAV field. A green diamond acts as the Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on
a conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no glideslope, “NO GS” is displayed in
place of the diamond.

AFCS

The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for GPS approach service levels supporting SBAS vertical guidance
(LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LPV, LP+V). When an approach of one of these service levels is loaded into the flight
plan and GPS is the selected navigation source, the Glidepath Indicator (Figure 2-15) appears as a magenta
diamond when the aircraft reaches a point prior to the FAF. If the approach service level changes past the final
approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the diamond.

Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed

Marker
Beacon
Annunciation

Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Scale
Current Glideslope
Vertical
Indicator
Speed
Pointer

GIidepath
Indicator

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

VNV Target
Altitude

Figure 2-13 Vertical Speed and
Deviation Indicator (VSI and VDI)

Figure 2-14 Glideslope
Indicator

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

Figure 2-15 Glidepath
Indicator

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points and numeric labels occur every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor
tick marks at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI, and the current
track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond. The HSI also presents turn rate, course deviation,
bearing, and navigation source information and is available in two formats (360˚ compass rose and 140˚ arc).
Changing the HSI display format:
1) Select the PFD Softkey.

EIS

2) Select the HSI FRMT Softkey.
3) Select the 360 HSI or ARC HSI Softkey.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The 360˚ HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a
sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double
line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with
the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.

1
2

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Turn Rate Indicator

To/From Indicator

Current Track Indicator

Course Pointer

Lateral Deviation Scale

Selected Heading Bug

Navigation Source

Flight Phase

Aircraft Symbol

6
7

Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
Rotating Compass Rose

OBS Mode Active

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

APPENDICES

Turn Rate/Heading
Trend Vector
14 Current Heading
Lubber Line

INDEX

Figure 2-16 Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Arc HSI is a 140˚ expanded section of the compass rose. The Arc HSI contains a Course Pointer,
To/From Indicator, a sliding deviation indicator (the To/From and deviation indicators are combined), and a
deviation scale. Upon station passage, the To/From Indicator flips and points to the tail of the aircraft, just like
a conventional To/From flag. Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the Arc HSI can appear in two
different ways: an arrowhead (GPS, VOR, OBS) or a diamond (LOC).

EIS

Course Pointer
Navigation
Source

Flight Phase
Annunciation

Lateral
Deviation
Scale

Course Deviation and
To/From Indicator

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 2-17 Arc HSI

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The Selected Heading is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted The cyan bug
on the compass rose corresponds to the Selected Heading. While the HSI is displayed as an arc, if the Selected
Heading Bug is adjusted off the shown portion of the compass rose, the digital reading displayed.
Adjusting the Selected Heading:

Turn the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading.

Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The Selected Course is shown to the upper right of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted. While the
HSI is displayed as an arc, the Selected Course is displayed whenever the Course Pointer is not within the 140˚
currently shown.
Adjusting the Selected Course:

AFCS

Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course.

Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station (see OBS Mode for adjusting a GPS course).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Current Track Indicator

Current Heading
Selected
Course

APPENDICES

Selected
Heading

Selected
Heading
Bug

INDEX

Figure 2-18 Heading and Course Indications

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation (‘Mag
Var’) or referenced to true north (denoted ‘T’), set on the AUX - System Setup Page. When an approach
referenced to true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the
navigation angle setting to ‘True’ at the appropriate time.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS

Figure 2-19 Heading and Course Indications (True)

Changing the navigation angle setting:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Nav Angle’ in the ‘Display Units’ box.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
• TRUE - References angles to true north (denoted with ‘T’)
• MAGNETIC - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (‘Mag Var’)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

Figure 2-20 Navigation Angle Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
TURN RATE INDICATOR

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in six seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than
4 deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Half-standard
Turn Rate
Standard
Turn Rate

Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 deg/sec

Figure 2-21 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

BEARING INFORMATION
NOTE: When the Arc HSI is displayed, the Bearing Information windows and pointers are disabled.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV, GPS and sources.
The pointers are cyan and are single- (BRG1) or double-lined (BRG2); an icon is shown in the respective
information window to indicate the pointer type. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are
visually separated from the CDI by a white ring (shown when bearing pointers are selected but not necessarily
visible due to data unavailability).
Tuning Mode

AFCS

Frequency
Distance

Bearing 2 Bearing 1
Pointer
Pointer

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

DME Information Window
(optional)

APPENDICES

Distance to
Bearing Source

Station
Identifier

Distance to
Bearing Source

Station
Identifier

Pointer
Icon
Bearing
Source

Bearing 2 Information Window

Pointer
Icon

INDEX

Bearing 1 Information Window

Bearing
Source

Figure 2-22 HSI with Bearing and DME Information

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

When a bearing pointer is displayed, its associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information windows (Figure 2-22) are displayed to the lower sides of the HSI and show:
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, GPS)

• Pointer icon (BRG1=single line, BRG2=double line)

• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing source

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• Bearing source (NAV, GPS, ADF)
• Frequency (NAV, ADF)

EIS

If the NAV radio is the bearing source and is tuned to an ILS frequency (refer to the Audio Panel and CNS
Section for information on tuning the radios), the bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and the frequency
is replaced with “ILS”. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the
station identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier
is displayed in lieu of a frequency.
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and “NO DATA” is displayed in the information window if:
• GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint
is not selected

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• The NAV radio is not receiving the tuned VOR
station
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1) Select the PFD Softkey.
2) Select a BRG Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window with a NAV source.
3) Select the BRG Softkey again to change the bearing source to GPS.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

4) Press the BRG Softkey a third time to change the bearing source to ADF (note: ADF radio installation is
optional).
5) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, select the BRG Softkey again.

DME INFORMATION WINDOW
NOTE: DME radio installation is optional.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The DME Information Window (Figure 2-22) is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window and shows
the DME label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD), frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid,
the distance is replaced by “–.– – NM”. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning
the radios.
Displaying the DME Information Window:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.

APPENDICES

2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window above the BRG1 Information Window.
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
NOTE: If a heading change of greater than 105˚ with respect to the course is made, the CDI on the Arc HSI

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

switches to the opposite side of the deviation scale and displays reverse sensing.
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.

EIS

360º HSI

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Arc HSI

Navigation
Source
Scale

Flight
Phase

Navigation
Source

Flight
Phase

CDI

CDI
Scale

CDI

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Crosstrack
Error

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 2-23 Course Deviation Indicator

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

The CDI can display two sources of navigation: GPS or NAV (VOR, localizer). Color indicates the current
navigation source: magenta (for GPS) or green (for VOR and LOC). The full scale limits for the CDI are defined
by a GPS-derived distance when coupled to GPS. When coupled to a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI has the
same angular limits as a mechanical CDI. If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots)
while coupled to GPS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.

INDEX

Figure 2-24 Navigation Sources

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Changing navigation sources:
1) Select the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. This places the cyan tuning box over the NAV1
standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Select the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This places the cyan tuning box
over the NAV2 standby frequency.
3) Select the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
NAV1 Selected for Tuning

NAV2 Selected for Tuning
EIS

LOC1
Selected

LOC2
Selected

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

GPS
Selected

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

CDI Softkey
Cycles Through
Navigation Sources
Figure 2-25 Selecting a Navigation Source

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling accordingly
when all of the following occur:
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan

AFCS

• The final approach fix (FAF) is the active leg, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
• The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating
a Vector-to-Final (VTF; see the Flight Management Section) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation
source; GPS steering guidance is not provided after this switch.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
GPS CDI SCALING

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to yellow. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, ‘HDG LEG’ is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.

EIS

The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as ‘System CDI’ on the AUX - System Setup Page and the fullscale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page. If the selected
scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled accordingly
and the selected setting is be displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation.
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘SELECTED’ field in the ‘GPS CDI’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.

APPENDICES

Figure 2-26 GPS CDI Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)

INDEX

When set to ‘Auto’ (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-27, Table 2-1).

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

Enroute
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)

Terminal

Approach

0.3 nm

1.0 nm

2.0 nm

0.3 nm

1.0 nm

Terminal

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

CDI Full-scale Deflection

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Departure

Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures

Missed
Approach

EIS

Figure 2-27 Automatic CDI Scaling
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• When a departure procedure is active, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

- The next leg in the procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF (see
Glossary for leg type definitions)
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not CA or FA

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• At 30 nm from the departure airport, the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale will not change until
the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or the
leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.

AFCS

• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (2.0 nm).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm; except under the following conditions:
- Upon reaching the first waypoint of an arrival route that is more than 31 nm from the destination airport,
the flight phase changes to terminal and the CDI scale begins to transition down from 2.0 nm to 1.0 nm
over a distance of 1.0 nm.

APPENDICES

• During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (see Figures 2-28 and 2-29). This transition
normally occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling
automatically once the approach procedure is activated or if Vector-to-Final (VTF) is selected.
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.

2 nm

FAF

EIS

CDI scale varies if VTF is activated

0.3 nm

1.0 nm

2 nm

FAF

Landing
Threshold

CDI scale varies if VTF is activated

Figure 2-28 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach Service Level
CDI Scaling

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

angle based
on database
information

course width

angle set
by system

CDI Full-scale Deflection

0.3 nm

1.0 nm

CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system

350 ft

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

CDI Full-scale Deflection

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

Figure 2-29 Typical LNAV/VNAV, LP, LPV, and LP+V Approach
Service Level CDI Scaling

• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
• The system automatically switches back to terminal scaling under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not CA or FA

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Flight Phase
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
Approach
LNAV
LNAV+V
Approach
LNAV/VNAV
LPV
LP
LP+V
Missed Approach

Annunciation*
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN
LNAV
LNAV+V
L/VNAV
LPV
LP
LP+V
MAPR

Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
2.0 nm
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (see Figure 2-28)

1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (see Figure 2-29)
0.3 nm

APPENDICES

* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary
conditions exist the color changes to yellow.

INDEX

Table 2-1 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

OBS MODE
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current “active-to” waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. ‘OBS’ is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected.

EIS

While OBS Mode is enabled, a course line is drawn through the “active-to” waypoint on the moving map.
If desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the GPS flight
plan returns to normal operation with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight path on the moving map retains the modified course line.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

GPS
Selected

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

OBS Mode
Enabled

Extended
Course
Line

Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again
Disables OBS Mode

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pressing the OBS
Softkey Enables
OBS Mode
Figure 2-30 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode

Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
AFCS

1) Select the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press the CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Select the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. ‘SUSP’ appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey label
changes to indicate the suspension is active as shown in Figure 2-31. Pressing the SUSP Softkey deactivates
the suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

SUSP
Annunciation

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

SUSP
Softkey

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 2-31 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

2.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
NOTE: Selecting the DFLTS Softkey (a second-level PFD softkey) turns off metric Altimeter display, the Inset

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Map, and wind data display.
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information, including the
Outside Air Temperature (OAT), wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications.

OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE
EIS

The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) is displayed in degrees Celsius (°C) in the lower left of the PFD under
normal display conditions. During reversionary display conditions the OAT is displayed to the right of the flap
indicator.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Normal Display

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Reversionary Mode with EIS
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 2-32 Outside Air Temperature
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

WIND DATA

Option 1

Option 2

Option 3

No Data

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Wind direction and speed (relative to the aircraft) in knots can be displayed in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
shows “NO WIND DATA”. Wind data can be displayed in three different ways:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 2-33 Wind Data

Displaying wind data:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

1) Select the PFD Softkey.
2) Select the WIND Softkey to display wind option Softkeys.
3) Select one of the OPTN softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
• OPTN 1: Head and crosswind components
• OPTN 2: Total wind direction and speed

AFCS

• OPTN 3: Total wind direction with head and crosswind speed components

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4) To remove the window, select the OFF Softkey.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) INDICATIONS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RVSI, VDI) appear on the
PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management Section for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD according to the
criteria listed in Table 2-2.
Top of Descent Message

EIS

VNV Target
Altitude

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source

Terminal
Phase of
Flight

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 2-34 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)

VNV Indication Removed
Required Vertical
Vertical
VNV Target
Speed (RVSI)
Deviation (VDI)
Altitude
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change
X
X
X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey selected on MFD)
X
X
X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
X
X
X
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
Section)
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude
X
X
X
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit
X
X
X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
X
X
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed

AFCS

Criteria

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Table 2-2 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

2.3 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD. Refer to Appendix A for more
information on alerts and annunciations.

SYSTEM ALERTING

EIS

Messages appear in the Alerts Window (in the lower right corner of the PFD; Figure 2-35) when a warning,
caution, advisory alert, or G950 message advisory occurs. System alert messages are provided for aware of
G950 system problems or status and may not require pilot action. The Alerts Window allows system alerts to be
displayed simultaneously. The FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the alert messages. The Alerts Window
is enabled/disabled by selecting the ALERTS Softkey. If the window is already open when a new message is
generated, selecting the ALERTS Softkey to acknowledge the message causes it to turn gray.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The ALERTS Softkey label changes to display the appropriate annunciation when an alert is issued. The
annunciation flashes and the appropriate aural alert sounds until acknowledged by pressing the softkey. The
softkey then reverts to the ALERTS Softkey label, and when selected again opens the Alerts Window to display
a descriptive message of the alert.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The Annunciation Window appears to the right of the Vertical Speed Indicator and displays abbreviated
annunciation text for aircraft alerts. Text color is based on alert level: warnings appear in red, cautions in
yellow, advisory alerts in white. New alerts, regardless of priority, are displayed at the top of the Annunciation
Window, separated by a white line from acknowledged alerts. Once acknowledged, they are sequenced based
on priority.

Annunciation
Window

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Alerts
Window

Softkey
Annunciation

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 2-35 G950 Alerting System

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS

Outer Marker

Middle Marker

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in blue, middle in yellow, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Inner Marker

EIS

Altimeter
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 2-36 Marker Beacon Annunciations

TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATION

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The G950 System displays traffic symbolically on the PFD Inset Map, the Navigation Map Page (MFD), and
various other MFD page maps. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix E for more details about
the traffic displays. When a traffic advisory (TA) is detected, the following automatically occur:
• The PFD Inset Map is enabled and displays traffic

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• A flashing black-on-yellow ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation (Figure 2-37) appears to the top left of the Attitude
Indicator for five seconds and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated, unless an optional Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed (refer
to the applicable TAS documentation for alerts generated by TAS equipment)
If additional TAs appear, new voice and visual alerts are generated.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Traffic
Symbols

APPENDICES

Figure 2-37 Traffic Annunciation and Inset Map with Traffic Displayed

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

TERRAIN ANNUNCIATIONS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) and Terrain-SVS annunciations appear on the PFD
at the top left of the Altimeter. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix A for information on
terrain system annunciations.

Figure 2-38 Traffic and TAWS Annunciations

AFCS

ALTITUDE ALERTING

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter)
changes to black text on a cyan background, flashes for 5 seconds, and an aural tone is generated.

APPENDICES

The Altitude Alerting function provides audio and visual alerts when the aircraft is approaching the Selected
Altitude. Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The Altitude Alerter is
independent of the installed AFCS. The following occur when approaching the Selected Altitude:

• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the aircraft flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude), the Selected Altitude changes to yellow text on a black background, flashes for five seconds, and an
audio tone is generated.

• When the aircraft passes within 200 ft of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to cyan text on
a black background and flashes for five seconds, and an audio tone is generated.

Within 200 ft

Deviation of ±200 ft

INDEX

Within 1000 ft

Figure 2-39 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
NOTE: A Low Altitude Annunciation is available only when SBAS is available. If either the optional Terrain-

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SVS or TAWS-B systems are installed, this annunciation is not applicable unless the installed terrain system
is inhibited, has failed, or is unavailable.
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a RNAV GPS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-yellow ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation appears to the top left of the Altimeter, flashes
for several seconds, then remains displayed until the condition is resolved.

EIS

LOW ALT
Annunciation

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Altimeter

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 2-40 Low Altitude on GPS SBAS Approach

MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

For altitude awareness, a barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH) can be set
in the References Window.
If desired, the system can also compensate this altitude based on a pilot-supplied temperature at the
destination. For example, if the pilot enters a destination temperature of -40º C, the system increases the
displayed MDA/DH accordingly.

AFCS

When active, the altitude setting is displayed to the bottom left of the Altimeter. Once the altitude is
within the range of the tape, a bug appears at the reference altitude on the Altimeter. The following visual
annunciations occur when approaching the MDA/DH:

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, a box labeled ‘BARO MIN’
or ‘COMP MIN’ (based on the selected altitude source) appears with the altitude in cyan text (or magenta
for TEMP COMP). The bug appears in cyan (or magenta for TEMP COMP) on the altitude tape at the
corresponding altitude once in range.

APPENDICES

• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA/DH, the bug and text become white.
• Once the aircraft reaches MDA/DH, the bug and text become yellow and the voice alert, “Minimums.
Minimums”, is heard.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Greater than 100’ Above
MDA/DH

Within 100’ Above
MDA/DH

MDA/DH Reached

Barometric
Minimums Bug

EIS

Barometric
Minimums Box
appears when 2500’
above MDA/DH

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 2-41 Barometric MDA/DH Alerting Visual Annunciations

Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the MDA.
If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA, once it reaches 50 feet above the MDA, alerting
is disabled. The function is reset when the power is cycled or a new approach is activated.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Setting the barometric minimum descent altitude and bug:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Minimums field.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the barometric (BARO) or temperature compensated (TEMP COMP) barometric
altitude. OFF is selected by default. Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field.

AFCS

4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (BARO or TEMP COMP from zero to 16,000 feet). If TEMP
COMP is selected, a field for entering the temperature at the destination will appear. Press the ENT Key or turn
the large FMS Knob to highlight this field, and use the small FMS Knob to enter the temperature (from -59º C
to +59º C.) The system increases or decreases the displayed MDA/DH altitude based on this temperature.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or press the TMR/REF Softkey.

APPENDICES

Figure 2-42 BARO and TEMP COMP MDA/DH

NOTE: The temperature at the destination can be entered in the References Window on the PFD, or Temperature

INDEX

Compensation Window on the MFD. There is only one compensation temperature for the system, therefore,
changing the temperature will affect both the loaded approach altitudes and the minimums. Refer to
the Flight Management section for information about applying temperature compensation to approach
altitudes.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

2.4 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The annunciations listed in Table 2-3 can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur; see Figure
2-43 for examples. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Annunciation
LOI

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
phase of flight
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS position
to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan waypoints

EIS

INTEG OK

Location
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Upper right of
aircraft symbol

Table 2-3 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 2-43 Example HSI Annunciations

AFCS

Dead Reckoning Mode causes the CDI to be removed from the display (when GPS is the selected navigation
source) and the following items on the PFD to be shown in yellow:
• Current Track Indicator

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• Wind Data
• Ground Speed
• Distances in the Bearing Information windows
• GPS bearing pointers

APPENDICES

These items should be verified when operating in Dead Reckoning Mode as they become increasingly
inaccurate over time.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

HEADING FAILURE MODES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

If the system is unable to determine the aircraft heading, but GPS-based track information is available, the
HSI displays the ground track instead of heading using HSI Track Mode. In this mode, a magenta ‘TRK’
annunciation and track readout appear on the HSI. In addition, a yellow ‘HDG’ annunciation with a red X
appear above the ‘TRK’ annunciation to indicate the HSI is displaying track instead of heading.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

HSI Track Mode (Heading Unavailable,
Track Available)

Heading and Track Unavailable

Figure 2-44 Heading Failure Displays on the HSI

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red extreme pitch warning chevrons pointing toward the
horizon are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon line.
Nose Low

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Nose High

INDEX

Figure 2-45 Pitch Attitude Warnings

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

– ADF/DME Tuning

• Flight director Command Bars

• PFD Setup Menu

• Inset Map
• Outside air temperature (OAT)

• Windows displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD:

•
Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height readout

• DME Information Window

– Timer/References

• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators

• Wind data

– Nearest Airports

• Altimeter Barometric Setting

• Selected Heading readout

– Flight Plan

• Selected Altitude

• Selected Course readout

– Messages

• VNV Target Altitude

• Transponder Status Box

– Procedures

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• System Time

EIS

• Traffic Annunciations

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

If pitch exceeds +30˚/-30˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display
and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from the PFD (and corresponding softkeys are disabled) when the aircraft
experiences unusual attitudes:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

Blank Page

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The G950® Engine Indication System (EIS) displays critical engine, electrical, fuel, and other system parameters
on the left side of the MFD during normal operations (Figure 3-1).

EIS Display

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 3-1 Multi Function Display (Normal Operations)

AFCS

Green bands on the instruments indicate normal ranges of operation; yellow and red bands indicate caution
and warning, respectively. When unsafe operating conditions occur, the corresponding readouts flash to indicate
cautions and warnings. If sensory data to an instrument becomes invalid or unavailable, a red “X” is displayed
across the instrument.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM

3.1 ENGINE DISPLAY

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Engine Display is shown by default. If another EIS display is currently shown, the Engine Display may be
selected by pressing the ENGINE or BACK Softkey. At the top of all three EIS displays, the Torque, Interstage
Turbine Temperature (ITT), Propeller Speed, and Gas Generator Speed gauges are present. Trim and flap
indications are also shown on all EIS displays.

NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for engine operating limitations.

Displays engine torque in pounds/square inch (lb/in2)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Torque Gauge
(TRQ PSI)
2 Interstage Turbine
Temperature Gauge
(ITT °C)

Displays Interstage Turbine Temperature (ITT) in degrees Celsius (°C)
When the engine is not running, ‘OFF’ is annunciated above the ITT readout;
this changes to ‘STRT’ upon engine start. No annunciation is shown when
the engine is running normally (see Figure 3-3).
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Propeller Speed Gauge
(NP RPM)
4 Gas Generator Speed
Gauge (NG %)
5 Fuel Flow
(FFLOW GPH)

Displays gas generator speed as a percentage
Displays current fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)

AFCS

Displays engine oil pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
Oil Pressure Indicator
(OIL PSI)
7 Oil Temperature Indicator Displays engine oil temperature in °C
(OIL °C)
8 Ammeter
Displays DC current in amperes (amps) for the generator (G) and the Battery
(B); Alternate Power (A) is not used.
(AMPS)
9

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

10
11

APPENDICES

Displays DC bus voltages for GEN and BAT buses.
Displays quantities of fuel in gallons in the main left (L) and right (R) tanks
Aileron and rudder trim are indicated with pointers along slide bars; the
green bars indicate takeoff trim positions
Flap deflection is indicated with a pointer along a slide bar; takeoff flap
position is indicated with a green bar
Elevator trim is indicated with a pointer along a slide bar; takeoff trim position
is indicated with a green bar and T/O label

INDEX

Voltmeter
(VOLTS)
Fuel Quantity Indicator
(FUEL QTY)
Aileron and Rudder Trim
Bars (AIL, RUD)
Flap Position Indicator
(FLAPS)
Elevator Trim Bar
(ELEV)

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Floatplane Option
2

EIS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4
5
6

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

7
8

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

9
12
10

AFCS

13
11

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 3-2 Engine Display
Engine Start

Normal

Engine Off

APPENDICES
INDEX

Figure 3-3 Interstage Turbine Temperature Gauge Status Annunciations

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM

3.2 SYSTEM DISPLAY

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for limitations.

The System Display (Figure 3-4) is accessed by pressing the SYSTEM Softkey. The instruments presented here,
in addition to the gauges and trim slide bars, are presented into two categories: Oil (pressure and temperature)
and Electrical (currents and voltages).
Accessing the EIS System Display:

EIS

1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
2) Press the SYSTEM Softkey.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

3) To return to the default Engine Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
1

Displays engine torque in pounds/square inch (lb/in2)

Displays Interstage Turbine Temperature (ITT) in degrees Celsius (°C) When
the engine is not running, ‘OFF’ is annunciated above the ITT readout; this
changes to ‘STRT’ upon engine start. No annunciation is shown when the
engine is running normally
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Torque Gauge
(TRQ PSI)
2 Interstage Turbine
Temperature Gauge
(ITT °C)

4
5

AFCS

6
7

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

8
9

APPENDICES

Displays gas generator speed as a percentage
Displays engine oil pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
Displays engine oil temperature in °C
Displays DC current in amperes (A) for the generator (GEN); Alternate Power
(ALT) is not used
Displays DC bus voltages
Aileron and rudder trim are indicated with pointers along slide bars; the
green bars indicate takeoff trim positions
Flap deflection is indicated with a pointer along a slide bar; takeoff flap
position is indicated with a green bar
Elevator trim is indicated with a pointer along a slide bar; takeoff trim position
is indicated with a green bar and T/O label

INDEX

Propeller Speed Gauge
(NP RPM)
Generator Speed Gauge
(NG %)
Oil Pressure
(PRES PSI)
Oil Temperature
(TEMP °C)
Ammeter
(GEN A, BAT A)
Voltmeter
(GEN V, BAT V)
Aileron and Rudder Trim
Bars (AIL, RUD)
Flap Position Indicator
(FLAPS)
Elevator Trim Bar
(ELEV)

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Floatplane Option

EIS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

AFCS

8
11
9

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 3-4 System Display

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM

3.3 FUEL DISPLAY
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

the fuel was reset.

NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for limitations.

EIS

The Fuel Display (Figure 3-5) is accessed by pressing the FUEL Softkey. Besides the gauges and trim slide bars,
all indications on this display are digital readouts, separated into three categories: Oil (pressure and temperature),
Fuel (flow, pressure, and quantities), and Fuel Calculations (fuel remaining and used, endurance, and range).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Accessing the EIS Fuel Display:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
2) Press the FUEL Softkey.
3) To return to the default Engine Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Fuel calculations are based on the fuel flow totalizer and the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM), adjusted by
the pilot using the following softkeys:
• DEC FUEL – Decreases totalizer-based fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
• INC FUEL – Increases totalizer-based fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
• RST FUEL – Resets totalizer-based fuel remaining to 170-gal and the displayed fuel used (GAL USED) to zero
1

Displays engine torque in pounds/square inch (lb/in2)

Displays Interstage Turbine Temperature (ITT) in degrees Celsius (°C). When
the engine is not running, ‘OFF’ is annunciated above the ITT readout; this
changes to ‘STRT’ upon engine start. No annunciation is shown when the
engine is running normally.
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm)

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Torque Gauge
(TRQ PSI)
2 Interstage Turbine
Temperature Gauge
(ITT °C)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4
5

APPENDICES

6
7
8

INDEX

Propeller Speed Gauge
(NP RPM)
Generator Speed Gauge
(NG %)
Oil Pressure
(PRES PSI)
Oil Temperature
(TEMP °C)
Fuel Flow
(FFLOW GPH)
Fuel Pressure
(PRES PSI)
Fuel Quantities
(QTY L/R GAL)

Displays gas generator speed as a percentage
Displays engine oil pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
Displays engine oil temperature in °C
Displays current fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
Displays current fuel pressure in psi
Displays quantities of fuel in gallons in the left (L) and right (R) tanks

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM

13
14

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Displays flight time remaining in hours:minutes (HH:MM) based on the
calculated fuel remaining
Displays aircraft range in nautical miles (nm) based on the calculated fuel
remaining, the aircraft’s heading, and the wind direction and speed
Aileron and rudder trim are indicated with pointers along slide bars; the green
bars indicate takeoff trim positions
Flap deflection is indicated with a pointer along a slide bar; takeoff flap
position is indicated with a green bar
Elevator trim is indicated with a pointer along a slide bar; takeoff trim position
is indicated with a green bar and T/O label

EIS

Displays current fuel remaining in gallons as set by the pilot and adjusted for
fuel burn since last set
Displays quantity of fuel used in gallons based on fuel flow since last reset

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Set Fuel Remaining
(GAL REM)
Calculated Fuel Used
(GAL USED)
Calculated Endurance
(ENDUR)
Calculated Range
(RANGE NM)
Aileron and Rudder Trim
Bars (AIL, RUD)
Flap Position Indicator
(FLAPS)
Elevator Trim Bar
(ELEV)

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Floatplane Option

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

AFCS

5
6

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

7
8
9

APPENDICES

10
11
12
13

16
INDEX

Figure 3-5 Fuel Display

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM

3.4 EIS DISPLAY IN REVERSIONARY MODE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

In reversionary mode, the remaining display is re-configured to present PFD symbology together with the EIS
Display (refer to the System Overview for information about display Reversionary Mode). When the G950®
displays enter reversionary mode, the EIS is separated into Engine, System, and Fuel displays. The displays are
identical to the displays in normal mode.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

EIS Display

AFCS

Figure 3-6 Reversionary Mode

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

ENGINE

LEAN

SYSTEM

CYL SLCT

BACK

ASSIST

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
(optional)
SYSTEM

DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL

CO RST

BACK

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

LEAN

ENGINE

EIS SOFTKEYS
Softkey to
The Engine Display is shown by default. To return to the Engine DisplaySelect
fromthe
theBACK
System
or Fuel Display,
return to the top-level softkeys.
select the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

ENGINE

SYSTEM

FUEL

BACK

ENGINE

SYSTEM

FUEL

BACK

ENGINE

SYSTEM

FUEL

EIS

ENGINE

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL

BACK

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Select the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.

Figure 3-7 EIS Softkeys (Reversionary Mode)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Displays second-level engine softkeys
Displays the EIS System Display
Displays the EIS Fuel Display
Decreases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Resets displayed fuel remaining to 170-gal and fuel used to zero

AFCS

• ENGINE
• SYSTEM
• FUEL
DEC FUEL
INC FUEL
RST FUEL

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM

Blank Page

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

4.1 OVERVIEW
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panel, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode S transponder. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram description
of the Audio Panel and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation in the G950 is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• Audio Panel

• Multifunction Display (MFD)

• Mode S Transponder

EIS

• Primary Flight Display (PFD)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.
The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon
system, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of
background noise from the radios.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The Mode S Transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD). The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The data box displays the active
four-digit code, mode, and a reply status (Figure 4-1).

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY
2

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

9
10

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 4-1 PFD Controls, NAV/COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, and NRST Window

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.

COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The selected COM
transceiver frequency is displayed in green.

COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to move the tuning box (cyan box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between COM1 and COM2.

COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this key
for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.

COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.

Nearest Airports Window – Display by pressing NRST Softkey.

ENT Key – Validates or confirms an Auto-tune selection.

FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes and Auto-tune entries
when NRST Window is present. Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large
knob moves the cursor in the window. The small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted
cursor location.

Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
for the applicable transponder.

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
Press to move the tuning box (cyan box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between NAV1 and NAV2.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

GMA 347 AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
2

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 4-2 GMA 347 Audio Panel Controls

Marker Beacon Annunciators – Each annunciator lights independently when flying over the associated
marker beacon station.

MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Enables Music Mute feature.
Also, stops play of recorded COM audio.

COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.

COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.

COM3 – Reserved for optional COM radio.

NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.

DME – Turns optional DME audio on or off.

ADF – Turns optional ADF receiver audio on or off.

PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio will be played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded
block. Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play.

PILOT Squelch – Turn to adjust Pilot’s squelch. The Pilots volume knob must be pressed to allow manual
squelch adjustment.

INDEX

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

APPENDICES

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

NOTE: When a key is selected, an annunciator in the key is illuminated.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.

COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.

COM3 MIC – Reserved for optional COM radio.

COM 1/2 – Split COM operation key. When selected, the pilot uses the COM 1 transceiver and the copilot
uses COM 2.

SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard on the
speaker. Press and hold for 2 seconds for Passenger Address (PA). The SPKR key flashes during PA.

TEL – Selects and deselects telephone audio.

COPLT – Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation.

PILOT – Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation.

COPILOT/PASS Volume – Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. Pulling the right
volume knob controls passenger volume, pushing in controls Copilot volume.

COPILOT/PASS Squelch – Copilot and passenger share the squelch knob.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

HI SENS Annunciator – Indicates marker beacon receiver sensitivity, high sensitivity when illuminated,
low sensitivity when extinguished.

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity as indicated by illumination of the HI SENS
annunciator. Press again to return to low sensitivity and extinguish the HI SENS annunciator.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

MAN SQ – Manual Squelch annunciator. When lit, pilot and copilot squelch knobs control manual
squelch.

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

PILOT Volume – Turn the left (Pilot) volume knob to control pilot’s intercom volume and the ON and OFF
function. (Full CCW detent is OFF) Press to switch between manual and automatic squelch control as
indicated by illumination of the MAN SQ annunciator.

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

4.2 COM OPERATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

COM TRANSCEIVER SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
NOTE: During PA Mode, the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished and the COM active frequency color

changes to white, indicating that neither COM transmitter is active.
NOTE: When turning on the G950 for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active

EIS

COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the left side and the
two standby frequencies are on the right. The COM transceiver is selected for transmitting by pressing the
COM MIC Keys on the Audio Panel. During reception of audio from the COM radio selected for transmission,
audio from the other COM radio is muted.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

An active COM frequency displayed in green indicates that the COM transceiver is selected on the Audio
Panel (COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key). Both active COM frequencies appearing in white indicate that no COM
radio is selected for transmitting (PA Key is selected on the Audio Panel).
Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in the tuning
box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Active
Fields

Standby
Fields

AFCS

Tuning Box

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

COM2 Radio is Selected
on the Audio Panel

Figure 4-3 Selecting a COM Radio for Transmit

INDEX

APPENDICES

COM3 is reserved for an optional COM radio.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

TRANSMIT/RECEIVE INDICATIONS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. On the Audio Panel, when the active COM is transmitting, the active transceiver COM MIC
Key Annunciator flashes approximately once per second.
During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow.

EIS

Transmit and
Receive Indicators

Annunciator
Flashes During
Transmission

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 4-4 COM Radio Transmit and Receive Indications

COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of each PFD.
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.

AFCS

Turn the VOL/SQ Knob to adjust
volume. Press the Knob to Turn
Automatic Squelch On or Off

Press the Frequency Transfer
Key to Transfer COM
Frequencies Between Active
and Standby Frequency Boxes

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Turn the COM Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box

APPENDICES

Figure 4-5 COM Frequency Tuning

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Press the small COM Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.

EIS

Press the COM Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One COM Radio to the Other

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 4-6 Switching COM Tuning Boxes

QUICK-TUNING AND ACTIVATING 121.500 MHZ

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Pressing and holding the COM Frequency Transfer Key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency
COM frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active field of the COM radio selected for tuning (the one with the
transfer arrow). In the example shown, pressing the Audio Panel COM2 MIC Key activates the transceiver.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Press for Two Seconds
to Load 121.500 MHz

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 4-7 Quickly Tuning 121.500 MHz

100

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
• Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS,
WX)
• WPT – Airport Information Page
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page

• NRST – Nearest Airports Page

AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD

EIS

COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on
the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency
Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of 25 nearest airport identifiers
and COM frequencies is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Tuning Box.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 4-8 Nearest Airports Window

Select the NRST
Softkey to Open
the Nearest
Airports Window

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

101

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT
page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-10, 4-11, and 4-12).
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or
selecting the appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency (Figure 4-11).

EIS

3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies

Press the ENT Key to
Load a Highlighted
Frequency into
the COM Standby
Frequency Box

Figure 4-9 Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Or:
1) On the Nearest Airports, Frequencies, or Airspaces page, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.

AFCS

4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.

102

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Nearest Frequencies Menu

Nearest Airspaces Menu

EIS

Nearest Airports Menu

Figure 4-10 Nearest Pages Menus
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

On the WPT - Airport Information Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing the
FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field with the
ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Selected Airport
Identifier and
Information

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Runway
Information
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Press ENT Key to load
frequency into COM
Standby Field. Cursor
then advances to the
next frequency.
Select INFO Softkey for
AIRPORT, RUNWAYS,
and FREQUENCIES
Windows

APPENDICES

Figure 4-11 WPT – Airport Information Page

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

103

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Frequencies,
and NRST – Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU
Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 4-12 NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Airports, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages

104

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FREQUENCY SPACING

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The G950 COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing
(118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing
is selected, all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup Page of the AUX Page Group.

25-kHz Channel
Spacing

EIS

8.33-kHz Channel
Spacing
Figure 4-13 COM Channel Spacing

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) Select the AUX – System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.

While the COM CONFIG Window is selected, the G950 softkeys are blank.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing

INDEX

Figure 4-14 AUX – System Setup Page

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

105

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

AUTOMATIC SQUELCH

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good
sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic Squelch, press the VOL/SQ Knob. When Automatic
Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard over the headsets and
speaker, if selected. Pressing the VOL/SQ Knob again enables Automatic Squelch.

EIS

When Automatic Squelch is disabled, a white SQ appears next to the COM frequency.

Squelch
Indication

Press the COM VOL/
SQ Knob to turn off
Automatic Squelch.
Press again to restore
Automatic Squelch.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 4-15 Overriding Automatic Squelch

VOLUME

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. When adjusting volume,
the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after
the change.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 4-16 COM Volume Level

COM Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds

106

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

4.3 NAV OPERATION
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; two standby fields and two active fields. The active
frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.

EIS

A NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Pressing the
CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the NAV Tuning Box and the Frequency Transfer Arrow are
placed in the active NAV Frequency Field and the active NAV frequency color changes to green.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white.
Active
Fields

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Standby
Fields

Tuning Box
AFCS

The NAV Radio is
Selected by Selecting
the CDI Softkey

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 4-17 Selecting a NAV Radio for Navigation

APPENDICES

See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
as the source for the bearing pointer.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

107

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel. Pressing the
NAV1, NAV2, DME, or ADF Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard
over the headset and the speakers (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.

EIS

Figure 4-18 Selecting a NAV Radio Receiver

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the MFD and PFDs.
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Turn VOL/ID Knob to adjust
volume. Press Knob to Turn
Morse Code On or Off.
Press the Frequency Transfer Key to
Transfer NAV Frequencies Between
Active and Standby Frequency Fields

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Turn the NAV Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 4-19 NAV Frequency Tuning

108

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
Press the small NAV Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Press the NAV Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One NAV Radio to the Other

EIS

Figure 4-20 Switching NAV Tuning Boxes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

VOR/LOC ID
When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio, a white ID appears to the left of the active
NAV frequency.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The Morse Code Identifier
for the GHM VOR is On

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

In the example shown, in order to listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the
Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID Knob turns off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV
Tuning Box. To turn off both NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 with the small
NAV Knob and press the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.

Station
Identifier
Figure 4-21 NAV Radio ID Indication

AFCS

VOLUME
NAV Radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/ID Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, counterclockwise decreases volume.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

When adjusting, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains
for two seconds after the change.

APPENDICES

NAV Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds

Figure 4-22 NAV Volume Levels

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

109

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTO-TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

• WPT – VOR Information

• NRST – Nearest Frequencies (FSS, WX)

• NRST – Nearest Airports

• NRST – Nearest Airspaces

NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
• WPT – Airport Information
• NRST – Nearest VOR

EIS

The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page
group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-23, 4-24, and 4-25).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or
selecting the appropriate softkey.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
3) On the Nearest VOR and Nearest Airports pages, select the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor on the NAV
frequency (Figure 4-25).
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.

AFCS

Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies

Press the ENT
Key to Load
a Highlighted
Frequency into
the NAV Standby
Frequency Box

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 4-23 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD

110

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Or:
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Nearest VOR Menu

Nearest Frequencies Menu

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Nearest Airports Menu

Nearest Airspaces Menu

Figure 4-24 Nearest Pages Menus

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

111

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and
loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Press the ENT
Key to Load
the Frequency
into the NAV
Standby Field.
Select the FREQ Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Frequency

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Select the VOR Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Identifier

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 4-25 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – Nearest VOR Page

112

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST
–
Nearest Airports,
WPT – Airport Information, WPT – VOR Information, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in
a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 4-26 NRST – Nearest Frequencies, WPT – VOR Information, WPT – Airport Information, and
NRST – Nearest Airports Pages

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

113

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated in GPS Mode, the system switches to NAV Mode as

the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the Flight Management Section for
details.
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.

EIS

When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 or NAV2
active frequency fields. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 or NAV2 active frequency fields are
transferred to standby.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
or NAV2 standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.

114

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

off.
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD.
Middle Marker
Indication

Inner Marker
Indication

EIS

Outer Marker
Indication

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 4-27 Marker Beacon Annunciations on the PFD

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Figure 4-28 Marker Beacon Keys

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The Audio Panel provides three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected.

APPENDICES

During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the MKR/MUTE Key mutes the audio but does not affect the
marker annunciations (Figure 4-27). The marker tone is silenced, then waits for the next marker tone. The
MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is illuminated, indicating audio muting. The audio returns when the next marker
beacon signal is received. If the MKR/MUTE Key is pressed during signal reception (O, M, I indication) while
marker beacon audio is muted, the audio is deselected and the MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is extinguished.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

Pressing the SENS Key switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The HI SENS
function (annunciator illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an
approach. The LO SENS function (annunciator extinguished) results in a narrower marker dwell while over a
station.

115

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

4.4 GTX 33 MODE S TRANSPONDER

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The GTX 33 Mode S Transponder provides Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities.
Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.

EIS

• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• Extended squitter – If equipped with an extended squitter, the extended squitter is transmitted periodically
and contains information such as altitude (barometric and GPS), GPS position, and aircraft identification.
The purpose of extended squitter is to provide aircraft position and identification to ADS-B Ground-Based
Transceivers (GBTs) and other aircraft.
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.

TRANSPONDER CONTROLS

AFCS

Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is selected, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: STBY, ON,
ALT, VFR, GND, CODE, IDENT, ADSB-TX (optional), and BACK.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

When the CODE Softkey is selected, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT, BKSP,
BACK. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Selecting the numbered softkeys in sequence enters
the transponder code. If an error is made, selecting the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the
previous digit. Selecting the BKSP Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous digit.

APPENDICES

Selecting the BACK Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Selecting the BACK
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on either PFD. Code entry must be completed with either
the softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
Selecting the IDENT Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.

INDEX

After 45 seconds of transponder control inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.

116

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

CODE

IDENT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

IDENT

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

XPDR

(Optional)
STBY

ALT

GND

VFR

ADS-B TX

BACK

ALERTS

Selecting the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.

EIS

IDENT

BKSP

BACK

ALERTS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Selecting the BACK Softkey returns to the mode selection softkeys.

Figure 4-29 Transponder Softkeys (PFD)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
Mode selection can be automatic (Ground and Altitude Modes) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes).
The STBY, ON, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by selecting the XPDR Softkey.
Selecting a transponder mode:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

1) Select the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Select the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.

GROUND MODE

AFCS

Ground Mode is normally selected automatically when the aircraft is on the ground. The transponder
powers up in the last mode it was in when shut down. Ground Mode can be overridden by pressing any
one of the Mode Selection Softkeys. A green GND indication and transponder code appear in the mode field
of the Transponder Data Box. Ground Mode generates Mode S replies to discrete interrogations as well as
transmission of acquisition squitter and extended squitter, including ADS-B out (if equipped). Mode A, Mode
C, and Mode S all-call replies are inhibited.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

When Standby Mode has been selected on the ground, the transponder can be returned to Ground Mode
by pressing the GND Softkey.

APPENDICES

GND
Mode

Figure 4-30 Ground Mode
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

117

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the STBY Softkey. In Standby, the transponder
is powered and new codes can be entered, but no replies or squitters are transmitted.. When Standby is
selected, a white STBY indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data
Box. In all other modes, these fields appear in green.

NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inoperative.

EIS

STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 4-31 Standby Mode

MANUAL ON MODE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

ON Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ON Softkey. ON Mode generates Mode A and Mode S
replies as well as transmission of acquisition and extended squitters, including ADS-B out (if equipped).
Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. In ON Mode, a green ON indication and transponder code appear in
the mode field of the Transponder Data Box.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

ON Mode
(No Altitude
Reporting)

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 4-32 ON Mode

118

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ALTITUDE MODE (AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Altitude Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Altitude Mode may also be
selected manually by pressing the ALT Softkey. Altitude Mode generates Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S replies
as well as transmissions of acquisition and extended squitters including ADS-B out (if equipped).
If Altitude Mode is selected, a green ALT indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the
Transponder Data Box, and all transponder replies requesting altitude information are provided with pressure
altitude information.

EIS

ALT Mode
(Mode C Altitude
Reporting)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 4-33 Altitude Mode

REPLY STATUS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
Reply to
Interrogation

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 4-34 Reply Indication

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

119

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the CODE Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.

EIS

3) Press the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence
must be pressed within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Pressing the
BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been
entered, the transponder code becomes active.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Entering
a Code

Figure 4-35 Entering a Code

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
1) Press the XPDR and the CODE Softkeys as in the previous procedure to enable code entry.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob on the PFD to enter the first two code digits.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.

AFCS

Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Two Code
Digits at a Time

Press the
ENT Key to
Complete
Code Entry
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Code Field

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 4-36 Entering a Code with the FMS Knob

120

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

VFR CODE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The VFR code can be entered either manually or by pressing the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey is pressed, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Pressing the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
VFR Code

EIS

Figure 4-37 VFR Code
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

IDENT FUNCTION
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT Softkey is inoperative.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Pressing the IDENT Softkey sends an ID indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The ID return distinguishes
one transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s radar screen. The IDENT Softkey appears on
all levels of transponder softkeys. When the IDENT Softkey is pressed, a green IDNT indication is displayed in
the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

After the IDENT Softkey is pressed while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level
softkeys.
IDNT
Indication

AFCS

Press the
IDENT Softkey
to Initiate the
ID Function
Figure 4-38 IDENT Softkey and Indication

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

ADS-B TX

APPENDICES

If equipped with a GTX 33 with an extended squitter, the transmission of extended squitters containing
ADS-B out information is enabled/disabled by pressing the ADS-B TX Softkey. ADS-B transimssion defaults to
enabled at each power cycle. Do not disable ADS-B transmission unless requested by ATC.
Even with the ADS-B TX enabled, transmission of extended squitters containing ADS-B out information will
vary based on the current mode of the transponder.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

INDEX

Figure 4-39 ADS-B TX Enabled

ADS-B Transmission
Enabled

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

121

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

FLIGHT ID REPORTING
NOTE: If the Flight ID is required but the system is not configured for it, contact a Garmin-authorized service

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

center for configuration.
When the Flight ID must be entered before flight operation, the identifier is placed in the Timer/References
Window on the PFD. The Flight ID is not to exceed seven characters. No space is needed when entering Flight
ID. When a Flight ID contains a space, the system automatically removes it upon completion of Flight ID entry.

EIS

Entering a Flight ID:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey to display the Timer/References Window.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the selection cursor, if not already activated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll down to the Flight ID.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired Flight ID.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete Flight ID entry.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

If an error is made during Flight ID entry, pressing the CLR Key returns to the original Flight ID entry. While
entering a Flight ID, turning the FMS Knob counterclockwise moves the cursor back one space for each detent
of rotation. If an incorrect Flight ID is discovered after the unit begins operation, reenter the correct Flight ID
using the same procedure.

AFCS

Flight ID
PFD Entry

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 4-40 Timer/References Window, Entering Flight ID

122

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS
POWER-UP

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Audio Panel performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to
those in use before the unit was last turned off.

MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
EIS

Stereo headsets are recommended for use with the G950.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears.
If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset hears
audio in the left ear only.

SPEAKER

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker (if installed). Pressing the SPKR Key selects and
deselects the cabin speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings
(autopilot, traffic, altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range. Contact a Garmin-authorized service center for
volume adjustment.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 4-41 Speaker Key
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

123

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

INTERCOM

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Audio Panel includes a four-position intercom system (ICS) and two stereo music inputs for the pilot,
copilot and up to two passengers. The intercom provides Pilot and Copilot isolation from the passengers and
aircraft radios.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 4-42 Intercom Controls

124

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

OFF

Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
copilot, TEL audio

Copilot

Selected radios,
aural alerts,
pilot, passengers,
music2, TEL audio

Pilot,
passengers

Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
copilot

Passengers,
music2, TEL audio

Passengers

Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
copilot, TEL audio

Passengers, music2 Pilot, copilot

AFCS

Selected radios,
aural alerts,
pilot; passengers,
music1, TEL audio
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
copilot

Copilot

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

OFF

Selected radios,
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot; Copilot, TEL audio aural alerts, pilot,
passengers, music1
passengers, music2

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

OFF

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

OFF

EIS

OFF

Pilot
Copilot
Passenger
Input to
Hears
Hears
Hears
Phone
Selected radios,
Selected radios,
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot, aural alerts, pilot, aural alerts, pilot,
None
copilot, passengers, copilot, passengers, copilot, passengers,
music1
music1
music2
Selected radios,
Selected radios,
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot, aural alerts, pilot, aural alerts, pilot, Pilot, copilot,
copilot, passengers, copilot, passengers, copilot, passengers, passengers
music1, TEL audio music1, TEL audio music2, TEL audio
Copilot,
Copilot,
Selected radios,
Copilot,
passengers,
passengers,
passengers
aural alerts, pilot
music1, TEL audio music2, TEL audio
Selected radios,
Copilot,
Copilot,
Pilot
aural alerts, pilot,
passengers, music1 passengers, music2
TEL audio

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

OFF

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

PILOT KEY
COPLT KEY
TEL KEY
Annunciator Annunciator Annunciator

Table 4-1 ICS Isolation Modes & Telephone Distribution
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Pilot isolation is selected when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated. During Pilot isolation, the pilot can
hear the selected radios and aural alerts and warnings. The copilot and passengers can communicate with each
other. The copilot is isolated from aural alerts and warnings.

APPENDICES

Copilot isolation is selected when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated. The copilot is isolated from the
selected radios, aural alerts and warnings, and everyone else. The pilot and passengers can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other.
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are illuminated, the pilot and copilot can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other. The passengers are isolated from the pilot and copilot
but can communicate with each other.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished, everyone hears the selected radios, aural
alerts, and is able to communicate with everyone else.

125

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

Each microphone input has an automatic squelch threshold. Manual squelch is available by pressing the
Pilot side VOL/SQ knob. When the MAN SQ annunciation is lit the large squelch knobs control pilot and
copilot/passenger squelch threshold. Turning either knob clockwise increases the squelch threshold level.
Turning either knob counterclockwise decreases the squelch threshold level.

Two volume controls, one for the pilot and a combined copilot/passenger control, set intercom audio
level.

EIS

When the MAN SQ annunciation is not lit, squelch is automatic and the large squelch knobs have no
function.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Manual Squelch Annunciation;
Off for Automatic Squelch, On
for Manual Squelch

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Rotating the Pilot Volume Knob
controls ON and OFF function.
(Full CCW detent is OFF)
Pressing the Pilot volume knob
switches between manual and
automatic squelch.
Pilot Volume, On/Off, and Manual Squelch

Pulling the right volume
knob controls passenger
volume, pushing in controls
Copilot volume. Copilot and
passenger share the large
squelch knob.
Copilot/Passenger Volume and Manual Squelch

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 4-43 Intercom Volume and Squelch Controls

126

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

A passenger address system is available for delivering voice messages over the cabin speaker. Press and hold
the SPKR Key for two seconds to activate the passenger address. The SPKR Key Annunciator flashes about
once per second when the passenger address is active. A Push-to-Talk (PTT) must be pressed to deliver PA
announcements.

EIS

PA is Selected on
the Audio Panel

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 4-44 SPKR Key Selected for PA Announcements

CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected COM
radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time
have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest
block.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The PLAY Key controls the play function. Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory
block. Pressing the PLAY Key while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded memory block.
Each subsequent press of the PLAY Key selects the previously recorded memory block.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.

AFCS

Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 4-45 Play Key

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

127

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

SPLIT COM OPERATION
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and the separation

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM1 and COM2 frequencies are too close together, interference
may be heard during transmission on the other radio.
During Split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios.
The pilot can still monitor NAV1, NAV2, ADF, DME, and MKR Audio as selected, but the copilot is only able
to monitor COM2.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Pressing the COM 1/2 Key selects Split COM operation. The COM 1/2 Annunciator is illuminated indicating
Split COM operation. COM1 and COM2 frequencies are displayed in green indicating that both transceivers
are active. Split COM operation is cancelled by pressing the COM 1/2 Key again, at which time the annunciator
is extinguished.
When Split COM operation is selected, COM1 is used by the pilot and COM2 is used by the copilot. The
COM1 MIC Annunciator flashes when the pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed. The COM2 MIC Annunciator
flashes when the copilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

COM1 Radio is Used
by the Pilot

COM2 Radio is Used
by the Copilot

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 4-46 Split COM Operation

128

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
NOTE: Music1 and Music2 audio cannot be completely turned off. Audio level for the crew and passengers

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

can be adjusted by a Garmin-authorized service center.
The Audio Panel provides two stereo auxiliary entertainment inputs: Music1 and Music2. The pilot and
copilot hear Music1 and the passengers hear Music2. These inputs are compatible with popular portable
entertainment devices such as MP3 players. Two 3.5-mm stereo phone jacks can be installed in convenient
locations for audio connection. The headphone outputs of the entertainment devices are plugged into the
Music1 or Music2 jacks.

EIS

The current ICS state of isolation affects the distribution of the entertainment input (see Table 4‑1).

CREW MUSIC
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Crew music (Music1) can be heard by the pilot and copilot when both the PILOT and the COPLT ICS
Annunciators are extinguished. Crew music can also be heard by the pilot when the COPLT Annunciator is
illuminated and by the copilot when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Music Muting
Crew music muting occurs when aircraft radio or marker beacon activity is heard. Crew music is always
soft muted when an interruption occurs from these sources. Soft muting is the gradual return of music to
its original volume level. The time required for music volume to return to normal is between one-half and
four seconds.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Music Muting Enable/Disable
Pressing and holding the MKR/MUTE Key for three seconds switches crew music muting on and off.
When switching, either one or two beeps are heard; one beep indicates that music muting is enabled, two
beeps indicate music muting is disabled. Crew music muting is reset (enabled) during power up.

AFCS

PASSENGER MUSIC
Passenger music (Music2) can be heard only by the passengers and is never muted.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

129

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

MULTIFUNCTION CONTROLS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Pilot side volume knob controls the ON and OFF function, the pilot’s intercom volume plus manual and
automatic squelch. When pressed, manual squelch is selected and the MAN SQ LED is ON indicating that
squelch is adjusted manually. When pressed again the MAN SQ LED turns OFF and squelch is automatic.

EIS

The Copilot side volume knob controls the Copilot and passenger intercom volume level. Pulling the right
volume knob controls passenger volume, pushing in controls Copilot volume.

Pilot Volume, On/Off, and Manual Squelch

Copilot/Passenger Volume and Manual Squelch

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 4-47 Intercom Volume and Squelch Controls

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The MKR/MUTE key selects marker audio and silences the marker signal. It also turns On/Off Music Muting,
plus cancels the COM clearance recorder audio playback.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 4-48 Marker/Mute Key

AFCS

The SPKR key turns the cabin speaker ON and OFF. Pressing and holding for 2 seconds selects PA mode.
The SPKR key annunciator blinks when PA is active.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 4-49 Speaker Key

130

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

4.6 AUDIO PANEL PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob,

verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume
setting. On single‑pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the
audio system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ is activated, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot. If

EIS

manual squelch is set to full open (SQ annunciated and the knobs turned counterclockwise) background
noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM transmissions.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Automatic/Manual
Squelch Annunciation

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

After powering up the avionics System, the following steps will aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel
as well as prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a
pilot boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.

Pilot and
Copilot ICS
Isolation Keys

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pilot Volume
and Manual
Squelch

Copilot/Passenger
Volume and
Manual Squelch
Figure 4-50 Audio Panel Preflight Controls

AFCS

Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
1) Verify that the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished.
2) Verify that manual squelch is set to full open.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Turn the PILOT Knob and COPILOT Knob fully clockwise. This will set the headset intercom audio level to max
volume (least amount of attenuation).
4) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV, etc.) to a suitable level.
5) Adjust the PILOT Knob and COPILOT Knob volume to the desired intercom level.

APPENDICES

6) Reset squelch to automatic, or adjust to the appropriate level manually.

Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

131

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Abnormal operation of the G950 includes equipment failures of the G950 components and failure of associated
equipment, including switches and external devices.

STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the crew of a stuck microphone.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

The COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains
stuck.

Figure 4-51 Stuck Microphone Alert

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

COM TUNING FAILURE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a red X may appear on the
frequency display.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically

Figure 4-52 COM Tuning Failure
AFCS

AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver. Audio will not be available on the speaker.

PFD FAILURE (REVERSIONARY MODE)

INDEX

APPENDICES

The display backup button installed in the cockpit selects the Reversionary Mode. See the System Overview
Section for more information on Reversionary Mode.

132

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

5.1 INTRODUCTION
The G950 is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This section of
the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the G950.

EIS

The most prominent part of the G950 are the full color displays: one Primary Flight Display (PFD) and a
Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors is
displayed on the PFD and the MFD. See examples in the Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2. Detailed descriptions of flight
management functions are discussed later in this section.
A brief description of the GPS navigation data on the PFD and MFD follows.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), RNAV Approach service level (LNAV,
LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, or LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR))

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The Inset Map is a small version of the MFD Navigation Map and can be displayed in the lower left corner of
the PFD. When the system is in reversionary mode, the Inset Map is displayed in the lower right corner. The
Inset Map is displayed by pressing the INSET Softkey. Pressing the INSET Softkey again, then pressing the OFF
Softkey removes the Inset Map.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data can be reduced by pressing the DCLTR Softkey. The
Navigation Map can be oriented four different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), Desired Track
Up (DTK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).

AFCS

An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in the
lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. To change the map
range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out (+,
increasing).

APPENDICES

The Direct-to Window, the Flight Plan Window, the Procedures Window, and the Nearest Airports Window
can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed in detail later in
the section.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

133

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Navigation Status Box

Navigation Mode
Inset Map

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
- Timer/Reference Window
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Navigation Status Box
Map Orientation

Navigation Page Title

Navigation Map

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data

Aircraft Icon
at Present Position

Active Flight Plan Leg

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Flight Plan Leg

Map Range

APPENDICES

Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page

NAVIGATION STATUS BOX

INDEX

The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:

PFD Navigation Status Box

134

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD -> KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn right to
021˚ in 8 seconds’)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD within 1
minute’)
The symbols used in the PFD status bar are:
Symbol

Description

Symbol

Description

Direct-to

Vector to Final

Right Procedure Turn

Right DME Arc

Left Procedure Turn

Left DME Arc

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Left Holding Pattern
EIS

Active Leg

Right Holding Pattern

• Fuel over Destination (FOD)
• Ground Speed (GS)
• Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
• True Air Speed (TAS)
• Track Angle Error (TKE)
• Track (TRK)
• Vertical Speed Required (VSR)
• Crosstrack Error (XTK)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• Bearing (BRG)
• Distance (DIS)
• Desired Track (DTK)
• Endurance (END)
• Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
• Fuel on Board (FOB)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of the
following items:

AFCS

MFD Navigation Status Box
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the MFD Data Bar Fields Box
on the AUX - System Setup Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and ETE.
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Status Box:

APPENDICES

1) Select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list.

INDEX

5) Select the desired data.
6) Press the ENT Key. Pressing the DFLTS Softkey returns any field to its default setting.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

135

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Map displays are used extensively in the G950 to provide situational awareness in flight. Most G950 maps can
display the following information:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways,
land data (highways, cities, lakes, rivers,
borders, etc.) with names
• Map range
•Wind direction and speed
• Map orientation
• Icons for enabled map features
• Aircraft icon (representing present position)
• Nav range ring
• Fuel range ring

• Map Pointer information (distance and
bearing to pointer, location of pointer,
name, and other pertinent information)
• Flight plan legs
• User waypoints
• Track vector
• Topography scale
• Topography data
• Obstacle data

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• All Map Group Pages (MAP)
• All Waypoint Group Pages (WPT)
• AUX - Trip Planning
• All Nearest Group Pages (NRST)

• Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
• Direct-to Window
• PFD Inset Map
• Procedure Loading Pages

MAP ORIENTATION

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Maps are shown in one of four different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up, desired track up, or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper
right corner of the map.

Figure 5-3 Map Orientation

INDEX

• North up (NORTH UP) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
• Track up (TRK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
• Desired track up (DTK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the desired course.
• Heading up (HDG UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
136

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

NOTE: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not

show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the Navigation Map Page. Any other displays that show

navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Navigation Map Page:
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Map Setup
Selection

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-4 Navigation Map Page Menu Window

2) Press the ENT Key to display the Map Setup Window.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

3) Turn the large FMS Knob, or press the ENT Key once, to select the ‘ORIENTATION’ field.
Map Group Selection
Orientation Field

AFCS

Auto North Up

- On/Off
- Minimum Range
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 5-5 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
5) Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.

137

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The map can be configured to switch automatically to a north up orientation when the map range reaches a
minimum range.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Enabling/disabling Auto North Up and selecting the minimum switching range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
EIS

5) Highlight the ‘AUTO NORTH UP’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ using the small FMS Knob.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the range field.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select the desired range.
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

MAP RANGE

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in
the lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. When the
map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the G950 to accurately represent the map,
a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick
counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Range Overzoom

APPENDICES

Figure 5-6 Map Range

AUTO ZOOM

INDEX

Auto zoom allows the G950 to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on Map Setup Window).
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, all navigation maps automatically adjust to the smallest map range
clearly showing the potential impact points. If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any map capable of
displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly showing the traffic
138

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the navigation maps return to the previous auto zoom range
based on the active waypoint.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFD(s) and MFD. Control of the
ranges at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times
(set on the Map Setup Window for the Map Group). These settings determine the minimum and maximum
distance to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.

EIS

• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the auto
zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/minimum times can be
adjusted.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the Map Setup Page for the Map Group) determines how long auto
zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
• When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range available
(2000 nm).

Auto Zoom:

Off, MFD Only, PFD Only, All On

Maximum Look Forward Time
Minimum Look Forward Time

AFCS

Manual Range Override
Expiration Time

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 5-7 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group, Auto Zoom

Configuring automatic zoom:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.

INDEX

2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

139

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘AUTO ZOOM’ field.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

6) Select ‘Off’, ‘MFD Only’, ‘PFD Only’, or ‘ALL On’.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘MAX LOOK FWD’ field.
Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
9) Repeat step 8 for ‘MIN LOOK FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘MAX LOOK FWD’ (zero to 999 minutes).
EIS

10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

MAP PANNING

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Map panning allows the pilot to:
• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
• Highlight and select locations on the map
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• Designate locations for use in flight planning
• View airspace and airway information

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

When the panning function is selected by pressing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.

AFCS

Map Pointer
Information

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Map
Pointer

Figure 5-8 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated

140

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

NOTE: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned and there has

been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.

EIS

Information about Point
of Interest

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Map Pointer on POI

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-9 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

141

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown at the top of the display. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet
above Mean Sea Level (MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.

EIS

Information about
Airspace

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Map Pointer on Airspace

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Airspace

Panning the map:
1) Press the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

3) Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.

142

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
1) Place the Map Pointer on a waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Waypoint Information Page for the selected waypoint.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) Press the GO BACK Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the Waypoint Information Page and return to
the Navigation Map showing the selected waypoint.

EIS

NAVAID
Information

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

GO BACK Softkey
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Information Window - NAVAID

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

143

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Viewing airspace information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) Place the Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
3) ‘Review Airspace?’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace
Information Page for the selected airspace.

EIS

4) Press the CLR or ENT Key to exit the Airspace Information Page.

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Airspace
Information

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Information Window - Airspace

144

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be
calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page menu. The bearing
and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying
points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a
window at the top of the navigation map.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed).

EIS

2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, press the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the Page
Menu and press the ENT Key.
Measurement Information

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pointer Lat/Long

Measurement Line
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

145

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

TOPOGRAPHY

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar
to aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures.
Navigation Map
Topographic Data

EIS

Navigation Map
Black Background

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Topographic data
on Profile Map
TOPO Softkey
Not Enabled
TOPO Softkey
Enabled

TOPO Off

TOPO On

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-14 Navigation Map - Topographic Data

Displaying/removing topographic data on all pages displaying navigation maps:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (the INSET Softkey for the PFD Inset Map).

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Press the TOPO Softkey.
3) Press the TOPO Softkey again to remove topographic data from the Navigation Map. When topographic data
is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.

Displaying/removing topographic data (TOPO DATA) using the Navigation Map Page Menu:
AFCS

1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.

INDEX

APPENDICES

7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

146

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

TOPO DATA
Range

EIS

TOPO DATA
On/Off

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 5-15 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO DATA Setup

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which topographic data is displayed.
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
Selecting a topographical data range (TOPO DATA):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.

AFCS

2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ range field. TOPO ranges are from 500 ft to 2000 nm.
6) To change the TOPO range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.

APPENDICES

8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

147

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the
map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation and current elevation values.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Maximum Displayed Elevation
Minimum Displayed Elevation

Aircraft Altitude (MSL)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Range of
Displayed
Elevations

Ground Elevation at Pointer
Location (only visible when
Pointer is displayed)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-16 Navigation Map - TOPO SCALE

Displaying/removing the topographic scale (TOPO SCALE):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

3) Select the ‘Map’ group and press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘TOPO SCALE’ field.
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

INDEX

TOPO SCALE
On/Off

Figure 5-17 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO SCALE Setup

148

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

MAP SYMBOLS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of symbol
can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering of the
symbols from the map using the DCLTR Softkey is also discussed.

LAND SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the land menu:
Land Symbols

Symbol

Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
EIS

(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med), or Large
(Lrg)

Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON)

Off

2000

International Highway (FREEWAY)

300

800

US Highway (NATIONAL HWY)

State Highway (LOCAL HWY)

Local Road (LOCAL ROAD)

Railroads (RAILROAD)

LARGE CITY (> 200,000)

800

1500

MEDIUM CITY (> 50,000)

100

200

SMALL CITY (> 5,000)
States and Provinces (STATE/PROV)

20
800

50
1500

Rivers and Lakes (RIVER/LAKE)

200

500

USER WAYPOINT

150

300

N/A

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

800

AFCS

300

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Interstate Highway (FREEWAY)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Highways and Roads

APPENDICES

Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

149

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AVIATION SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
Aviation Symbols
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med),
or Large (Lrg)

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)

Active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)

2000

Non-active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)

2000

2000
250

2000
500

150

300

100

3
Off
15

20
100
30

Non-directional Beacon (NDB WAYPOINT)

VOR (VOR WAYPOINT)

150

300

Class B Airspace/TMA (CLASS B/TMA)

200

500

Class C Airspace/TCA (CLASS C/TCA)

200

500

Class D Airspace (CLASS D)

150

300

Restricted Area (RESTRICTED)

200

500

Military Operations Area [MOA(MILITARY)]

200

500

Other/Air Defense Interdiction Zone (OTHER/ADIZ)

200

500

Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)

500

2000

Active Flight Plan Waypoint (ACTIVE FPL WPT)
Large Airports (LARGE APT) (Longest Runway ≥ 8100 ft)
Medium Airports (MEDIUM APT) (8100 ft > Longest
Runway ≥ 5000 ft)
Small Airports (SMALL APT) (Longest Runway < 5000 ft)
(Medium Airport if it has a tower frequency)
Taxiways (SAFETAXI)
Runway Extension (RWY EXTENSION)
Intersection (INT WAYPOINT)

APPENDICES

Symbol

See Airports, NAVAIDs

See Additional Features
N/A

INDEX

Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information

150

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYMBOL SETUP
All pages with maps can display land symbols (roads, lakes, borders, etc). Land symbols can be removed
totally (turned off).

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Displaying/removing all land symbols:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The Page Menu is displayed and the cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Group Menu is displayed and the cursor flashes on the ‘Map’ option.

EIS

3) Highlight the ‘LAND DATA’ field.
4) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off.’
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

LAND DATA
On/Off

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Figure 5-18 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND DATA Setup

The label size (TEXT) sets the size at which labels appear on the display (none, small, medium, and large).
The range (RNG) sets the maximum range at which items appear on the display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Selecting a ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group item text size and range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.

APPENDICES

3) Select the ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Select the desired land option.
6) Select the desired text size.

INDEX

7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected size.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

151

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
8) Select the desired range.
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected range.

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)

Maximum Display Range

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-19 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND GROUP Setup

Maximum Display Range

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)

APPENDICES

Figure 5-20 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AVIATION GROUP Setup

NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the

INDEX

152

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

MAP DECLUTTER
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the DCLTR Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Declutter Level

EIS

DCLTR Softkey
Navigation Map Page Menu

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - Declutter Level Indications

Decluttering the map:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Press the DCLTR Softkey with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown. With
each softkey selection, another level of map information is removed.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
2) Select ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

3) Press the ENT Key.

Decluttering the PFD Inset Map:
1) Press the INSET Softkey.

AFCS

2) Press the DCLTR Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection, another level of map
information is removed.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

153

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Table 5-3 lists the items that are decluttered at each map detail level. The ‘X’ represents map items
decluttered for each level of detail.
Item

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Data Link Radar Precipitation
Data Link Lightning
Graphical METARs
Airports
Safe Taxi
Runway Labels
TFRs
Restricted
MOA (Military)
User Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude Grid
NAVAIDs (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Intersections (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Class B Airspaces/TMA
Class C Airspaces/TCA
Class D Airspaces
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
Obstacles
Cities
Roads
Railroads
State/Province Boundaries

Declutter-1 Declutter-2 Declutter-3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Table 5-3 Navigation Map Items Decluttered for each Detail Level

154

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AIRWAYS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Low Altitude Airways (or Victor Airways) primarily serve smaller piston-engine, propeller-driven airplanes on
shorter routes and at lower altitudes. Airways are eight nautical miles wide and start 1,200 feet above ground
level (AGL) and extend up to but not including 18,000 feet mean sea level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are
designated with a “V” before the airway number (hence the name “Victor Airways”) since they run primarily
between VORs.

EIS

High Altitude Airways (or Jet Routes) primarily serve airliners, jets, turboprops, and turbocharged piston
aircraft operating above 18,000 feet MSL. Jet Routes start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL (altitudes above 18,000 feet are called “flight levels” and are described as FL450 for 45,000 feet MSL). Jet
Routes are designated with a “J” before the route number.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
also displayed.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)

APPENDICES

Figure 5-22 Airways on MFD Navigation Page

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

155

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AIRWAY Softkey
presses, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway range can also be
programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific number.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Displaying/removing airways:
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the AIRWAYS Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed.
3) Press the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only.

EIS

4) Press the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only.
5) Press the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘AIRWAYS’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Off’, ‘All’, ‘LO Only’, or ‘HI Only’, and press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

Airway Display Selection
Off, All, LO Only, HI Only

Low Altitude Airway Range
High Altitude Airway Range

AFCS

Figure 5-23 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AIRWAYS Setup

The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Selecting an airway range (LOW ALT AIRWAY or HI ALT AIRWAY):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group.

APPENDICES

4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘LOW ALT AIRWAY’ or ‘HI ALT AIRWAY’ range field.
6) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.

INDEX

8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

156

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

The following range items are configurable on the airways menu:
Airway Type

Symbol

Low Altitude Airway (LOW ALT AIRWAY)
High Altitude Airway (HI ALT AIRWAY)

300

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
200
500
500

Table 5-4 Airway Range Information
EIS

TRACK VECTOR

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector
is a solid cyan line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is selectable (30
sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track vector. The track
vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Track Vector

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-24 Navigation Map -Track Vector

Displaying/removing the track vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.

AFCS

2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

5) Highlight the ‘TRACK VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the look
ahead time field. Use the FMS Knob to select the desired time. Press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

157

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Track Vector
- On/Off
- Look Ahead Time

EIS

Wind Vector On/Off
Nav Range Ring On/Off

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

SVS Field of View On/Off
Selected Altitude Arc On/Off

Fuel Range Ring
- On/Off
- Fuel Reserve Time

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-25 Navigation Map Setup Menu - WIND VECTOR On/Off, NAV RANGE RING On/Off, FIELD OF VIEW On/Off,
SEL ALT ARC On/Off, TRACK VECTOR Setup, FUEL RNG (RSV) Setup

WIND VECTOR

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector information
is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind speeds greater than
or equal to 1 kt.
Wind Direction

Wind Speed

AFCS

Figure 5-26 Navigation Map - Wind Vector

NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the Waypoint

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Information pages.
Displaying/removing the wind vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.

APPENDICES

3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘WIND VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.

INDEX

7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

158

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

NAV RANGE RING
The Nav Range Ring shows the direction of travel (ground track) on a rotating compass card. The range is
determined by the map range. The range is 1/4 of the map range (e.g., 37.5 nm on a 150 nm map).

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Range (radius)

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Nav Range Ring

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-27 Navigation Map - Nav Range Ring

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is not displayed on the Waypoint Information pages, Nearest pages, or Direct-to

Window map.
Displaying/removing the Nav Range Ring:

AFCS

1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘NAV RANGE RING’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

APPENDICES

NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is referenced to either magnetic or true north, based on the selection on the AUX

- System Setup Page.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

159

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FUEL RANGE RING

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green circle
indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range. If only
reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid yellow circle.

Total Endurance Range

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Time to Reserve Fuel

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Range to Reserve Fuel

Figure 5-28 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Displaying/removing the fuel range ring and selecting a fuel range time:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.

AFCS

4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FUEL RNG (RSV)’ field.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Highlight the fuel reserve time field. This time should be set to the amount of flight time equal to the amount
of fuel reserve desired.

APPENDICES

8) To change the reserve fuel time, enter a time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes). The default setting is 00:45
minutes.
9) Press the ENT Key.

INDEX

10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

160

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FIELD OF VIEW (SVT)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) lateral field of view. The
field of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This is
only available if SVT is installed on the aircraft.

EIS

Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 5-29 Navigation Map - Field of View

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Displaying/removing the field of view:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FIELD OF VIEW’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.

AFCS

7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

161

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the selected altitude.
The location will be shown as a cyan arc when the aircraft is actuallly climbing or descending.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Range to
Altitude Arc

Figure 5-30 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Displaying/removing the selected altitude intercept arc:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘SEL ALT ARC’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

162

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

5.3 WAYPOINTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the Nearest Airports Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the CNS and Audio Panel section for details on autotuning.

City Entry Field

Facility
Entry Field

- Waypoint Identifier
- Type (symbol)
- Facility Name
- City

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Identifier Entry Field

EIS

Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering the
city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the G950. As a waypoint
identifier, facility name, or location is entered, the G950’s Spell’N’Find™ feature scrolls through the database,
displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to navigation
leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on any of the waypoint pages.

Entered Waypoint on
Map

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Waypoint Location
AFCS

Figure 5-31 Waypoint Information Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

163

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a Duplicate
Waypoints Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
Identifier with
Duplicates

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Duplicate
Waypoints

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Duplicate Message

AIRPORTS

Figure 5-32 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

NOTE: ‘North Up’ orientation on the Airport Information Page cannot be changed; the pilot needs to be

aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the Airport Information Page
Map.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

The Airport Information Page is the first page in WPT group and allows the pilot to view airport information,
load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review instrument procedures that may be
involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on loading frequencies
(auto-tuning). After engine startup, the Airport Information Page defaults to the airport where the aircraft is
located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport. On a flight plan with multiple
airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.

INDEX

APPENDICES

In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the Airport Information
Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘AIRPORT’, ‘RUNWAYS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’. For
airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. This information is viewed on the
Airport Information Page by pressing the INFO softkey until INFO-1 is displayed.

164

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Airport Information

Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
- Lat/Long/Elev
- Fuel Available
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)

Runway Information

- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available

EIS

Airport/Runway
Diagram

COM/NAV Freq. Info.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

- Identification
- Frequency
- Availability
- Additional Information

Softkeys

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-33 Airport Information Page

The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
• Usage type: Public, Military, Private, or Heliport

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled lighting)
• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

165

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Airport Information

Airport Directory
Information

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Softkeys

Figure 5-34 Airport Directory Page Example

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The airport directory information is viewed on the Airport Directory Page by pressing the INFO softkey until
INFO-2 is displayed. The following are types of airport directory informantion shown (if available) on the
Airport Directory Page:
• Airport:
Identifier, Site
Number, Name, City, State
• Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

• Hours: Facility Hours, Light
Hours, Tower Hours, Beacon
Hours
• Location: Sectional, Magnetic
Variation
• Frequencies: Type/Frequency

• Runway: Headings, Length,
Width, Obstructions, Surface
• Obstructions:
General
Airport Obstructions
• Special
Operations
at
Airport

• Instrument
Approaches:
Published Approach, Freq.
• NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier,
Frequency, Radial, Distance
• Noise:
Noise Abatement
Procedures
• Charts: Low Altitude Chart
Number

• Services Available: Category,
Specific Service
• Notes: Airport Notes
• Pilot Controlled Lighting:
High/Med/Low Clicks/Second
• FBO:
Type, Frequencies,
Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit
Cards, Phone/Fax Numbers

INDEX

APPENDICES

• Transportation:
Ground
Transportation Type Available
• Approach: Approach Facility
Name, Frequency, Frequency
Parameter

• Traffic Pattern Altitudes
(TPA): Aircraft Class/Altitude
• Weather:
Service Type,
Frequency, Phone Number
• Flight Service Station (FSS):
FSS Name, Phone Numbers

166

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the Airport Information Page, press the FMS Knob.
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.

Selecting a runway:
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.

EIS

2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.

View a destination airport:

From the Airport Information Page press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination Airport’. The Destination
Airport is displayed.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The Airport Frequencies Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
Navigation Frequencies
ILS
LOC

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Communication Frequencies
Approach * Control
Pre-Taxi
Arrival *
CTA *
Radar
ASOS
Departure * Ramp
ATIS
Gate
Terminal *
AWOS
Ground
TMA *
Center
Helicopter
Tower
Class B *
Multicom
TRSA *
Class C *
Other
Unicom
Clearance

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

* May include Additional Information
Table 5-5 Airport Frequency Abbreviations

APPENDICES

A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the Airport Information Page. See the
procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be selected for display (see
the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather.
The G950 provides a NRST Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate need to land is required). The Nearest Airports Window displays a
list of the 25 nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there are more than three they are
displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

167

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Bearing/Distance to Airport

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Airport Identifier/
Type

Approach Available
Length of Longest
Runway

COM Freq. Info.

- Identification
- Frequency

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)

NRST Softkey
Figure 5-35 Nearest Airports Window on PFD

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Pressing the ENT Key displays the PFD Airport Information Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing
the ENT Key again returns to the Nearest Airports Window with the cursor on the next airport in the list.
Continued presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information pages for all airports in the Nearest
Airports list.

Airport Information
- ID/Type/City
- Facility

AFCS

Airport Information
- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region

Airport Information

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

- Lat/Long

APPENDICES

The Nearest Airports Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential use in
the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and
surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’,
‘INFORMATION’, ‘RUNWAYS’, ‘FREQUENCIES’, and ‘APPROACHES’.

INDEX

Figure 5-36 Airport Information Window on PFD

The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the navigation map
from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one runway, up to three frequencies,
and up to three approaches are visible at one time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled.
If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed. The currently selected
airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
168

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Navigation Map Showing Nearest Airport

Nearest Airport

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Nearest Airports

- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance

Airport Information

- Facility/City/Elevation
EIS

Runway Information
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency

Approaches Available

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
Window Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-37 Nearest Airport Page

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey to display the Nearest Airports Window. Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the Airport Information
Window.

AFCS

3) To return to the Nearest Airports Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on ‘BACK’) or press the CLR
Key. The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key moves
through the airport list, alternating between the Nearest Airports Window and the Airport Information Window.)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4) Press the CLR Key or the NRST Softkey to close the PFD Nearest Airports Window.

Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the NRST page group.

APPENDICES

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Nearest Airports Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may already
be selected. If there are no Nearest Airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200 NM” is displayed.
3) Press the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports
list is highlighted.

INDEX

4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport)
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

169

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Viewing runway information for a specific airport:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.

1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select
Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.

EIS

The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway length and
“HARD/SOFT” for runway surface type.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (ANY, HARD ONLY, HARD/SOFT, WATER).
5) Press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

AFCS

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

Nearest Airport Criteria
INDEX

- Type of Runway Surface
- Minimum Runway Length

Figure 5-38 System Setup Page - Nearest Airport Selection Criteria

170

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

INTERSECTIONS
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

used to define the intersection.
The Intersection Information Page is used to view information about intersections. In addition to displaying
a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area, the Intersection Information Page displays
intersection information in three boxes labeled ‘INTERSECTION’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘NEAREST VOR’.
Selected Intersection

EIS

Intersection Identifier
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Intersection Info
- Region
- Lat/Long

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Nearest VOR Info

- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection

AFCS

Figure 5-39 Intersection Information Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Select an intersection:
1) With the Intersection Information Page displayed, enter an identifier in the Intersection Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest Intersections Page displayed, press the FMS Knob
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest Intersection Box.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

171

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The Nearest Intersections Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight path. In addition
to displaying a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest intersections in
three boxes labeled ‘NEAREST INT’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘REFERENCE VOR’.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow. Up to eleven Intersections are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no items for display, text indicating that
fact is displayed
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
Navigation Map Showing Nearest Intersection

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Nearest Intersection

Intersection Information

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

- Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
intersection from
aircraft position

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Intersection Lat/Long
Reference VOR Info

AFCS

- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- VOR Frequency
- Bearing/Distance to VOR

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 5-40 Nearest Intersections Page

172

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

NDBS

Selected NDB

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The NDB Information Page is used to view information about NDBs. In addition to displaying a map of
the currently selected NDB and surrounding area, the page displays NDB information in four boxes labeled
‘NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST AIRPORT.
Navigation Map Showing Selected NDB

NDB Identifier/Type
EIS

- Facility Name
- Nearest City

NDB Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

- Type
- Region
- Lat/Long

NDB Frequency

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Nearest Airport Info

- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-41 NDB Information Page
AFCS

NOTE: Compass locator (LOM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon installed in conjunction

with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is at the Outer Marker; when LMM is
used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Select an NDB:
1) With the NDB Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the NDB, or the city in which it’s
located in the NDB Box.

APPENDICES

2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest NDB Page displayed, press the FMS Knob

INDEX

2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest NDB Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

173

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find a NDB close to the flight path. In addition to displaying
a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs in three boxes labeled
‘NEAREST NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

A white arrow before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB. Up to eleven NDBs are visible at a time.
If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. The list only includes waypoints that are within
200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed. If there are
no nearest NDBs in the list, the information and frequency fields are dashed.
Nearest NDB

EIS

Navigation Map Showing Selected NDB

NDB Identifier/Symbol

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

- Bearing/Distance to
NDB from aircraft
position

NDB Information

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

- Facility Name/City
- Type
- Lat/Long

AFCS

NDB Frequency

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 5-42 Nearest NDB Page

174

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

VORS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The VOR Information Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS signals (since ILS signals
can be received on a NAV receiver), or to quickly auto-tune a VOR or ILS frequency. Localizer information
cannot be viewed on the VOR Information Page. If a VOR station is combined with a TACAN station it is
listed as a VORTAC on the VOR Information Page and if it includes only DME, it’s displayed as VOR-DME.
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, the VOR Information
Page displays VOR information in four boxes labeled ‘VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST
AIRPORT’.
Navigation Map Showing Selected VOR

EIS

Selected VOR

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

VOR Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City

VOR Information

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Region
- Lat/Long

VOR Frequency
Nearest Airport Info

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport

AFCS

Figure 5-43 VOR Information Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The VOR classes used in the VOR information box are: LOW ALTITUDE, HIGH ALTITUDE, and
TERMINAL
Select a VOR:

APPENDICES

1) With the VOR Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the VOR, or the city in which it’s
located in the VOR Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

INDEX

Or:

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

175

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the FMS Knob or press the VOR Softkey.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT VOR WINDOW’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
EIS

4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft. Also, a NAV frequency
from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the Nearest VOR Page. In addition to displaying a map of
the surrounding area, the Nearest VOR Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VOR stations in three
boxes labeled ‘NEAREST VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’. The list only includes waypoints that
are within 200 nm.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

A white arrow before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR. Up to eleven VORs are visible at a
time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. If there are no VORs in the list, text
indicating that there are no nearest VORs is displayed. If there are no nearest VORs in the list, the information
is dashed.
Navigation Map Showing Nearest VOR

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Nearest VOR

VOR Identifier/Symbol

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

- Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position

VOR Information

APPENDICES

- Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Lat/Long

VOR Frequency

INDEX

Figure 5-44 Nearest VOR Page

176

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

USER WAYPOINTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The G950 can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from any
map page (except PFD Inset Map, AUX-Trip Planning Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a position on the
map using the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Page by referencing a bearing/distance from an
existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or latitude and longitude. Once a waypoint has been
created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user waypoints are erased upon system power down.
User Waypoint Info
User Wpt Comment
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint

Reference Wpt/Info

Selected User
Waypoint

User Waypoint List

EIS

- Identifier
- Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

- Identifier/Rad/Dist or
- Identifiers/Radials or
- Region/Lat/Long
- Identifier
- Comment

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

# User Wpts Used

Softkeys

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

GO BACK displayed if
User Wpt was created
on map page
Figure 5-45 User Waypoint Information Page

AFCS

Selecting a User Waypoint:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, enter the name of the User Waypoint, or scroll to the
desired waypoint in the User Waypoint List using the large FMS Knob.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest User Waypoint Page displayed, press the FMS Knob

APPENDICES

2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest USR Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

177

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map Showing Selected User Waypoint

Selected User Waypoint

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Nearest User Wpt List

EIS

- Identifier
- Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

User Waypoint Info
- Comment
- Lat/Long

Reference Wpt Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

- Identifier
- Radial/Distance

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-46 Nearest User Waypoint Page

CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
User waypoints can be created from the User Waypoint Information Page in the following ways:
Creating user waypoints from the User Waypoint Information Page:

AFCS

1) Press the NEW Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.

APPENDICES

Or:
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:

INDEX

c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.

178

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Or:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new User Waypoint AAAAAA?’ is
displayed.

EIS

4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 5-47 User Waypoint Information Page Menu

Creating user waypoints from map pages:
INDEX

1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is displayed with the captured position.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

179

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

NOTE: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens upon pressing

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint,
2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new
waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item.
3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint box is highlighted.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:

EIS

a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
9) Press the GO BACK Softkey to return to the map page.

EDITING USER WAYPOINTS

AFCS

Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Move the cursor to the desired field.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.

INDEX

APPENDICES

5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

180

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Renaming user waypoints:
1) Highlight a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List. Press the RENAME Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select ‘Rename User Waypoint’

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Enter a new name.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA to BBBBBB?’ is displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

EIS

Changing the location of an existing waypoint to the aircraft present position:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

3) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice. The new waypoint’s location is saved.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

A system generated comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing,
and distance. If a system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Auto Comment’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The generated comment is based on the reference point used to define the waypoint.

AFCS

The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the user waypoint information
page menu. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power cycle.
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the MENU Key.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select ‘NORMAL’ or ‘TEMPORARY’ as desired, and press the ENT Key
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the User Waypoint Information Page.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

181

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DELETING USER WAYPOINTS
Deleting a single user waypoint

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the DELETE Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘Yes’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:

EIS

1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the MENU Key.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

NOTE: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.

Deleting all user waypoints
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

182

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

5.4 AIRSPACES

Class D Airspace

Restricted Area

Class B Airspace

EIS

MOA (Military)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The G950 can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D, Restricted, MOA
(Military), Other Airspace, Air Defense Interdiction Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR).

TFR
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Class C Airspace

Alert Area

AFCS

ADIZ
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Warning Area

APPENDICES

Figure 5-48 Airspaces

The Nearest Airspaces Page, Airspace Alerts Window, and Airspace Alerts on the PFD provide additional
information about airspaces and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off.
This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the
Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an
airspace.
183

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example,
if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message is
not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot
is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box.

EIS

4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

AFCS

Airspace Alerts Box

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

- Airspace Altitude Buffer
- Alert On/Off
(Default Settings Shown)

DFLTS Softkey

INDEX

Figure 5-49 System Setup Page - Airspace Alerts

184

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected from the Aviation Group in the Map Setup Menu: See Table
5-2 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace area.

Airspace 1

Airspace 2

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Nearest Airspaces Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In addition, a selected
frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the Nearest Airspaces Page. In addition to displaying
a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the Nearest Airspaces Page displays airspace information in
four boxes labeled ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’, ‘AIRSPACE, AGENCY’, VERTICAL LIMITS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’.
Airspace 3

EIS

Airspace Alerts Info

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)

Airspace/Agency Info

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency

Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor

Associated Frequencies
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency

Softkeys
Figure 5-50 Nearest Airspaces Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the Nearest Airspaces Page. The
ALERTS and FREQ softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled only if one or
more frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
1) Select the Nearest Airspace Page.

APPENDICES

2) Press the ALERTS Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’,
and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’ Box.
3) Select the desired airspace.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

185

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Pressing the PFD ALERTS Softkey displays the message window on the PFD. The following airspace alerts are
displayed in the message window:

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead –
less than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near –
less than 2 nm.

Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace within 10
minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Table 5-6 PFD Airspace Alert Messages

186

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

5.5 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on either the MFD or PFD, is
quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the G950 establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.

EIS

A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
The Direct-to Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The Direct-to Window displays
selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Direct-to Point Info

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
- City

VNV Constraints

- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Map of Selected Point

Location of Destination
- Bearing/Distance

AFCS

Desired Course

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 5-51 Direct-to Window - MFD

APPENDICES

Direct-to Point Info

- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name

VNV Constraints

- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset

Direct-to Point Info
INDEX

- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course

Activation Command
Figure 5-52 Direct-to Window - PFD

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

187

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the Direct-to Window.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan wayoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).

EIS

2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the
facility name, or city field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS
Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.

Any waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the Direct-to
Window, the Active Flight Plan Page, or the Active Flight Plan Window.
Waypoint Submenu

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Airports
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
- Airway Waypoints
(only available when
active leg is part of an
airway)

Figure 5-53 Waypoint Submenu

Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
AFCS

1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the
active flight plan waypoint as the default selection.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.

APPENDICES

5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Or:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, or the Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD.
2) Select the desired waypoint.

INDEX

3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.

188

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Any NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints can be selected as a direct-to destination in the Direct-to
Window.
Selecting a NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoint as a direct-to destination:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the
default selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of FPL waypoints (the FPL list is populated only
when navigating a flight plan, and the AIRWAY list is available only when the active leg is part of an airway).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints

EIS

4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The Direct-to Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation.
If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is the active flight plan
waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on any WPT page defaults to the
displayed waypoint.
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to
destination.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.

Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
AFCS

1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the Nearest Airports Page.
2) Select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
3) Press the Direct-to Key.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.

APPENDICES

Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages. If no airport,
NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is automatically
created at the location of the map arrow.
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
1) From a navigation map page, press the Joystick to display the pointer.

INDEX

2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
4) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to
destination.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

189

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Cancelling a Direct-to:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.

EIS

3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the G950 resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.

Page Menu

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

- Cancel Direct-To Navigation

Figure 5-54 Direct-to Window - Cancelling Direct-to Navigation

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

When navigating a direct-to, the G950 sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course to
a destination can also be manually selected using the course field (‘COURSE’) on the Direct-to Window.
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.

APPENDICES

2) Highlight the course field.
3) Enter the desired course.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.

INDEX

Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.

190

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint,
or at the specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNV altitudes prior
to the direct-to destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of the direct-to.
All VNV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on Vertical Navigation for more
information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.

EIS

2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the ‘VNV’ altitude field.
3) Enter the desired altitude.
4) Press the ENT Key. The option to select MSL or AGL is now displayed.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now flashing in the VNV offset distance field.
7) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

8) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
9) Press the ENT Key to activate.

Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

AFCS

Page Menu

- Clear Vertical Navigation
Constraints
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

Figure 5-55 Direct-to Window - Clearing Vertical Constraints

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

191

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Flight planning on the G950 consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding
waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. The G950 allows
flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using
different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being
flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Flight Plan Leg Type

Symbol

EIS

Active non-heading Leg (TOPO On)
Active non-heading Leg (TOPO Off)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Active heading Leg (TOPO On)
Active heading Leg (TOPO Off)
Non-heading Leg in the current flight segment (TOPO On)
Non-heading Leg in the current flight segment (TOPO Off)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Heading Leg not in the current flight segment (TOPO On)
Heading Leg not in the current flight segment (TOPO Off)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Non-heading Leg not in the current flight segment (TOPO On)
Non-heading Leg not in the current flight segment (TOPO Off)

Turn Anticipation Arc (TOPO On/TOPO Off)

AFCS

Table 5-7 Flight Plan Leg Symbols

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Up to 99 flight plans with up to 99 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. One flight plan can be
activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned
off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the G950 uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the G950 automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that
one or more stored flight plans need to be edited.

INDEX

Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.

192

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This re-loads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.

EIS

• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.

FLIGHT PLAN CREATION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
• Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
Non-Active, Flight Plan Leg

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
Active Flight Plan Leg

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Active FPL Waypoint List

- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint

AFCS

Turn Anticipation Arc
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Vertical Navigation Profile

APPENDICES

- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Time to Top of Descent
- Vertical Deviation

Figure 5-56 Active Flight Plan Page

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

193

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Active Flight Plan Comment

Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Waypoint List

EIS

- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 5-57 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD

Catalog Contents

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

- # Used
- # Empty

Flight Plan List
- Comment

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Selected Flight Plan Map

Selected FPL Info

AFCS

- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude

Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 5-58 Flight Plan Catalog Page

APPENDICES

The active flight plan is listed on the active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, and in the Active Flight Plan
Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which the G950 is currently providing guidance, and is shown
on the navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page, and are available for
activation (becomes the active flight plan).
NOTE: The system supports AFCS lateral guidance for all leg types (using NAV or FMS APPR mode). The

INDEX

system does not support course deviation for any heading leg types (VA, VD, VI, VM, or VR).

194

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Creating an active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (only on MFD).

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or airway waypoints).
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.

EIS

5) Repeat step numbers 3 and 4 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
6) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Creating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

3) Press the NEW Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to
display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or airway waypoints).

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key.
6) Repeat step numbers 4 and 5 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
7) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page. The new
flight plan is now in the list.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

195

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key on the Control Unit to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.

EIS

6) Press the IMPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and press the ENT Key.

If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Or:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

If an existing flight plan is selected, an “Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL” prompt is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the
SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select “CANCEL” using the FMS Knob, press the
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the IMPORT Softkey again.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.

Import/Export Softkeys

List of Flight Plans to Import &
Details for the Selected File

Import Successful

INDEX

Figure 5-59 Flight Plan Import

196

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key on the Control Unit to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.

EIS

3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
6) Press the EXPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Export Flight Plan”.
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Import/Export Softkeys

Stored Flight Plan to be Exported &
Exported Flight Plan Name

Export Successful

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

Figure 5-60 Flight Plan Export

197

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select the
desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. Flight plans
are limited to 99 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of waypoints
in the flight plan exceeds 99, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the
new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight plan.

Stored Flight Plan Selected

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint

Softkeys

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 5-61 Stored Flight Plan Page

Flight Plan Full Message

INDEX

Figure 5-62 Active Flight Plan Page - FPL Full

198

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select “EDIT” and press the
ENT Key. The Stored Flight Plan Page is displayed.
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the
highlighted waypoint.

EIS

5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a Duplicate Waypoint

Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Figure 5-63 Duplicate Waypoints Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).

APPENDICES

3) Select the point in the flight plan before which to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly
in front of the highlighted waypoint.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or airway waypoints).

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.

199

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

2) Press the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user
waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the end of
the active flight plan.

1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function on the Active Flight Plan Page and pan to the map location
of the desired user waypoint.

ADDING AIRWAYS TO A FLIGHT PLAN

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose a flight plan (add the desired
airway entry point if not already in the flight plan), select the waypoint after the desired airway entry point,
select the airway, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. An airway can only be loaded if there is a
waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach procedure.
The G950 also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on loaded flight plan waypoints.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
Airways Available at TOP

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Airway Waypoint Sequence

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Preview of Selected Airway

Figure 5-64 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway

APPENDICES

Adding an airway to a flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).

INDEX

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this waypoint is not
a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.

200

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

4) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and select the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select “Load Airway”. The Select Airway Page is displayed. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the “Load Airway” menu
item is available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has been chosen (the waypoint ahead of the cursor
position).

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways are
shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is
highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
Selected Exit Point

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Airway Exit Points
Available
Preview of
Selected Airway

AFCS

Figure 5-65 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

201

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Inserted Airway Header

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

- Airway Identifier: [airway
identifier].[exit waypoint identifier]
(e.g., V4.SLN)

Figure 5-66 Active Flight Plan Page - Airway Inserted

RESTRICTIONS ON ADDING AIRWAYS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a directional
restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only in the direction MTD-ABB-BNE-DEVAL.
Airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the list of airway
waypoints AMANO, VAKOR, LIBRO, NELDA, DIRKA, GZO, KOSET, and SARKI:

AFCS

• Starting from AMANO, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Starting from SARKI, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Between NELDA and GZO, the airway can be flown in either direction.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the G950 database.

INDEX

APPENDICES

The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the flight
plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.

202

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDING PROCEDURES TO A STORED FLIGHT PLAN

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The G950 allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation database into a
flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport (departure), arriving at
an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures section for more details.

Flight Plan Name

EIS

Flight Plan Waypoint
List
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Softkeys

- New Waypoint
- Load Departure
- Load Arrival
- Load Approach
- Activate Flight Plan

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-67 Stored Flight Plan Page

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

203

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DEPARTURE (DP)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.

EIS

Departure Airport

Selected Departure

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Departures Available at
KMKC

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Departure Waypoint
Sequence

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Preview of Selected
Departure

Figure 5-68 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Departure

Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
AFCS

1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘EDIT FLIGHT PLAN’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Press the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Departure”, and press the ENT Key. The
Departure Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

6) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.

INDEX

7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.

204

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Departure Airport

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Selected Departure
Selected Runway
Selected Transition

EIS

Departure Transition
Points Available

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Preview of
Selected Departure
Selected Departure End
Point

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-69 Departure Loading Page - Selecting Transition

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Inserted Departure Header

- Departure Identifier: [departure
airport]-[departure runway].
[departure transition].
[departure end point]
(e.g., KMKC-ALL.WLDCT2.SLN)

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 5-70 Stored Flight Plan Page - Departure Inserted

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

205

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVAL (STAR)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.

EIS

Destination Airport
Selected Arrival

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Arrivals Available at KCOS
Selected Runway

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Arrival Waypoint Sequence

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Preview of
Selected Arrival

Figure 5-71 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Arrival

Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
AFCS

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Press the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Arrival”, and press the ENT Key. The Arrival
Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.

INDEX

7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.

206

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Destination Airport

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Selected Arrival
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
DBRY1

EIS

Arrival Waypoint Sequence

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Preview of
Selected Arrival

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-72 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Transition

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Inserted Arrival Header

- Arrival Identifier:
[arrival airport]-[arrival transition].
[arrival].[arrival runway]
(e.g., KCOS-TBE.DBRY1.ALL)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 5-73 Stored Flight Plan Page - Arrival Inserted

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

207

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
APPROACH (APPR)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by designating
transition waypoints.

EIS

Destination Airport

Selected Approach
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Approaches Available at
KCOS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Barometric Minimum

Approach Waypoint
Sequence

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Preview of
Selected
Approach
Figure 5-74 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Approach

Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
AFCS

1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Approach”, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to
the APPROACH CHANNEL field.

INDEX

b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approach procedure.

208

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Destination Airport

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Selected Approach
Selected Transition

EIS

Transitions Available with
Selected Approach

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Approach Waypoint
Sequence
Load Approach?

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Preview of Selected
Approach
Figure 5-75 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Transition

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Inserted Approach Header

AFCS

- Approach Identifier: [approach
airport].[runway and approach type]
(e.g., KCOS-RNAV 35RGPS LPV)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 5-76 Stored Flight Plan Page - Approach Inserted

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

209

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT PLAN STORAGE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The G950 can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. The active flight plan is erased when
the G950 is powered off or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be
viewed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and on the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.

EIS

3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) The Flight Plan Information is displayed showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude
information for the selected Flight Plan.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

5) Press the EDIT Softkey to open the Stored Flight Plan Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the Stored Flight Plan Page.

Flight Plan Name
(Comment)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Selected Flight Plan

AFCS

Preview of Selected
Flight Plan

Stored Flight Plan Info
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

- Departure Airport
- Destination Airport
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude

APPENDICES

Figure 5-77 Stored Flight Plan Information

Stored FPL Editing
Softkeys

Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page or the Active Flight Plan Window:
1) Press the MENU Key.

INDEX

2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the Flight Plan Catalog Page.

210

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ACTIVATE A FLIGHT PLAN
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order and activates it.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.

EIS

3) Press the ACTIVE Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘Activate Stored Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

3) Press the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

COPY A FLIGHT PLAN
The G950 allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without
affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating
a modified version of the original stored flight plan.

AFCS

Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Press the COPY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Copy
to Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

DELETE A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
Individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the G950 memory.
Deleting a stored flight plan:

INDEX

1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

211

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Press the DELETE Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
NOTE: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.

Deleting all stored flight plans:

EIS

1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT PLAN EDITING

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The active flight plan or any stored flight plan can be edited. The edits made to the active flight plan affect
navigation as soon as they are entered.

DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The G950 allows deletion of an active flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by
the G950.
Deleting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).

AFCS

2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ window is displayed.
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

DELETING FLIGHT PLAN ITEMS

APPENDICES

Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:

INDEX

Individual waypoints, entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some waypoints
in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be deleted individually. Attempting to delete
a waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification.’

Or:

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint to be deleted.

Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the waypoint to be deleted (MFD only).

212

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

Deleting an entire airway from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the airway to be deleted.

EIS

Or:

Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the white header of the airway to be deleted (MFD only).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove ?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Deleting an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
Or:

Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the white header of the procedure to be deleted (MFD only).
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove from flight plan?’ window is displayed.

AFCS

4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove ’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove from flight plan?’ window is displayed.

APPENDICES

4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.

Deleting an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.

INDEX

2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

213

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

EIS

Deleting an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.

6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove ?’ window is displayed.

4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the airway to be deleted.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

Deleting an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.

AFCS

3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.

INDEX

3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.

214

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove ’.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

EIS

CHANGING FLIGHT PLAN COMMENTS (NAMES)
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification
and sorting.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Changing the active flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

3) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

Changing a stored flight plan comment:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.

AFCS

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

ALONG TRACK OFFSETS

APPENDICES

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight plan.
Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the system
reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances can be
entered from 1 to 999 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track
offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an
along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.

215

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an along
track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at or after
the final approach fix of an approach.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be
changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with the new offset
distance.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Along Track Offset
Waypoint and Distance
from Flight Plan Waypoint

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance

AFCS

Figure 5-78 Along Track Offset

Entering an along track offset distance:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

APPENDICES

3) Press the ATK OFST Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 999 nm (limited by leg distances).
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.

INDEX

6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

216

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

PARALLEL TRACK

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Parallel Track (PTK) feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the
current flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel
course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier.
Using direct-to, loading an approach, a holding pattern, or editing and activating the flight plan automatically
cancels Parallel Track. Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel
tracks overlap as a result of the course change.
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Active Flight Plan prior to Parallel Track

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Selecting Parallel Track

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-79 Active Flight Plan Window - Selecting Parallel Track

Activating parallel track:
AFCS

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with the direction field highlighted.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Left’ or ‘Right’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘DISTANCE’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE PARALLEL
TRACK’ is highlighted.

APPENDICES

5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track
activation.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

217

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Offset Direction
Offset Distance

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Activation Prompt

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-80 Parallel Track Window

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Original Track
Parallel Track
Parallel Track Waypoints

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- SLN-p
- HYS-p
- LAA-p
- ...
Activating Parallel Track
affects the entire active
flight plan (up to, but not
including the IAF)

Figure 5-81 Parallel Track Active

INDEX

If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation
prompt is displayed, but disabled. Parallel Track cannot be activated if a course is set using direct-to or if the
active leg is the first leg of the departure procedure. Attempting to activate parallel track with these conditions
results in the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry’. If an approach leg is active the status

218

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable
Approach Leg Active’. If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Subdued Prompt
(Unavailable)

EIS

Unavailable Status

Invalid
Geometry

Approach
Active

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 5-82 Parallel Track Unavailable

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Offset Direction &
Distance Subdued
(Unavailable)

Cancel Prompt

AFCS

Active Status

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 5-83 Cancelling Parallel Track

Cancelling parallel track:
APPENDICES

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

219

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Activating a flight plan leg:

The G950 allows selection of a highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently used
for navigation guidance).

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the destination waypoint for the desired leg.

EIS

Or:

Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the destination waypoint for the desired leg.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

3) Press the ACT LEG Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation window is displayed with ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press
the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Current
Active Leg

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Selected Destination
Waypoint

APPENDICES

Activate Leg Softkey

INDEX

Figure 5-84 Active Flight Plan Page - Selecting the Leg Destination Waypoint

220

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

New Active
Flight Plan Leg

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Confirmation Window
Figure 5-85 Active Flight Plan Page - New Active Leg

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

INVERTING A FLIGHT PLAN
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point.
Inverting the active flight plan:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert Active Flight Plan?’
confirmation window is displayed.
3) Select ‘OK’.

AFCS

4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.

Inverting and activating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be inverted.

APPENDICES

4) Press the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Invert & Activate Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ confirmation window is displayed.
5) Select ‘OK’.
6) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the stored flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

221

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way. The active flight plan can be configured
to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan;
and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view, additional information is
displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and
Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
Switching between leg-to-leg waypoint distance and cumulative waypoint distance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.

EIS

2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the CUM and LEG-LEG Softkeys.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

3) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or press the LEG-LEG Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
Active Flight Plan Cumulative Distance

WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey

LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Active Flight Plan Leg to Leg Distance

Figure 5-86 Active Flight Plan - Leg to Leg vs. Cumulative Distance

APPENDICES

Switching between wide and narrow view:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the WIDE and NARROW Softkeys.
3) Press the WIDE Softkey to display the wide view, or press the NARROW Softkey to display the narrow view.

INDEX

4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.

222

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Active Flight Plan Narrow View

Active Flight Plan Wide View

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey
Figure 5-87 Active Flight Plan - Wide vs. Narrow View

COLLAPSING AIRWAYS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The G950 allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Active Flight Plan
Page/Window. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflects the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value is
inhibited because it is not usable in this context.

AFCS

The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and the “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed
airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is automatically
expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Q3.FEPOT Airway

APPENDICES

Collapsed View
Expanded View

INDEX

Figure 5-88 Expanded/Collapsed Airways

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

223

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.

CLOSEST POINT OF FPL

EIS

‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference
waypoint, and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference
waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with the
reference waypoint field highlighted.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key. The G950 displays the bearing (BRG) and
distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user
waypoint at this location. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference
waypoint.

USER-DEFINED HOLDING PATTERNS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

A holding pattern can be defined at any active flight plan waypoint, at the aircraft present position, or at a
direct-to waypoint.
Creating a user-defined hold at an active flight plan waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).

AFCS

2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the hold.
Or:

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the waypoint for the hold.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The HOLD AT window appears with
the course field highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.

INDEX

9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted to insert the hold into the flight plan.

224

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Waypoint
Selected
Hold At
Wpt Menu
Selection

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Location of Hold
Hold Entry Course

Course Direction

(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)

(TIME or DIST))

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Leg Length Mode Button

Leg Length

(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)

Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Map of Hold Location

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Expect Further Clearance Time

APPENDICES

Load Hold in Active Flight Plan
Figure 5-89 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at an Active Flight Plan Waypoint

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

225

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Creating a user-defined hold at the aircraft present position:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Present Position’, and press the ENT Key. The HOLD AT window appears
with the course field highlighted.
3) If desired, use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.

EIS

6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

9) Press the ENT Key while ‘ACTIVATE?’ is highlighted to create an Offroute Direct-to hold waypoint at the aircraft
present position and activate the hold.

Creating a user-defined hold at a direct-to waypoint:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1) Press a Direct-to Key and set up the direct-to waypoint as desired, but select ‘HOLD?’ instead of ‘ACTIVATE?’
when finished (MFD or PFD).
2) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

8) Press the ENT Key while ‘ACTIVATE?’ is highlighted to activate the direct-to with the user-defined hold defined
at the direct-to waypoint. (If the direct-to wayoint is part of the active flight plan, the HOLD is inserted into
the active flight plan. If the direct-to waypoint is not part of the active flight plan, an off-route direct-to hold is
created.)

Exiting a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:

Press the SUSP Softkey. The system will provide guidance to follow the holding pattern to the inbound course
and resume automatic waypoint sequencing.

APPENDICES

Removing a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the HOLD waypoint.

INDEX

3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove Holding Pattern?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed from the active flight plan. Select ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT Key to cancel the removal of the holding pattern.

226

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Removing a user-defined hold at an off-route direct-to:
1) Press a Direct To Key to display the DIRECT TO Window (PFD or MFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU with the cursor on the ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ selection.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) Press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Hold At
Present
Position
Menu
Selection

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Location of Hold
Hold Entry Course

Course Direction

Leg Length Mode Button
(TIME or DIST))

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)

Leg Length

(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)

Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)

AFCS

Map of Hold Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Expect Further Clearance Time
INDEX

Activate Hold
Figure 5-90 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at the Aircraft Present Position

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

227

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

EIS

Waypoint
Selected

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Hold Entry Course
Location of Hold
Course Direction

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Leg Length

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)

Leg Length Mode Button

(Time in nm or
Distance in minutes)

Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)
(TIME or DIST))

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Map of Hold Location

APPENDICES

Expect Further
Clearance Time
Load Hold and
Activate Direct To
Hold At Direct To
Waypoint Selection

INDEX

Figure 5-91 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at a Direct To Waypoint

228

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: The system supports vertical path guidance and altitude constraints for the following leg types: AF,

CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FC, FD, PI, RF, and TF. Altitude constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.

Current Vertical Navigation Profile

EIS

The G950 system Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute and
teminal phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a
direct-to waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a
linear deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile

Disabled (fields dashed)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Enabled (valid data)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

ENBL VNV Softkey

CNCL VNV Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 5-92 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation

Enabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.

APPENDICES

2) Press the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., HABUK)).

Disabling VNV guidance:
INDEX

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the CNCL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is disabled.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

229

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and time
to top of descent/bottom of descent (TIME TO TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
and Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TIME TO
TOD items displayed in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually
enabled. Vertical guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

The G950 allows a vertical navigation direct-to to any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Pressing the VNV Direct-to Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct-to Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass
flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent
(TOD) point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile

Current Vertical Navigation Profile

Prior to VNV Direct-to

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

After VNV Direct-to

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

VNV Direct-To Softkey

VNV PROF Softkey

Figure 5-93 Vertical Navigation Direct-To

APPENDICES

Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
Or:

INDEX

Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint.

230

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

NOTE: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (cyan number) to be used. If not,

the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) Press the VNV Direct-To Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’, and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Activate vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

EIS

The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the VNV PROF Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the ENT
Key. The cursor is now located in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The G950 system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database. The navigation database only contains altitudes for procedures
that call for “Cross at” altitudes. If the procedure states “Expect to cross at,” then the altitude is not in the
database. In this case the altitude may be entered manually.

AFCS

Displayed Text
Examples

Cross AT
or ABOVE
5,000 ft

Large White Text
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Large Cyan Text

Cross AT
2,300 ft

Small Cyan Text
Cross AT
or BELOW
3,000 ft
Altitude Constraint
Examples

APPENDICES

Small Cyan Subdued
Text
Small White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar
Figure 5-94 Waypoint Altitude Constraints

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

231

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

White Text

Cyan Text

Cyan Subdued Text

Large Altitude calculated by the system
Text estimating the altitude of the aircraft as
it passes over the navigation point. This
altitude is provided as a reference and is
not designated to be used in determining
vertical speed and deviation guidance.

Altitude has been entered manually.
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude does not match the published
altitude in navigation database or no
published altitude exists.

The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition

Small
Text

Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been retrieved from the
navigation database or has been entered
manually and matches a published
altitude in the navigation database.

The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition

Altitude is not designated to be used in
determining vertical speed and deviation
guidance. Altitude has been retrieved
from the navigation database and is
provided as a reference.

Table 5-8 Altitude Constraint Size and Color Coding

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Altitudes associated with approach procedures are “auto-designated”. This means the system automatically
uses the altitudes loaded with the approach for giving vertical speed and deviation guidance. Note that these
altitudes are displayed as cyan text up to, but not including the FAF. The FAF is always a “reference only”
altitude and cannot be designated, unless the selected approach does not provide vertical guidance. In this case,
the FAF altitude can be designated.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated” using the CLR Key.
The altitude is now displayed only as a reference. It is not used to give vertical guidance. Other displayed
altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude
to a non-designated altitude.
Designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.

AFCS

2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
Or:

Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude (MFD only).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode.
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.

Designating a procedure waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:

APPENDICES

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.

INDEX

3) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.

232

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An
altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. When a database altitude
restriction is displayed, the G950 allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively
overriding the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude restriction of type “AT or
ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical
profile.
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be exceeded

EIS

• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS or GPS
SBAS approach)
• The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Entering/modifiying an altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small
FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter
the three digit flight level.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.

AFCS

Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event
an altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral
waypoint, the G950 displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude can be
provided. The G950 also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been edited.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Deleting an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.

APPENDICES

Or:

Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude constraint (MFD only).
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude constraint?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

233

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Deleting an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
Or:

Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude constraint (MFD only)
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.

EIS

4) Select ‘REMOVE’ and press the ENT Key. The manually entered altitude is deleted (it is replaced by a system
calculated altitude, if available).

Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
Or:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude constraint (MFD only).
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

Modifying a system calculated altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.

AFCS

Or:

Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude constraint (MFD only).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Press the CLR Key. An ‘Edit or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘EDIT’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Edit the value using the FMS Knobs, and press the ENT Key.

INDEX

APPENDICES

6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

234

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

5.8 PROCEDURES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The G950 can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APPRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using the
Procedures (PROC) Key.

EIS

The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the departure and arrival airport are already
loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport on the Procedure Loading Page. Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate”
is given. “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation
guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps
the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds
the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The system adds terminal procedures to the flight plan based on leg types coded within that procedure in the
navigation database. If the terminal procedure in the flight plan contains an identifier like ‘6368ft’, that indicates
a leg that terminates when the specified altitude (6368 feet) has been exceeded. A heading leg in the flight plan
displays ‘hdg’ preceding the DTK (e.g. ‘hdg 008°’). A flight plan leg requiring the pilot to manually intitiate
sequencing to the next leg displays ‘MANSEQ’ as the identifier.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Heading Leg Terminating at the
Specified Altitude

Manually Sequenced Heading Leg

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 5-95 Procedure Leg Identifiers

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

235

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

DEPARTURES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.

LOADING A DEPARTURE INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:

EIS

1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT DEPARTURE’.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

3) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Loading Page is displayed.

7) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.

5) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.

Departure Airport

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Available Procedure Actions

Loaded Procedures

Departure Preview

Departure Choices

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 5-96 Departure Selection

236

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Selected Departure

Loaded Departure

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-97 Departure Loading

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Viewing available departures at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the DP Softkey. The Departure Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on
the map.

AFCS

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The departure is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box. The departure is previewed on the map.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The departure is previewed on the map.
7) Press the INFO-1 Softkey or the INFO-2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

237

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Loading a departure into the active flight plan from the Departure Information Page:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.

1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the DP Softkey. The Departure Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.

3) Select a different departure, if desired.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on the map.

EIS

b) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The departure is previewed on the map.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

c) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The departure is previewed on the map.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The departure is previewed on the map.
4) Press the MENU Key to display the Departure Information Page Menu.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load Departure’.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure into the active flight plan.

REMOVING A DEPARTURE FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

When plans change while flying IFR, departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan.
AFCS

Or:

Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the departure header (MFD only).
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:

APPENDICES

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the MENU Key to display the active flight plan page menu.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
4) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.

INDEX

5) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.

238

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ARRIVALS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active
flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.

LOADING AN ARRIVAL INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:

EIS

1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT ARRIVAL’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Loading Page is displayed.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
Destination Airport

Available Procedure Actions

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Arrival Preview

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Loaded Procedures

Arrival Choices

Figure 5-98 Arrival Selection
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

239

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loaded Arrival

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Selected Arrival

Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-99 Arrival Loading

Viewing available arrivals at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), select the STAR Softkey. The Arrival Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport Information Page.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

AFCS

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor moves
to the Transition box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The arrival is previewed on the map.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The arrival is previewed on the map.

INDEX

APPENDICES

7) Press the INFO Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.

240

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Loading an arrival into the active flight plan from the Arrival Information Page:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the STAR Softkey. The Arrival Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Select a different arrival, if desired.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the arrival. The arrival is previewed on the map.

EIS

b) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor moves
to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The arrival is previewed on the map.
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The arrival is previewed on the map.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

d) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
4) Press the MENU Key to display the Arrival Information Page Menu.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load Arrival’.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure into the active flight plan.

REMOVING AN ARRIVAL FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, arrivals can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.

AFCS

Or:

Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the arrival header (MFD only).
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:

APPENDICES

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.

241

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

APPROACHES
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (SBAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.

EIS

An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance
for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures.
Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach
is already in the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by
selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate” is given. “Loading” adds the
approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows
continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure
available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds the
procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS
receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for
primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or
ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to
the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

The G950 SBAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LP+V and LPV approach service
levels according to the published chart. The ‘+V’ designation adds advisory vertical guidance for assistance in
maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance is displayed
on the system PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. The active approach
service level is annunciated on the HSI as shown in the following table:

242

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Example on HSI

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS

Approach Service Level

- LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

HSI Annunciation
Description
LNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV
minima
LNAV+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV
minima. Advisory vertical guidance is provided
L/VNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV/
(available only if VNAV minima (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS
SBAS available) unavailable)
LP
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima
(available only if (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
LP+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima
(available only if Advisory vertical guidance is provided
SBAS available) (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
LPV
RNAV GPS approach using published LPV
(available only if minima
SBAS available)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Table 5-9 Approach Types

LOADING AN APPROACH INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT APPROACH’, and press the ENT Key. The Approach Loading Page is displayed.
3) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.

AFCS

b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to
the APPROACH CHANNEL field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

5) Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key. Turn
the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.

INDEX

b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the
temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

243

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
a) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

6) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED

FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
Available Procedure Actions

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Destination Airport

Loaded Procedures

Approach Preview

Approach Choices

Figure 5-100 Approach Selection
Loaded Approach

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Selected Approach

Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys

LOAD or ACTIVATE? Annunciation
Figure 5-101 Approach Loading

244

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Viewing available approaches at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the APR Softkey. The Approach
Information Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

EIS

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available approaches. Press the ENT Key to select the approach. The
cursor moves to the Transition box. The approach is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Minimums box. The approach is previewed on the map.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select minimums on or off. Press the ENT Key.
a) When minimums are selected on, the cursor moves to the minimum altitude field . Use the small FMS Knob to
select the altitude. Press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

b) If temperature compensated minimums was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Use the small
FMS Knob to select the temperature. Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the Sequence box. The approach
is previewed on the map.
Or:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

a) When minimums are selected off, the cursor moves to the Sequence box. The approach is previewed on the
map.
7) Press the INFO-1 or the INFO-2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.

Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Page:
1) Select the Nearest Airports Page.

AFCS

2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is
previewed on the map.
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed with the transitions field highlighted.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

7) Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key. Turn
the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.

INDEX

b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the
temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

245

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
a) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

8) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure. The system continues
navigating the current flight plan until the approach is activated. When GPS is not approved for the selected
final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the
approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.

ACTIVATING AN APPROACH

EIS

A previously loaded approach can be activated from the Procedures Window.
Activating a previously loaded approach:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.

In many cases, it may be easiest to “load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps above to select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’ — which
makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
1) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
2) Highlight ‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’ and press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
1) From the Approach Loading Page, press the MENU Key. The page menu is displayed with ‘Load & Activate
Approach’ highlighted.

AFCS

2) Press the ENT Key. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT
APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to
a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.

REMOVING AN APPROACH FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

When plans change while flying IFR, approaches can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)

APPENDICES

2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan.
Or:

Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the approach header (MFD only)..
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.

INDEX

4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:

246

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.

MISSED APPROACH
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
1) Press the PROC Key.

EIS

2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE MISSED APPROACH’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Or:

Press the Go-Around Button.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is
not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by the navigation database, and may be below, equal to, or above the published
minimums for this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet)
after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of
6,368 feet is reached. After reaching 6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case
MOGAL). If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established
to the published fix (MOGAL) to begin the missed approach procedure..

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Course to Altitude Leg

APPENDICES

Figure 5-102 Course to Altitude

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the
aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
when the missed approach procedure is activated.
247

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

If desired, the system can compensate the loaded approach altitudes based on a pilot-supplied temperature
at the destination. For example, if the pilot enters a destination temperature of -40º C, the system increases
the approach altitudes accordingly. A temperature compensated altitude is displayed in slanted text.
Activating temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.

EIS

3) Press the ENT Key. The TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window is displayed.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) Use the small FMS Knob to select the temperature at the . The compensated altitude is computed as
the temperature is selected.
NOTE: The temperature at the destination can be entered in the TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

on the MFD, or in the REFERENCES Window on the PFD. There is only one compensation temperature for
the system, therefore, changing the temperature will affect both the loaded approach altitudes and the
minimums. Refer to the Flight Instruments section for information about applying temperature compensation
to the MDA/DH.
5) Press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE COMPENSATION?’ is highlighted.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

6) Press the ENT Key. The compensated altitudes for the approach are shown in the flight plan.

AFCS

Selected
Temperature
FAF Altitude
Compensated
Altitude

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Temperature
Compensation
Selected

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 5-103 Temperature Compensation

248

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

ACTIVATE
COMPENSATION?
Highlighted

CANCEL
COMPENSATION?
Highlighted

EIS

Figure 5-104 Activating/Cancelling Temperature Compensation

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Compensated
Altitudes

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Uncompensated
Altitudes

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-105 Temperature Compensation in the Active Flight Plan

Cancelling temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.

AFCS

3) Press the ENT Key. The TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘CANCEL COMPENSATION?’ is highlighted.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

5) Press the ENT Key. The temperature compensated altitude at the FAF is cancelled.
NOTE: Activating/cancelling temperature compensation for the loaded approach altitudes does not select/

deselect temperature compensated minimums (MDA/DH), nor does selecting/deselecting temperature
compensated minimums activate/cancel temperature compensated approach altitudes.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

249

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

5.9 TRIP PLANNING

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The G950 allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for a
specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
planning is also available, based on fuel data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining fuel).

TRIP PLANNING

EIS

All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Page
located in the AUX Page Group.
Selected Flight Plan Segment

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg

Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg

Trip Planning Page Mode
- Automatic/Manual

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature

Trip Statistics

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Desired Track Distance Est. Time Enroute Est. Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local) -

Other Statistics

- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)

Fuel Statistics

AFCS

Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Total Range -

Softkeys

- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 5-106 Trip Planning Page

The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:

APPENDICES

• Departure time (DEP TIME) - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations
are from the aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
• Calibrated airspeed (CALIBRATED AS) - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary
source of information is GPS ground speed.

INDEX

• Indicated altitude (IND ALTITUDE) - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source
of information is GPS altitude.

250

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

TRIP STATISTICS
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and the entire flight plan (CUM) selected,
the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.

EIS

In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and the remaining flight plan (REM)
selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
‘from’ waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint (WPTS) mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these
default to the endpoints of the active leg).

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
• Desired Track (DTK) - DTK is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints.
It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
• Distance (DIS) - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown
as minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the
destination.
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.

AFCS

- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure
time all of the ETEs of the legs up to the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA
is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current leg
being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to the
selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight
plan was selected.

APPENDICES

• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
• Destination sunrise and sunset times (SUNRISE, SUNSET) - These times are shown as hours:minutes
and are the local time at the destination.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

251

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FUEL STATISTICS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
• Fuel efficiency (EFFICIENCY) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the
current fuel flow.
• Time of fuel endurance (TOTAL ENDUR) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained
by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.

EIS

• Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (REM FUEL) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required to reach the end of the selected leg.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (REM ENDUR) - This value is calculated by taking the time
of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the selected leg.
• Fuel required for trip (FUEL REQ) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel flow.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• Total range at entered fuel flow (TOTAL RANGE) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.

OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
• Density altitude (DENSITY ALT)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• True airspeed (TRUE AIRSPEED)
The pilot may select automatic (AUTO) or manual (MANUAL) page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint
(WPTS) mode. In automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTS
selection).
Selected Flight Plan NN -

Selected Leg(s)

AFCS

00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Starting and Ending Waypoint of
Selected Flight Plan Segment

Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg

Figure 5-107 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode

APPENDICES

Selected Flight Plan

Selected Leg(s)

Not Available

Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints

INDEX

Figure 5-108 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode

252

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Selecting automatic or manual page mode:

Press the AUTO Softkey or the MANUAL Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:

Press the FPL Softkey or the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.

Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
EIS

1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the flight plan number field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Inset Map also displays the selected data.

Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1) Press the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The
cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly below the FPL field.
2) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set WPT to Present Position’
if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint field.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

3) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.

In manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot, in addition to flight
plan and leg selection.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:

AFCS

1) Press the MANUAL Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the Page Menu, and press the ENT Key. The cursor
may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the DEP TIME field and enter the desired value. Press the ENT Key.
The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat until all
desired values have been entered.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

253

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

5.10 RAIM PREDICTION

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate
a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nm for oceanic, 2.0 nm for enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal,
and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight, RAIM is
available nearly 100% of the time. The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a
specified date and time. RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival
date and time. Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not
available. RAIM prediction must be initiated manually if there is concern over SBAS coverage at the destination
or some other reason that compromises navigation precision. If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the
final approach course, the approach does not become active. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the
missed approach procedure must be flown.

RAIM PREDICTION Box

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

- Prediction Waypoint
- Arrival Time
- Arrival Date
- RAIM Status

RAIM Softkey
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
Figure 5-109 RAIM Prediction

APPENDICES

Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.

INDEX

254

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint; or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.

Predicting RAIM availability at the aircraft present position:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.

EIS

2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set WPT to Present Position’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Status of the RAIM computation for the selected waypoint, time, and date is displayed at the bottom of the
RAIM PREDICTION Box as follows:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ - RAIM has not been computed.
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’ - RAIM calculation is in progress.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be available.
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be unavailable.
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) provides increased navigation accuracy when available. SBAS
can be enabled or disabled manually on the GPS Status Page.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

255

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable

RAIM Softkey

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)

SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
Figure 5-110 SBAS Display - Active

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Enabling/Disabling SBAS:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the SBAS Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘EGNOS’, ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

4) Press the ENT Key to disable SBAS. Press the ENT Key again to enable SBAS.

256

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box

- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

RAIM Softkey
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
Figure 5-111 SBAS Display - Active

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

257

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

5.11 NAVIGATING A FLIGHT PLAN

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The following discussion is an example of navigating a flight plan with the SBAS capable GPS system while the
G950 provides vertical guidance through descents. A lateral flight plan (LNAV) would be navigated in much the
same way, but would not include vertical guidance when the final approach course is active.
NOTE: The following example flight plan is for instructional purposes only. All database information depicted

should be considered not current.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

1) Prior to departure, the TIFTO2 departure, the airways, and the DBRY1 arrival at KCOS are loaded. See the
Procedures section for loading departures and arrivals. Note the magenta arrow in Figure 5-112 indicating the
active departure leg.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

EIS

The example is a flight plan from KMKC to KCOS filed using the TIFTO2 departure, various Victor Airways,
and the DBRY1 arrival with the transition at TBE. The flight plan includes an enroute altitude of 12,000 feet, an
LPV (WAAS) approach selected for runway 35R, and a missed approach executed at the Missed Approach Point
(MAP). A few enroute changes are demonstrated.

2) Figure 5-112 shows the aircraft on the assigned heading of 240º. ‘TERM’ (Terminal) is the current CDI flight
phase displayed on the HSI indicating 1.0 nm CDI scaling.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

After takeoff, ATC assigns a heading of 240º.

INDEX

Figure 5-112 Assigned Heading of 240º

258

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

3) ATC now assigns routing to join V4. A heading of 290º is assigned to intercept V4. The aircraft turns to heading
290° as seen in Figure 5-113.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-113 Assigned Heading of 290º

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

4) Enter V4 into the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

259

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

b) The desired entry point for V4 (TOP) must be entered. Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight
plan insertion point (SLN) as shown in Figure 5-114. When the V4 entry point (TOP) is inserted, it is placed
immediately above the highlighted waypoint (SLN).

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-114 Begin Adding V4 to the Flight Plan

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

c) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. Enter the desired entry point for V4,
Topeka VOR (TOP), as shown in Figure 5-115.

INDEX

Figure 5-115 Entering V4 Entry Point

260

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

d) Press the ENT Key. TOP is inserted into the flight plan as in Figure 5-116.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 5-116 TOP Inserted into the Flight Plan

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

e) With SLN still highlighted as in Figure 5-116, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise. The Waypoint Information
Page is displayed and the LD AIRWY Softkey is now available.
f) Press the LD AIRWY Softkey to display the list of available airways for TOP as seen in Figure 5-117.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 5-117 List of Available Airways for TOP

APPENDICES

g) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight V4 in the list as seen in Figure 5-117.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

261

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

h) Press the ENT Key. The list of available exits for V4 is now displayed as in Figure 5-118.

Figure 5-118 List of Available Exits for V4

i) If necessary, turn either FMS Knob to select the desired exit. In this case Salina VOR (SLN) is selected as in
Figure 5-118.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

j) Press the ENT Key. The selected airway and exit are displayed, and the prompt “LOAD?” highlighted as in
Figure 5-119.

Figure 5-119 Ready to Load V4

INDEX

k) Press the ENT Key.

262

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

l) V4 is now loaded into the flight plan as shown in Figure 5-120.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 5-120 V4 is Loaded in the Flight Plan

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

5) Making V4 the active leg of the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight SLN. The TO waypoint of the leg is selected in order to activate the leg.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

c) Press the ACT LEG Softkey. The confirmation window is now displayed as in Figure 5-121. Note the TOP to
SLN leg is actually part of V4.

AFCS

Figure 5-121 Comfirm Active Leg

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

263

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

d) Verify the displayed leg is the desired leg and press the ENT Key. Note in Figure 5-122, the magenta arrow in
the flight plan window and magenta line on the map indicating V4 is now the active flight plan leg. Note the
phase of flight remained in Terminal (TERM) mode up to this point because a departure leg was active. Since a
leg after the departure is now active, the current CDI flight phase is ENR (Enroute) and CDI scaling has changed
to 2.0 nm.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-122 V4 Now Active Leg

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

6) The aircraft continues on heading 290º. When crosstrack distance is less than 2.0 nm, the XTK disappears from
the HSI and the CDI is positioned on the last dot indicating a 2.0 nm distance from the centerline of the next
course.

264

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

7) As the CDI approaches center, the aircraft turns onto the active leg as seen in Figure 5-123.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-123 Turn on to Active Leg

8) At SLN, Victor Airway 244 (V244) is intercepted. Turn prompts are displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box
as seen in Figure 5-124.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 5-124 Turn to Intercept V244

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

265

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

9) As seen in Figure 5-125, V244 is now the active flight plan leg.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-125 V244 Now Active Leg

266

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

10) At Lamar VOR (LAA) V263 is intercepted. See Figure 5-126.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-126 HYS to LAA Leg Active

11) ATC grants clearance to proceed direct to the OPSHN intersection to begin the arrival procedure. ATC advises
to expect an altitude of 10,000 feet at OPSHN.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

b) Turn the large FMS Knob to select OPSHN in the flight plan list.
c) Press the Direct-to (

) Key. The Direct-to Window is now displayed as shown in Figure 5-127.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

Figure 5-127 Direct To OPSHN

267

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

d) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the VNV altitude field as shown in Figure 5-128.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-128 Enter VNV Altitude

e) An altitude of 10,000 feet is entered as requested by ATC.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

f) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the VNV offset field as shown in Figure 5-129.

APPENDICES

Figure 5-129 Enter VNV Offset Distance

INDEX

g) Enter the offset, or distance from the waypoint at which to reach the selected altitude. In this case, three miles
prior to OPSHN is entered. In other words, the G950 gives vertical guidance so the aircraft arrives at an altitude
of 10,000 feet three miles prior to OPSHN.

268

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

h) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to. Note, in Figure 5-130, the magenta arrow indicating the
direct-to OPSHN after the offset waypoint for OPSHN. The preceding offset waypoint indicates the offset
distance and altitude that were previously entered. The remaining waypoints in the loaded arrival procedure
have no database specified altitudes, therefore, dashes are displayed. Keep the CDI centered and maintain a
track along the magenta line to OPSHN.

Note the Direct-to waypoint is within the loaded arrival procedure, therefore, phase of flight scaling for the CDI
changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
NOTE: If the loaded arrival procedure has waypoints with altitude constraints retrieved from the database

EIS

that will be used as is, the altitude must be manually accepted by placing the cursor over the desired
altitude, then pressing the ENT Key. The altitude is now displayed as cyan meaning it will be used by the
system to determine vertical speed and deviation guidance.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Figure 5-130 Direct-to Active

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

12) The aircraft is proceeding to OPSHN. The expected approach is the RNAV LPV approach to runway 35R, so it is
selected.
a) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

269

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

b) ‘SELECT APPROACH’ should be highlighted as shown in Figure 5-131.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-131 Procedures Window

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

c) Press the ENT Key. A list of available approaches for the destination airport is displayed as in Figure 5-132.

Figure 5-132 List of Available Approaches

INDEX

APPENDICES

d) Turn either FMS Knob to select the LPV approach for 35R as shown in Figure 5-132.

270

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

e) Press the ENT Key. A list of available transitions for the selected approach is displayed as in Figure 5-133.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 5-133 List of Available Transitions

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

f) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired transition. In this case, the Initial Approach Fix (IAF) at HABUK is
used.
g) Press the ENT Key.
h) Barometric Minimums (Figure 5-134)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small
FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
Or:

To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

Figure 5-134 Barometric Minimums Set

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

271

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

i) With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, again press the ENT Key. The selected approach is added to the flight plan as seen
in Figure 5-135.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-135 Loaded Approach

272

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

13) Note the altitude constraints associated with each of the approach waypoints as seen in Figure 5-136. These
altitudes are loaded from the database and are displayed as cyan text, indicating these values are “designated”
for use in computing vertical deviation guidance.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Note: To no longer use the displayed altitude for calculating vertical deviation guidance, perform the
following:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired altitude.
c) Press the CLR Key.

EIS

d) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.

After making the altitude “non-designated”, it is displayed as white text.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Altitude constraint values associated with the Final Approach Fix (FAF) and waypoints beyond the FAF cannot be
designated for vertical guidance. These altitude values are always displayed as white text, as in Figure 5-136.
Vertical guidance from the FAF and on to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) is given using the SBAS GPS altitude
source, therefore, the displayed altitude values are for reference only.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Figure 5-136 Vertical Guidance is Active to the FAF
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

273

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
14) As the aircraft approaches OPSHN, it may be desirable to adjust the speed, or steepness of the upcoming
descent. The default Flight Path Angle (FPA) is -3.0 degrees and a required vertical speed is computed to
maintain the -3.0 FPA. To change the vertical flight path, perform the following steps.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

a) Press the VNV PROF Softkey to place the cursor in the target vertical speed field (VS TGT) as shown in Figure
5-137.
b) At this point, the descent vertical speed can be selected, or the FPA can be selected. Turn the large FMS Knob
to select the desired selection field, then turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired value.

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Note the information now displayed in the ‘CURRENT VNV PROFILE’ box. Also, note the offset waypoint (orange
box) and gray circle are now displayed on the map. The gray circle marks the Top of Descent (TOD). In this
example, vertical guidance is provided at the TOD that results in a -3.0 degree FPA descent to an altitude of
10,000 feet upon reaching the offset waypoint.

Figure 5-137 Adjusting the Descent

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

c) Press the ENT Key.

274

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

15) As seen in Figure 5-138, the aircraft is approaching TOD. Note the target vertical speed required to reach the
selected altitude. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and the Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) are
now displayed on the PFD as shown in Figure 5-139. When the aircraft is within one minute of the TOD, it is
annunciated as shown in Figure 5-139, and an aural alert ‘Vertical track’ will be heard.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-138 Approaching Top of Descent (TOD)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Target Altitude
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
Required Vertical
Speed Indicator
(RVSI)

APPENDICES

Figure 5-139 VDI & RVSI Upon Reaching Top of Descent (TOD)

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

275

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

16) Upon reaching TOD, a descent vertical speed is established which places the VSI pointer in line with the RVSI as
shown in Figure 5-140.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Keep Vertical Deviation
Pointer Centered

Align Actual Vertical Speed
with
Required Vertical Speed

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-140 VDI & RVSI Showing Correctly Established Descent

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

17) When the aircraft is one minute from the bottom of descent (BOD) it is annunciated as shown in Figure 5-141.
Upon reaching the offset waypoint for OPSHN, the aircraft is at 10,000 feet.

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 5-141 Approaching Bottom of Descent (BOD) at OPSHN Offset Waypoint

276

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

18) The aircraft is approaching OPSHN. The upcoming turn and next heading are annunciated at the top left of the
PFD as seen in Figure 5-142. Initiate the turn and maneuver the aircraft on a track through the turn radius to
intercept the magenta line for the OPSHN to FSHER leg and center the CDI.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 5-142 Turn to intercept OPSHN to FSHER Leg

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

277

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

19) After passing OPSHN, the next leg of the arrival turns magenta as shown in Figure 5-143. The magenta arrow
in the flight plan list now indicates the OPSHN to FSHER leg of the arrival procedure is now active.

Figure 5-143 Tracking the OPSHN to FSHER Leg

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

20) The flight continues through the arrival procedure to PYNON (see Figure 5-144). At a point 31 nm from the
destination airport, the phase of flight scaling for the CDI changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by
displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

A descent to HABUK is in the next leg. Note the TOD point on the map. Annunciations for the upcoming turn
and descent, as well as the VDI and RVSI, appear on the PFD as the flight progresses.

278

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

APPENDICES

279

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

INDEX

Figure 5-144 Approaching PYNON

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

21) Upon passing PYNON the approach procedure automatically becomes active. The approach may be activated
at any point to proceed directly to the IAF. In this example, the aircraft has progressed through the final
waypoint of the arrival and the flight plan has automatically sequenced to the IAF as the active leg, activating
the approach procedure (see Figure 5-145).

Figure 5-145 Approach is Now Active

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Note: To manually activate the approach procedure, perform the following steps:
a) Press the PROC Key.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ as shown in Figure 5-146.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

c) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 5-146 Manually Activate Approach

280

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

22) The IAF is the next waypoint. At the TOD, establish a descent vertical speed as previously discussed in Step 16.
The aircraft altitude is 9,000 feet upon reaching HABUK.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-147 Descending Turn to the Initial Approach Fix (IAF)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

281

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

23) After crossing FALUR the next waypoint is the FAF. The flight phase changes to LPV on the HSI indicating the
current phase of flight is in Approach Mode and the approach type is LPV. CDI scaling changes accordingly and is
used much like a localizer when flying an ILS approach. The RVSI is no longer displayed and the VDI changes to
the Glidepath Indicator (as shown in Figure 5-148) when the final approach course becomes active.

Figure 5-148 Descending to the FAF

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The descent continues through the FAF (CEGIX) using the Glidepath Indicator, as one would use a glideslope
indicator, to obtain an altitude “AT” 7,800 feet at the FAF. Note the altitude restriction lines over and under (At)
the altitude in the ‘ALT’ field in Figure 5-148.

282

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

24) After crossing CEGIX, the aircraft continues following the glidepath to maintain the descent to “AT or ABOVE”
6,370 feet at the Missed Approach Point (MAP) (RW35R) as seen in Figure 5-149.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-149 Descending to the Missed Approach Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is not part
of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along the runway
centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded. This altitude
is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for this approach. In
this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing the MAP, a direct-to
is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is reached. After reaching
6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL). If the aircraft altitude is
above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the published fix (MOGAL) to
begin the missed approach procedure.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure. For
example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach Hold
Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the aircraft
altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg when the
missed approach procedure is activated.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

283

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

A direct-to is initiated to MOGAL, which is the Missed Approach Hold Point (MAHP) as seen in Figure 5-150.
The aircraft is climbing to 10,000 feet. The CDI flight phase now changes from LPV to MAPR as seen on the HSI.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

25) Upon reaching the MAP, it is decided to execute a missed approach. Automatic waypoint sequencing is
suspended past the MAP. Press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD to resume automatic waypoint sequencing
through the missed approach procedure.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

INDEX

Figure 5-150 Missed Approach Active

284

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

26) The aircraft continues climbing to “AT or ABOVE” 10,000 feet at MOGAL. A holding pattern is established at
the MAHP (MOGAL) as shown in Figure 5-151.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-151 Establishing the Holding Pattern

27) The aircraft maintains 10,000 feet while following the magenta line through the hold as in Figure 5-152.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 5-152 Hold Established
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

285

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

5.12 ABNORMAL OPERATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other

phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and the G950
stops using GPS.

EIS

While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the G950 detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to calculate
a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the G950 uses
its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when available) to
calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the G950 in DR Mode may become increasingly
unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/or heading data
is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated position and,
consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the aircraft. Estimated
position information displayed by the G950 through DR while there is no heading and/or airspeed data available
should not be used for navigation.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/SBAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compound the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.

AFCS

Also, while the G950 is in DR Mode, some terrain functions are not available. Additionally, the accuracy of
all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to
function, but with degraded accuracy.

INDEX

APPENDICES

As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as yellow text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information as shown in Figure
5-153.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

DR Mode is indicated on the G950 by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in yellow over the ‘own
aircraft’ symbol as shown in Figure 5-153. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in yellow on the HSI slightly
above and to the right of the aircraft symbol on the CDI as shown in Figure 5-153. Also, the CDI deviation bar
is removed from the display. Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’ alert message appears on the PFD.
Normal navigation using GPS/SBAS source data resumes automatically once a valid GPS solution is restored.

286

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Distance &
Bearing

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Current
Track
Indicator

EIS

Dead Reckoning
Annunciaion

Wind Data
GPS Navigation
Lost Message

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Bearing
Pointer/
Distance

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Nav Data Bar

All data except
Active Leg,
TAS, and DTK
are in yellow

Wind Data

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
AFCS

Subdued Aircraft
Symbol

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 5-153 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Yellow

NOTE: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,

or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

287

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Blank Page

288

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Hazard avoidance features available for the G950 are designed to aid situational awareness and provide advisory
information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air traffic.
Weather
• GWX 68/70 Airborne Color Weather Radar (Optional)
• L-3 STORMSCOPE® WX-500 Lightning Detection System (Optional)
Terrain Avoidance

EIS

• Terrain Proximity
• Terrain-SVS (Included with Garmin SVT option)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B (TAWS-B) (Optional)
Traffic
• Traffic Information Service (TIS)
• Honeywell KTA 870 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

289

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

6.1 AIRBORNE COLOR WEATHER RADAR

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

EIS

The optional Garmin GWX 68 Airborne Color Weather Radar is a four-color digital pulsed radar with 6.5
kilowatts of output power. The optional Garmin GWX 70 Airborne Color Weather Radar is a solid-state pulsed
radar with forty watts of output power. The radar combines excellent range and adjustable scanning profiles
with a high-definition target display. The pulse width for the GWX 68 is four microseconds (µs) on all ranges
except the 2.5 nm range. The GWX 68 uses a one µs pulse width at this range to reduce the targets smearing
together on the display for better target definition at close range. The GWX 70 has an effective pulse length
of 27.31 microseconds (µs), and the system optimizes the pulse length to maximize resolution at each range
setting.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The Pilatus PC-6 uses a 10-inch phased array antenna that is fully stabilized to accommodate 30º of pitch
and roll.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

To focus radar scanning on specific areas, Sector Scanning offers pilot-adjustable horizontal scan angles of
20º, 40º, 60º, or 90º. A vertical scanning function helps to analyze storm tops, gradients, and cell buildup
activity at various altitudes.
Radar features include:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• Extended Sensitivity Time Constant (STC) logic that automatically correlates distance of the return echo with
intensity, so cells do not suddenly appear to get larger as they get closer.
• WATCH® (Weather ATtenuated Color Highlight) helps identify possible shadowing effects of short-range
cell activity, identifying areas where radar return signals are weakened or attenuated by intense precipitation
(or large areas of lesser precipitation) and may not fully reflect the weather behind a storm.
• Weather Alert that looks ahead for intense cell activity in the 80-320 nm range, even if these ranges are not
being monitored.

AFCS

PRINCIPLES OF PULSED AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The term RADAR is an acronym for RAdio Detecting And Ranging. Pulsed radar locates targets by transmitting
a microwave pulse beam that, upon encountering a target, is reflected back to the radar receiver as a return
echo. The microwave pulses are focused and radiated by the antenna, with the most intense energy in the
center of the beam and decreasing intensity near the edge. The same antenna is used for both transmitting and
receiving. The returned signal is then processed and displayed on the MFD.

APPENDICES

Radar detection is a two-way process that requires 12.36 µs for the transmitted microwave pulses to travel
out and back for each nautical mile of target range. It takes 123.6 µs for a transmitted pulse to make the round
trip if a target is ten nautical miles away.

INDEX

Airborne weather radar should be used to avoid severe weather, not for penetrating severe weather. The
decision to fly into an area of radar targets depends on target intensity, spacing between the targets, aircraft
capabilities, and pilot experience. Pulse type weather radar detects only precipitation, not clouds or turbulence.
The display may indicate clear areas between intense returns, but this does not necessarily mean it is safe to fly
between them. Only Doppler radar can detect turbulence.
Airborne weather radar has other capabilities beyond weather detection. It also has the ability to detect and
provide distance to cities, mountains, coastlines, rivers, lakes, and oceans.
290

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

NEXRAD AND AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Both Airborne Weather Radar and NEXRAD measure weather reflectivity in decibels (dB). A decibel is a
logarithmic expression of the ratio of two quantities. Airborne Weather Radar measures the ratio of power
against the gain of the antenna, while NEXRAD measures the energy reflected back to the radar, or the radar
reflectivity ratio.
Both systems use colors to identify the different echo intensities, but the colors are not interchangeable.
Airborne color radar values used by Garmin Airborne Color Weather Radar should not be confused with
NEXRAD radar values.

EIS

ANTENNA BEAM ILLUMINATION

Antenna at Zero Tilt

Beam Sidelob

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

18,000 ft.

10°
0

Half Power at

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Altitude (x1000 ft.)
80

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The radar beam is much like the beam of a spotlight. The further the beam travels, the wider it becomes.
The radar is only capable of seeing what is inside the boundaries of the beam. The figure below depicts
a radar beam’s characteristics. The figure illustrates vertical dimensions of the radar beam, although the
same holds true for the horizontal dimensions. In other words, the beam is as wide as it is tall. Note that
it is possible to miss areas of precipitation on the radar display because of the antenna tilt setting. With the
antenna tilt set to zero in this illustration, the beam overshoots the precipitation at 15 nautical miles.

Max Power at Beam Center

18,000 ft.
30

Range (nautical miles)

AFCS

Figure 6-1 Radar Beam from a 10 inch Antenna

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The curvature of the earth can also be a factor in missing areas of precipitation, especially at range settings
of 150 nautical miles or more. Here the beam overshoots the precipitation at less than 320 nautical miles.

APPENDICES

320 nm

INDEX

Figure 6-2 Radar Beam in Relation to the Curvature of the Earth

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

291

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
RADAR SIGNAL ATTENUATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The phenomenon of radar signal attenuation affects the operation of weather radar. When the radar signal
is transmitted, it is progressively absorbed and scattered, making the signal weaker. This weakening, or
attenuation, is caused by two primary sources, distance and precipitation.

EIS

Attenuation because of distance is due to the fact that the radar energy leaving the antenna is inversely
proportional to the square of the distance. The reflected radar energy from a target 40 miles away that fills
the radar beam is one fourth the energy reflected from an equivalent target 20 miles away. This would appear
to the operator that the storm is gaining intensity as the aircraft gets closer. Internal signal processing within
the radar system compensates for much of this distance attenuation.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Attenuation due to precipitation is not as predictable as distance attenuation. It is also more intense. As the
radar signal passes through moisture, a portion of the radar energy is reflected back to the antenna. However,
much of the energy is absorbed. If precipitation is very heavy, or covers a large area, the signal may not
reach completely through the area of precipitation. The weather radar system cannot distinguish between an
attenuated signal and an area of no precipitation. If the signal has been fully attenuated, the radar displays
a radar shadow. This appears as an end to the precipitation when, in fact, the heavy rain may extend much
further. A cell containing heavy precipitation may block another cell located behind the first, preventing
it from being displayed on the radar. Never fly into these shadowed areas and never assume that all of the
heavy precipitation is being displayed unless another cell or a ground target can be seen beyond the heavy
cell. The WATCH® feature of the weather radar system can help in identifying these shadowed areas. Areas
in question appear as shadowed or gray on the radar display. Proper use of the antenna tilt control can also
help detect radar shadows.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Attenuation can also be due to poor maintenance or degradation of the radome. Even the smallest amount of
wear and scratching, pitting, and pinholes on the radome surface can cause damage and system inefficiency.

RADAR SIGNAL REFLECTIVITY

AFCS

Precipitation

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Precipitation or objects more dense than water, such as the surface of the earth or solid structures, are
detected by the weather radar. The weather radar does not detect clouds, thunderstorms, or turbulence
directly. It detects precipitation associated with clouds, thunderstorms, and turbulence. The best radar
signal reflectors are raindrops, wet snow, or wet hail. The larger the raindrop, the better the reflectivity. The
size of the precipitation droplet is the most important factor in radar reflectivity. Because large drops in a
small concentrated area are characteristic of a severe thunderstorm, the radar displays the storm as a strong
return. Ice crystals, dry snow, and dry hail have low levels of reflectivity as shown in the illustration, and
often not displayed by the radar. Additionally, a cloud that contains only small raindrops, such as fog or
drizzle, does not reflect enough radar energy to produce a measurable target return.

292

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 6-3 Precipitation Type and Reflectivity

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Ground Returns
The intensity of ground target returns depends upon the angle at which the radar beam strikes the
ground target (Angle of Incidence) and the reflective properties of that target. The gain can be adjusted so
shorelines, rivers, lakes, and cities are well-defined. Increasing the gain too much causes the display to fill
in between targets, thus obscuring some landmarks.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Cities normally provide a strong return signal. While large buildings and structures provide good returns,
small buildings can be shadowed from the radar beam by the taller buildings. As the aircraft approaches
and shorter ranges are selected, details become more noticeable as the highly reflective regular lines and
edges of the city become more defined.

AFCS

Bodies of water such as lakes, rivers, and oceans are not good reflectors and normally do not provide good
returns. The energy is reflected in a forward scatter angle with inadequate energy being returned. They
can appear as dark areas on the display. However, rough or choppy water is a better reflector and provides
stronger returns from the downwind sides of the waves.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Mountains also provide strong return signals to the antenna, but also block the areas behind. However,
over mountainous terrain, the radar beam can be reflected back and forth in the mountain passes or off
canyon walls, using up all or most of the radar energy. In this case, no return signal is received from this
area, causing the display to show a dark spot which could indicate a pass where no pass exists.

APPENDICES

Angle of Incidence
The angle at which the radar beam strikes the target is called the Angle of Incidence. The figure illustrates
the incident angle (‘A’). This directly affects the detectable range, the area of illumination, and the intensity
of the displayed target returns. A large incident angle gives the radar system a smaller detectable range and
lower display intensity due to minimized reflection of the radar energy.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

293

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 6-4 Angle of Incidence

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

A smaller incident angle gives the radar a larger detectable range of operation and the target display shows
a higher intensity. Since more radar energy is reflected back to the antenna with a low incident angle, the
resulting detectable range is increased for mountainous terrain.

SAFE OPERATING DISTANCE

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The following information establishes a minimum safe distance from the antenna for personnel near
operating weather radar. The minimum safe distance is based on the FCC’s exposure limit at 9.3 to 9.5 GHz for
general population/uncontrolled environments, which is 1 mW/cm2. See Advisory Circular 20-68B for more
information on safe distance determination.

MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LEVEL (MPEL)

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

The zone in which the radiation level exceeds the US Government standard of 1 mW/cm2 is the semicircular
area of at least 9.16 feet from the 10-inch antenna. All personnel must remain outside of this zone. With a
scanning or rotating beam, the averaged power density at the MPEL boundary is significantly reduced.

294

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS

MPEL
Boundary

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

9.16’ for 10” antenna

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 6-5 MPEL Boundary
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

BASIC ANTENNA TILT SETUP

AFCS

The following discussion is a simple method for setting up the weather radar antenna tilt for most situations.
It is not to be considered an all encompassing setup that works in all situations, but this method does provide
good overall parameters for the monitoring of threats. Ultimately, it is desired to have the antenna tilted so that
the bottom of the radar beam is four degrees below parallel with the ground. The following example explains
one way of achieving this.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

With the aircraft flying level, adjust the antenna tilt so ground returns are displayed at a distance that equals
the aircraft’s current altitude (AGL) divided by 1,000. For example, if the aircraft is at 14,000 feet, adjust the
tilt so the front edge of ground returns are displayed at 14 nautical miles. Note this antenna tilt angle setting.
Now, raise the antenna tilt six degrees above this setting. The bottom of the radar beam is now angled down 4º
from parallel with the ground.

APPENDICES

PRACTICAL APPLICATION USING THE BASIC TILT SETUP

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

With the antenna tilt set as previously described, any displayed target return should be scrutinized when
flying at altitudes between 2,000 and 30,000 feet AGL. If the displayed target advances on the screen to
within five nautical miles of the aircraft, avoid it. This may be either weather or ground returns that are 2,000
feet or less below the aircraft. Raising the antenna tilt four degrees can help separate ground returns from
weather returns in relatively flat terrain. This places the bottom of the radar beam parallel with the ground.
Return the antenna tilt to the previous setting after a few sweeps.

295

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
If the aircraft is above 29,000 feet, be cautious of any target return that gets to within 30 nautical miles.
This is likely a thunderstorm that has a top high enough that the aircraft cannot fly over it safely.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

If the aircraft altitude is 15,000 feet or lower, setting the displayed range to 60 miles may be more helpful.
Closely monitor anything that enters the display.

EIS

4000
3000

Change in Antenna Tilt

2000

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

+4°
+3°
+2°
+1°
0°
-1°
-2°
-3°
-4°

1000
0
1000
2000
3000
4000

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

10 nm

Vertical Change of Radar Beam (feet)

Also, after setting up the antenna tilt angle as described previously, ground returns can be monitored for
possible threats. The relationship between antenna tilt angle, altitude, and distance is one degree of tilt equals
100 feet of altitude for every one nautical mile.

Figure 6-6 Vertical Change in Radar Beam per Nautical Mile

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Therefore, with the antenna tilt set so that the bottom of the beam is four degrees below parallel with
the ground, a target return at 10 nm is approximately 4,000 feet below the aircraft; at 20 nm, 8,000 feet;
at 50 nm, 20,000 feet. In other words, at this tilt setting, a ground return (such as a mountain peak) being
displayed at 10 nm would have a maximum distance below the aircraft of 4,000 feet. If that ground target
return moves to five nm, maximum distance below the aircraft is 2,000 feet.

AFCS

This setup provides a good starting point for practical use of the weather radar. There are many other
factors to consider in order to become proficient at using weather radar in all situations.

WEATHER MAPPING AND INTERPRETATION

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

WEATHER DISPLAY INTERPRETATION

INDEX

APPENDICES

When evaluating various target returns on the weather radar display, the colors denote precipitation
intensity and rates shown in the Table 6-1.

Weather Mode Color

Intensity

Black
Green
Yellow
Red
Magenta

< 23 dBZ
23 dBZ to < 32 dBZ
32 dBZ to < 41 dBZ
41 dBZ to < 50 dBZ
50 dBZ and greater

Approximate
Precipitation Rate
(in/hr.)
< .01.
.01 - 0.1.
0.1 - 0.5
0.5 - 2
>2

Table 6-1 Precipitation Intensity Levels

296

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Thunderstorms

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Updrafts and downdrafts in thunderstorms carry water through the cloud. The more severe the drafts, the
greater the number and size of the precipitation droplets. With this in mind, the following interpretations
can be made from what is displayed on the weather radar. Avoid these areas by an extra wide margin.
• In areas where the displayed target intensity is red or magenta (indicating large amounts of precipitation),
the turbulence is considered severe.
• Areas that show steep color gradients (intense color changes) over thin bands or short distances suggest
irregular rainfall rate and strong turbulence.

EIS

• Areas that show red or magenta are associated with hail or turbulence, as well as heavy precipitation. Vertical
scanning and antenna tilt management may be necessary to identify areas of maximum intensity.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Along squall lines (multiple cells or clusters of cells in a line) individual cells may be in different stages
of development. Areas between closely spaced, intense targets may contain developing clouds not having
enough moisture to produce a return. However, these areas could have strong updrafts or downdrafts.
Targets showing wide areas of green are generally precipitation without severe turbulence.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Irregularities in the target return may also indicate turbulence, appearing as hooks, fingers, or scalloped
edges. These irregularities may be present in green areas with no yellow, red, or magenta areas and should
be treated as highly dangerous areas. Avoid these areas as if they are red or magenta.
Squall Line

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Hook or Finger

AFCS

Steep Gradient

Scalloped Edge

Figure 6-7 Cell Irregularities
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Thunderstorm development is rapid. A course may become blocked within a short time. When displaying
shorter ranges, periodically select a longer range to see if problems are developing further out. That can
help prevent getting trapped in a blind alley or an area that is closed at one end by convective weather.

APPENDICES
INDEX

Figure 6-8 The Blind Alley - Horizontal Scan

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

297

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

In areas of multiple heavy cells, use the Vertical Scan feature along with antenna tilt management to
examine the areas. Remember to avoid shadowed areas behind targets.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The Blind Alley at Close Range

The Large Storm Behind
Figure 6-9 The Blind Alley

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Tornadoes
There are no conclusive radar target return characteristics which identify a tornado. However, tornadoes
may be present if the following characteristics are observed:
• A narrow, finger-like portion extends and in a short time curls into a hook and closes on itself.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• A hook, which may be in the general shape of the numeral 6 (or 9 in the southern hemisphere), especially
if bright and projecting from the southwest quadrant (northeast quadrant in the southern hemisphere) of
a major thunderstorm.
• V-shaped notches.

AFCS

• Doughnut shapes.
These shapes do not always indicate tornadoes, and tornado returns are not limited to these characteristics.
Confirmed radar observations of tornadoes most often have not shown shapes different from those of a
normal thunderstorm display.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Hail

APPENDICES

Hail results from updrafts carrying water high enough to freeze. Therefore, the higher the top of a
thunderstorm, the greater the probability that it contains hail. Vertically scanning the target return can
give the radar top of a thunderstorm that contains hail. Radar top is the top of a storm cell as detected by
radar. It is not the actual top, or true top of the storm. The actual top of a storm cell is seen with the eyes
in clear air and may be much higher than the radar top. The actual top does not indicate the top of the
hazardous area.

INDEX

Hail can fall below the minimum reflectivity threshold for radar detection. It can have a film of water on
its surface, making its reflective characteristics similar to a very large water droplet. Because of this film of
water, and because hail stones usually are larger than water droplets, thunderstorms with large amounts
of wet hail return stronger signals than those with rain. Some hail shafts are extremely narrow (100 yards

298

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

or less) and make poor radar targets. In the upper regions of a cell where ice particles are dry (no liquid
coating), target returns are less intense.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Hail shafts are associated with the same radar target return characteristics as tornados. U-shaped cloud
edges three to seven miles across can also indicate hail. These target returns appear quite suddenly along
any edge of the cell outline. They also change in intensity and shape in a matter of seconds, making vigilant
monitoring essential.

OPERATION IN WEATHER MODE

EIS

WARNING: Begin transmitting only when it is safe to do so. When transmitting while the aircraft is on the

ground, no personnel or objects should be within 9.16 feet of the antenna.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

CAUTION: In Standby mode, the antenna is parked at the center line. It is always a good idea to put the

radar in Standby mode before taxiing the aircraft to prevent the antenna from bouncing on the bottom stop
and possibly causing damage to the radar assembly.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

When the weather radar system is in the Weather or Ground Map mode, the system automatically switches
to Standby mode on landing.
In Reversionary mode, the weather radar system automatically switches to Standby mode. The system
remains in Standby mode until both displays are restored. In Reversionary mode, the weather radar system
cannot be controlled.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Antenna
Stabilization
Status

Radar Mode
Scan Line

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 6-10 Horizontal Scan Display

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

299

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying weather on the Weather Radar Page:
1) Select the Weather Radar Page in the Map Page Group with the FMS Knob.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Press the MODE Softkey.
3) While on the ground, press the STANDBY Softkey. For the GWX 68 only, a one-minute warm-up period is
initiated (countdown is displayed on the screen). After the warm-up is complete, the radar enters the Standby
Mode. This warm-up period is not applicable to the GWX 70.

Press the WEATHER Softkey. A confirmation window is displayed.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 6-11 Confirming Activating Radar

Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight YES and press the ENT Key to continue radar activation.

Or:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

If the aircraft is airborne, press the WEATHER Softkey. For the GWX 68 only, a one-minute warm-up period is
initiated (countdown is displayed on the screen). After the warm-up is complete, the radar begins transmitting.

4) Turn the Joystick to select the desired map range.
5) The horizontal scan is initially displayed (Figure 6-10). If desired, press the VERTICAL Softkey to change to
vertical scanning.

AFCS

Vertically scanning a storm cell:
NOTE: Vertical scanning of a storm cell should be done with the aircraft wings level to avoid constant

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

adjustment of the Bearing Line.
1) While in the Horizontal Scan view, press the BRG Softkey. This places the cursor in the BEARING field and
displays the Bearing Line.

APPENDICES

If the Bearing Line is not displayed, press the MENU Key and turn the large FMS Knob to select Show Bearing
Line. Press the ENT Key.

2) Press the ENT Key.

INDEX

3) Turn the small FMS Knob to place the Bearing Line on the desired storm cell or other area to be vertically
scanned.

300

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Bearing Line

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Scan Line

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 6-12 Bearing Line on Horizontal Scan

4) Press the VERTICAL Softkey. A vertical slice of the selected area is displayed (Figure 6-13).

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

5) The small FMS Knob may be used to move the scanned slice a few degrees right or left.
6) Turn the Joystick to adjust the range.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

8) To select a new area to be vertically scanned, press the HORIZON Softkey to return to the Horizontal Scan view
and repeat the previous steps.

The Joystick can also be used to adjust bearing from left to right.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 6-13 Vertical Scan Display

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

301

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Adjusting Antenna Tilt Angle:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

In order to make an accurate interpretation of a storm cell, the radar beam should be pointed at the wet
part of the weather cell to record the proper rainfall intensity (color level). The ideal aiming point is just
below the freezing level of the storm. The best way to find this point is to use the Vertical Scan feature. The
antenna tilt angle can be centered on the strongest return area in the vertical scan to get a more accurate
view of the coverage and intensity of the target in the horizontal scan.
Adjusting antenna tilt on the Horizontal Scan display:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the TILT field.

EIS

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired antenna tilt angle.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The Joystick can also be used to adjust tilt up and down.
Adjusting antenna tilt on the Vertical Scan display:
1) Press the TILT Softkey to activate the cursor in the TILT field and display the Tilt Line.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

If the Tilt Line is not displayed, press the MENU Key and turn the large FMS Knob to select Show Tilt Line. Press
the ENT Key.

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust the antenna tilt angle. The selected tilt angle is implemented when Horizontal
Scan is again selected.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The Joystick can also be used to adjust tilt.

AFCS

Tilt Line

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Scan Line

INDEX

Figure 6-14 Adjusting Tilt on Vertical Scan Display

302

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Adjusting Gain:
WARNING: Changing the gain in weather mode causes precipitation intensity to be displayed as a color

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

not representative of the true intensity. Remember to return the gain setting to Calibrated for viewing the
actual intensity of precipitation.
1) Press the GAIN Softkey to activate the cursor in the GAIN field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust the gain for the desirable level. The gain setting is visible in the GAIN field
as a movable horizontal bar in a flashing box. The line pointer is a reference depicting the calibrated position.

EIS

3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
4) Press the GAIN Softkey again to recalibrate the gain. CALIBRATED is displayed in the GAIN field.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Manual Gain Set Below Calibrated

Calibrated Gain
AFCS

Figure 6-15 Gain Calibration

Sector Scan
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

1) While in horizontal scan mode, press the BRG Softkey to display the Bearing Line and place the cursor in the
BEARING field. If the Bearing Line is not displayed, press the MENU Key and turn the large FMS Knob to select
Show Bearing Line.
2) Press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

303

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-16 Selecting Sector Scan Position

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

3) Turn the small FMS Knob to place the Bearing Line in the desired position. The location of the Bearing Line
becomes the center point of the Sector Scan.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the SECTOR SCAN field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select FULL, 60˚, 40˚, or 20˚ scan.
6) If desired, readjust the Bearing Line as discussed previously to change the center of the Sector Scan.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

7) Press the BRG Softkey again to remove the Bearing Line and cursor. The bearing reference resets to 0º.

Figure 6-17 40˚ Sector Scan

Antenna Stabilization

INDEX

When radar stabilization is active, the radar tilt is corrected for pitch and roll, and therefore is kept steady
with respect to an earth fixed reference. The commanded tilt angle is kept constant with respect to the
earth. When the stabilization is disabled, corrections are no longer made for pitch and roll, and the radar
tilt angle is kept constant with respect to the aircraft reference system.
304

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Enabling/disabling antenna stabilization:
1) Press the MODE Softkey.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Press the STAB ON Softkey to activate antenna stabilization or press the STAB OFF Softkey to deactivate. The
current stabilization condition is shown in the upper right of the weather radar display.

WATCH® (Weather Attenuated Color Highlight)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Displayed intensity is questionable.
Potentially stronger than displayed.

EIS

WATCH® identifies deceptively strong or unknown intensity parts of a storm. While in horizontal
scan mode, this feature can be used as a tool to determine areas of possible inaccuracies in displayed
intensity due to weakening of the radar energy. This weakening is known as attenuation. The radar energy
weakens as it passes through areas of intense precipitation, large areas of lesser precipitation, and distance.
Issues with the radome also attenuates the radar energy. All these factors have an effect on the return
intensity. The more energy that dissipates, the lesser the displayed intensity of the return. Accuracy of the
displayed intensity of returns located in the shaded areas are suspect. Make maneuvering decisions with
this information in mind. Proper antenna tilt management should still be employed to determine the extent
of attenuation in a shaded area.
To activate or deactivate the WATCH® feature, press the WATCH Softkey.
Areas of attenuated
signal are shaded

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Horizontal Scan Without WATCH®

Horizontal Scan With WATCH®

APPENDICES

Figure 6-18 Horizontal Scan Without and With WATCH®

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

305

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Weather Alert

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Weather Alert feature indicates the presence of heavy precipitation between the ranges of 80 and 320
nm regardless of the currently displayed range. Weather Alert targets appear as red bands along the outer
range ring at the approximate azimuth of the detected returns.
If a Weather Alert Target is detected within ±10° of the aircraft heading, a textual alert is displayed on the
PFD in the Alerts Window.
If the antenna tilt is adjusted too low, a weather alert can be generated by ground returns. To avoid
unwanted weather alerts, deselect the WX ALRT Softkey..

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Weather Alerts Targets

Figure 6-19 Weather Alert Indications

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

To enable or disable Weather Alerts on the PFD, press the WX ALRT Softkey. Activating and deactivating
enables or inhibits the alert on the PFD, and does not affect the display of the Weather Alert Targets on the
Weather Radar Page.

Figure 6-20 Weather Alert on PFD

APPENDICES

GROUND MAPPING AND INTERPRETATION
A secondary use of the weather radar system is for the presentation of terrain. This can be a useful tool for
verifying aircraft position. A picture of the ground is represented much like a topographical map that can be
used as a supplement to the navigation map on the MFD.

INDEX

Ground Map mode uses a different gain range than Weather mode. Different colors are also used to represent
the intensity levels. The displayed intensity of ground target returns are defined in Table 6-5. Use of the
GAIN and TILT controls help improve contrast so that specific ground targets can be recognized more easily.

306

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

As previously discussed, the type and orientation of the target in relation to the aircraft affects the intensity
displayed.

Ground Map
Mode Color
Black
Cyan
Magenta
Blue

Intensity
0 dB
> 0 dB to < 9 dB
9 dB to < 18 dB
18 dB to < 27 dB
27 dB and greater

EIS

Yellow

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

When the weather radar system is in either the Weather or Ground Map mode, the system automatically
switches to Standby mode upon landing.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Table 6-2 Ground Target Return Intensity Levels

Operation in Ground Map Mode
1) Press the MODE Softkey.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

2) Press the GROUND Softkey to place the radar in Ground Map mode.
3) Press the BACK Softkey.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the TILT field.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

6) Adjust the antenna tilt angle by turning the small FMS Knob to display ground returns at the desired distance.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.

WEATHER RADAR OVERLAY ON THE NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
AFCS

The Map - Weather Radar Page is the principal map page for viewing airborne weather radar information.
Weather radar information may also be shown as an overlay on the Navigation Map Page on the MFD as an
additional reference.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

When the airborne weather radar overlay is enabled, a weather radar information box appears in the upperright corner of the Navigation Map Page. It indicates the selected weather mode, radar bearing, and antenna
tilt angle. The overlay is capable of showing radar information while the radar is in horizontal scan mode.
If the radar is operating in vertical scan mode while the overlay is enabled, the system indicates ‘N/A’ in the
information box to indicate the airborne weather radar overlay is not available until the horizontal scan mode
is selected on the Weather Radar Page.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

307

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Radar Overlay Enabled Icon
Radar Mode
Selected
Radar Bearing

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Radar Range
Scan Line
Selected Antenna
Tilt Angle

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Boundary
of Selected
Radar Scan

Figure 6-21 Airborne Weather Radar Overlay on the Navigation Map Page

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Enabling/Disabling Airborne Weather Radar Overlay on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the WX RADAR Softkey.
Or:

AFCS

1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ group, then press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the product selections and highlight the WX RADAR overlay selection
(‘On’ or ‘Off’). Turn the small FMS knob to highlight the desired selection.
5) To remove the menu, press the FMS Knob or CLR Key.

INDEX

APPENDICES

Weather radar controls on the Navigation Map Page are limited to adjustment of the radar range, bearing,
and antenna tilt angle. The airborne weather radar overlay is viewable at Navigation Map Ranges between five
and 800 nautical miles (ten to 1,500 kilometers). At map ranges beyond these limits, the system removes the
weather radar information from the map. Adjusting the range on the Navigation Map Page simultaneously
adjusts the range of the weather radar proportionally. This radar range is annunciated on the range arc that
appears when the overlay is enabled and a radar scan is active. When the radar range is adjusted on the
Navigation Map Page, system synchronizes the same range to the Weather Radar Page.

308

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The radar bearing is adjustable in one degree increments on the Navigation Map Page by pushing the Joystick
left or right when the overlay is enabled. A left or right arrow next to the bearing readout indicates the direction
of the selected bearing. The cyan radar bearing line is only viewable on the Weather Radar Page. While the
bearing line is not shown on the Navigation Map Page, adjusting the bearing on the Navigation Map Page while
Sector Scan is enabled centers the radar scan on the selected bearing, and the radar scan boundaries adjust
accordingly on the Navigation Map Page.

EIS

Radar antenna tilt angle is adjustable in 0.25 degree increments on the Navigation Map Page. Push the
Joystick up to adjust the antenna tilt angle downward. Push the Joystick down to adjust the antenna tilt angle
upward. An up or down arrow next to the antenna tilt angle setting indicates the direction of the antenna tilt
angle.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The weather radar overlay uses the same colors as those shown on the Weather Radar Page to indicate the
intensity of radar returns. However, the display of gray WATCH radar attenuation and red weather alert target
bands is exclusive to the Weather Radar Page. Because terrain information uses similar colors, enabling the
airborne weather radar overlay on the Navigation Map Page disables the display of terrain information for this
page.

SYSTEM STATUS

Center Banner Annunciation

Standby

STANDBY

Standby (During Warm-Up)

STANDBY

WARM-UP
XX
(XX indicates number of seconds
remaining in warm-up)

Weather

WEATHER

None

Ground Mapping
Off
Radar Failed*

GROUND MAPPING
OFF
FAIL

None
OFF
RADAR FAIL

AFCS

Radar Mode Annunciation Box†

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Radar Mode

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The radar mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Weather Radar Page. Additional information
may be displayed in the center of the Weather Radar Page as a banner annunciation.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

† Annunciations in this column appear in white text in the Weather Radar Mode box on the Navigation
Map Page.
* See Table 6-5 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-3 Radar Modes on the Weather Radar Page

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

309

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The system displays the status of the radar antenna stabilization feature in the upper right corner of the
Weather Radar Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Radar Antenna
Stabilization Status
STAB ON
STAB OFF
STAB INOP

Description
Antenna stabilization is selected on.
Antenna stabilization is selected off.
The radar is not receiving pitch and roll information.
The antenna stabilization feature is inoperative.

EIS

Table 6-4 Antenna Stabilization Annunciations on the Weather Radar Page

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown as a banner in the center of the Weather
Radar Page.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Weather Radar
Page Center Banner
Description
Annunciation
BAD CONFIG
The radar configuration is invalid. The radar should be serviced.
RDR FAULT
The radar unit is reporting a fault. The radar should be serviced.
The system is not receiving valid data from the radar unit. The system
RADAR FAIL
should be serviced.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Table 6-5 Abnormal Radar Status Annunciations on the Weather Radar Page

310

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

6.2 STORMSCOPE LIGHTNING

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

WARNING: Do not rely on information from the lightning detection system display as the sole basis for

hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate
or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
The following pages can display Stormscope data:
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
• Nearest Pages

EIS

• Stormscope Page
• Navigation Map
• AUX - Video Page

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The Stormscope Page is the principal map page for viewing Stormscope lightning information. To display
Stormscope data on the Navigation Map, AUX - Trip Planning Page, or any of the Nearest Pages, press the MAP
Softkey, then press the STRMSCP Softkey. These pages can also display cell or strike data using the yellow
lightning strike symbology shown in Table 6-6.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Table 6-6 Lightning Age and Symbols

AFCS

SETTING UP STORMSCOPE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
Setting up Stormscope options on the Navigation Map:

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected (Figure 6-22), press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Weather’),
and press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections.
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-24).

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

311

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The following options are available (Figure 6-23):
• STRMSCP LTNG – Turns the display of Stormscope data on or off.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• STRMSCP MODE – Selects the CELL or STRIKE mode of lightning activity. Cell mode identifies clusters
or cells of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

• STRMSCP SMBL – Selects the range at which Stormscope data displays. Stormscope data is removed
when a map range greater than the STRMSCP SMBL value is selected.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 6-22 Page Menu

INDEX

Figure 6-23 Map Setup Menu

312

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

CELL AND STRIKE MODE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

On the Navigation Map, cell mode identifies cells of lightning activity (Figure 6-24). Stormscope identifies
clusters of electrical activity that indicate cells. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning
strikes.
Selecting the ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected, press the ENT Key.
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.

EIS

4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on ‘STRMSCP LTNG’.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP MODE’.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

6) Turn the small FMS Knob to change between ‘CELL’ and ‘STRIKE’ options. When an item is selected, press the
ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Lightning
Strikes

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Stormscope
Enabled

APPENDICES

Figure 6-24 Navigation Map Page with
Stormscope Lightning Data

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

313

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn
(Figure 6-25). This is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the
nose of the aircraft.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Manually clearing Stormscope data on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Clear Stormscope® Lightning’.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

3) Press the ENT Key.

Figure 6-25 Navigation Map Page Options Menu

ZOOM RANGE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Stormscope lightning data can be displayed up to 800 nm zoom range (in North up mode) on the Navigation
Map Page. However, in the track up mode at the 500 nm range, a portion of Stormscope lightning data
can be behind the aircraft and therefore not visible on the Navigation Map. Since the range for Stormscope
data is 400 nm diameter total (200 nm in front and 200 nm behind), the 500 nm range in North up mode
shows all the data.

AFCS

At a map range of less than 25 nm, Stormscope lightning data is not displayed, but can still be present.
The maximum zoom range can also be set on the Navigation Map. Note that Stormscope data above the
selected maximum zoom range is decluttered.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Selecting a Stormscope range on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘MAP SETUP’.

APPENDICES

3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP SMBL’.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the maximum display range.

INDEX

7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

To change the display range on the Navigation Map Page, turn the Joystick clockwise to zoom out or
counter-clockwise to zoom in.
314

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SELECTING THE STORMSCOPE PAGE
The Map - Stormscope Page is the principal map page for viewing Stormscope lightning information.
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed at the ranges of 25 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm, and 200 nm.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Page.
3) To change the map range, turn the Joystick clockwise to zoom out or counter-clockwise to zoom in.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Figure 6-26 Stormscope Page

Changing between ‘cell’ and ‘strike’ mode on the Stormscope Page:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the MODE Softkey. The CELL and STRIKE softkeys are displayed.
3) Press the CELL Softkey to display ‘CELL’ data or press the STRIKE Softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box in the upper left corner of the Stormscope Page.

APPENDICES

4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the main Stormscope page.

Changing the viewing mode between 360˚ and 120˚ on the Stormscope Page:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.

INDEX

2) Press the VIEW Softkey. The 360 and ARC softkeys are displayed. Press the 360 Softkey to display a 360˚
viewing area or press the ARC Softkey to display a 120˚ viewing area.
3) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the main Stormscope page.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

315

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

6.3 TERRAIN PROXIMITY

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

WARNING: Do not use Terrain Proximity information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain Proximity is

intended only to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage

EIS

area.
NOTE: Terrain Proximity is disabled when either the Terrain-SVS or TAWS-B options are installed.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

G950 Terrain Proximity is a terrain awareness system that does not comply with TSO-C151b certification
standards. It increases situational awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Do not
confuse Terrain Proximity with the optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B (TAWS-B). TAWS-B
is more sophisticated and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified. Terrain Proximity does not provide warning
annunciations or voice alerts. It only provides color indications on map displays when terrain and obstacles are
within a certain altitude threshold from the aircraft. Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays are the
same, TAWS-B uses more sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles.
Terrain Proximity requires the following components to operate properly:
• Valid 3-D GPS position

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• Valid terrain/obstacle database
Terrain Proximity displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.

AFCS

Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The G950 GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite
position. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above
mean sea level calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GSL
altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that
normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL
altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.

APPENDICES

Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain Proximity
feature portrays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to
the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.

INDEX

DISPLAYING TERRAIN PROXIMITY DATA

316

The symbols and colors in Figure 6-27 and Table 6-7 are used to represent obstacles and aircraft altitude
when the Terrain Proximity Page is selected for display. Terrain Proximity uses black, yellow, and red to
represent terrain information relative to aircraft altitude. The color of each obstacle is associated with the
altitude of the aircraft.
190-00870-02 Rev. A
Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude

Aircraft Altitude

100 ft Threshold

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

1000 ft
Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude

Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude

EIS

Figure 6-27 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL

Obstacle Location
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Table 6-7 Terrain Proximity Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Terrain and obstacle information can be displayed on the following pages:
• PFD Inset Map

• Trip Planning Page

• Navigation Map Page

• Flight Plan Page

• Terrain Proximity Page

• AUX - Video Page
AFCS

Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.

The Map - Terrain Proximity Page is the principal map page for viewing Terrain Proximity information. When
Terrain Proximity is selected on maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page, an icon to indicate the feature is
enabled for display and a legend for Terrain Proximity colors are shown (Figure 6-31).

APPENDICES

The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map.

INDEX

Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles recognized by
Terrain Proximity as yellow or red are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within
the setting limit.
Maps besides the Terrain Proximity Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the
190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

317

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20
nm, the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-28).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-29).
EIS

5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-30).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 6-28 Navigation Map Page Menu

Figure 6-29 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu

Figure 6-30 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group

INDEX

Additional information about obstacles can be displayed by panning over the display on the map. The map
panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the Joystick. If the
map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.

318

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Additional
Information on
Obstacle Selected
with Map Pointer

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)

Red Terrain Area
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)

EIS

Lighted Obstacle
Selected with Map
Pointer

Red Lighted
Obstacles
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Terrain Display
Enabled Icon
Terrain Legend

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 6-31 Terrain Information on the Navigation Map Page

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE
The Terrain Proximity Page is specialized to show terrain and obstacle data in relation to the aircraft’s
current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can
be displayed for reference.

AFCS

Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are
available relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display.
Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the Terrain Proximity Page:

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain Proximity Page.
3) To change the view,

APPENDICES

a) Press the VIEW Softkey.
b) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

319

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude

Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)

EIS

Map Range Rings
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)

Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Yellow Lighted
Obstacles (Between
100’ and 1000’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)

Terrain Legend

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-32 Terrain Proximity Page

Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude

AFCS

Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Map Range Arc
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Black Terrain
(Terrain More
than 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)

Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)

Terrain Legend

INDEX

Figure 6-33 Terrain Proximity Page (ARC View)

320

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

6.4 PROFILE VIEW TERRAIN

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

WARNING: Do not use Profile View Terrain data for primary terrain avoidance. Profile View Terrain is intended

only to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage

area.

EIS

The G950 offers a Profile View of terrain and obstacles relative to the aircraft’s current flight path and altitude
on the Navigation Map Page of the MFD. Profile View does not provide terrain or obstacle caution or warning
annunciations or voice alerts, nor does it display potential impact points inside the Profile View. The colors
and symbols used to represent terrain and obstacles are the same as those used in Terrain Proximity discussed
previously.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Accessing Profile View:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the PROFILE Softkey to enable or disable Profile View.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Select ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.

Enabling/Disabling Profile View Terrain on the Navigation Map (when Profile View is enabled):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.

AFCS

3) Press the TERRAIN Softkey.

PROFILE VIEW DISPLAY
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

When the Profile View is enabled, it is displayed in a window below the Navigation Map. Altitude is shown
along a vertical scale, with an aircraft icon positioned at the current altitude. Distance is represented horizontally
along the bottom of the Profile View, and increases from left (present position) to right.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDICES

When the Navigation Map range is adjusted with the Joystick, the horizontal distance of the Profile View
is adjusted proportionately to be 1/2 of the Navigation Map range distance down to one nm, at which point
Profile View is no longer available (‘PROFILE NOT AVAILABLE’ is displayed). When Navigation Map range
is adjusted to remove altitude-correlated colored terrain data (as shown in the Terrain Legend) or obstacles
from the Navigation Map, these items are also removed from the Profile View; only an outline of the terrain
will be displayed in black in the Profile View window. Refer to the Terrain Proximity, Terrain-SVS, or TAWS-B
discussions for more information about displaying terrain or obstacles on the Navigation Map Page.

321

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Profile View
Path Enabled
Navigation Map Range

EIS

Terrain Legend

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Altitude Scale
Profile View Length
is One Half of the
Navigation Map
Range

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Distance Scale
Figure 6-34 Profile View on Navigation Map with Terrain Display Enabled

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The Profile View is based on the current aircraft track (or heading if track is unavailable) and shows the highest
known terrain or obstacles within a predetermined width from the present aircraft position to the end of the
profile range. The width of the Profile View (Table 6-8) is determined by the phase of flight, as annunciated on
the HSI. Refer to the Flight Instruments section for more information about flight phases.
Flight Phase

Total Profile View Width

Approach

0.6 nm

Departure

0.6 nm

Terminal

2.0 nm

Enroute

4.0 nm

Oceanic

4.0 nm
Table 6-8 Profile View Width

APPENDICES

PROFILE PATH

INDEX

The Profile Path displays the horizontal and lateral boundaries of the Profile View. The path is shown as a
white rectangle on the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-34) and is only available when Profile View is enabled.
White range markers both edges of the Profile Path rectangle match the range markers along the distance scale
inside the Profile View display window whenever the profile range is at least four nm (or 7.5 km if configured
for metric units).

322

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

The Profile Path rectangle may be configured on or off, and the Navigation Map range at which the Profile
Path is removed from map display can be changed.
Customizing the Profile Path display on the Navigation Map Page:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-35).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Profile’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-36).

EIS

5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-37).
• PROFILE PATH – Turns the display of the Profile Path on or off and sets maximum map range at which the Profile
Path is shown

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-35 Navigation Map Page Menu
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 6-37 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Profile Group

APPENDICES

Figure 6-36 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

323

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

6.5 TERRAIN-SVS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage

EIS

WARNING: Do not use Terrain-SVS information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain-SVS is intended only

NOTE: Terrain-SVS is included with the optional Synthetic Vision Technology system (SVT). The TAWS-B

to enhance situational awareness.

area.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Terrain-SVS is a terrain awareness system included with the Garmin Synthetic Vision Technology System (SVT).
SVT functionality is offered as an optional enhancement. The optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System
- Class B (TAWS-B) or standard Terrain-SVS is integrated within SVT to provide visual annunciations and voice
alerts to indicate the presence of threatening terrain relevant to the projected flight path. For detailed information
regarding SVT, refer to the Additional Features section of this Pilot’s Guide.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

option will take precedence over Terrain-SVS when TAWS-B is also installed.

Terrain-SVS does not comply with TSO-C151b certification standards. It increases situational awareness and
aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Do not confuse Terrain-SVS with TAWS-B. TAWS-B is more
sophisticated and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified. Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays
are the same, TAWS-B uses more sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Terrain-SVS does not provide the following:
• Premature Descent Alerting (PDA)
• Excessive Descent Rate (EDR)
• Negative Climb Rate (NCR)

AFCS

• 500 Foot Voice Callout alert (VCO)
Terrain-SVS requires the following components to operate properly:
• Valid 3-D GPS position

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• Valid terrain/airport terrain/obstacle database

APPENDICES

Terrain-SVS displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.

INDEX

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to GSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain-SVS
feature portrays a 3-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to
the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.

DISPLAYING TERRAIN-SVS DATA

EIS

Terrain-SVS uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the
aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-38 and Tables 6-12 and 6-13 are used to represent
terrain, obstacles, and potential impact points.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-38 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain-SVS

Obstacle Location

AFCS

Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Table 6-9 Terrain-SVS Obstacle Colors and Symbology

Alert Type

Example Annunciation

APPENDICES

Potential Impact
Point Symbol

Warning
Caution

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

Table 6-10 Terrain-SVS Potential Impact Point Symbols with Alert Types

325

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Terrain-SVS information can be displayed on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map

• Trip Planning Page

• Navigation Map Page

• Flight Plan Pages

• Terrain-SVS Page

• AUX - Video Page

Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain-SVS Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).

EIS

The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling the
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The Map - Terrain-SVS Page is the principal map page for viewing Terrain-SVS information. When TerrainSVS is selected on maps other than the Terrain-SVS Page, a terrain icon is shown to indicate the feature is
enabled for display.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.

Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Maps besides the Terrain-SVS Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation
Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest
obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:

AFCS

1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-39).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-40).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-41).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown

APPENDICES

INDEX

8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.

326

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Figure 6-39 Navigation Map Page Menu
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 6-40 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu

Figure 6-41 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

TERRAIN-SVS PAGE
The Terrain-SVS Page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point data in relation
to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other
NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect,
the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the Terrain-SVS Page.

AFCS

Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the Joystick from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Displaying the Terrain-SVS Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain-SVS Page.

APPENDICES

Changing the Terrain-SVS Page view:
1) Press the VIEW Softkey.
2) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:

INDEX

1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

327

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain-SVS Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude

Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)

EIS

Map Range Rings
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)

Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Yellow Lighted Obstacles
(Between 100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft Altitude)

Terrain Legend
Annunciation
Window

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-42 Terrain-SVS Page

Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude

AFCS

Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)

Map Range Arc

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)

APPENDICES

Black Terrain
(Terrain More
than 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend

Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)

Annunciation
Window

INDEX

Figure 6-43 Terrain-SVS Page (ARC View)

328

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

TERRAIN-SVS ALERTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within Terrain-SVS software algorithms.
Terrain-SVS alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert
is issued, visual annunciations are displayed with voice alerts. Table 6-11 shows Terrain-SVS alert types with
corresponding annunciations and voice alerts.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The Terrain-SVS Alert Annunciation is
shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the TerrainSVS Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:

EIS

• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the Terrain-SVS Page)
Alert Annunciation

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pop-up
Alert

Figure 6-44 Terrain-SVS Alert Annunciations

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Terrain Display Enabled
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

Figure 6-45 Navigation Map Page
(After Terrain-SVS Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)

329

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Alert Type

MFD
Pop-Up Alert (except
Terrain-SVS Page)

Voice Alert

Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)

“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”

Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)

“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”

Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)

“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”

Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)

“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”

Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)

“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”

Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)

“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”

Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)

“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”

Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)

“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”

* Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-11 Terrain-SVS Alerts Summary

FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of Terrain-SVS compares the aircraft’s projected
flight path with known terrain and obstacles in their respective databases and issues alerts as either a caution
or a warning:

AFCS

Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-46. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
Terrain-SVS Page.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts are
accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the Terrain-SVS Page. The alert is annunciated when
the projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure 6-46.

330

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Required Terrain Clearance
RTC Level (FT)

RTC Descending (FT)

800

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

600

500

400

300

EIS

Required
Terrain Clearance
(FT)
Required
Terrain
Clearance
(FT)

700

200

100

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

0
0

Distance From Runway (NM)
Distance From Runway (NM)

Figure 6-46 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination runway
elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends. When TerrainSVS alerts are inhibited, the annunciation ‘TER INH’ is shown on the PFD and in the MFD terrain annunciation
window.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLTA alerts may also be manually inhibited. Use discretion when inhibiting FLTA alerts, as they should be
enabled where appropriate.

AFCS

Figure 6-47 Terrain-SVS Alerting Disabled
(Terrain-SVS Inhibited) Annunciation

Inhibiting/enabling Terrain-SVS alerting:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

1) Select the Terrain-SVS Page.
2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable Terrain-SVS (choice dependent on current state).
Or:

APPENDICES

1) Select the Terrain-SVS Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Inhibit Terrain-SVS’ or ‘Enable Terrain-SVS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

If Terrain-SVS alerts are inhibited when the Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS
approach, a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation may appear on the PFD next to the Altimeter if the current aircraft
altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix. See the Flight Instruments
Section for details.

331

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM STATUS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

During power-up, Terrain-SVS conducts a self-test of its visual annunciations and voice alerts. A voice alert
is issued at test completion.
Terrain-SVS continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status,
and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the voice alert “Terrain System Failure” is
generated along with the ‘TER FAIL’ alert annunciation.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Terrain-SVS requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should
the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TER N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the Terrain-SVS Page. The voice alert “Terrain
System Not Available” is generated. When sufficient GPS signal is returns and the aircraft is within the
database coverage area, the voice alert “Terrain System Available” is generated.
Alert Type

PFD/MFD† Alert
Annunciation

System Test in Progress
System Test Pass

None

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Terrain Alerting Inhibited
No GPS position

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or Out of database coverage area
Terrain System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, and
Terrain-SVS operating with PFD
Terrain or Obstacle databases

None

Terrain-SVS Page Center
Banner Annunciation
TERRAIN TEST

Voice Alert
None

None

“Terrain System Test OK”

None

NO GPS POSITION

“Terrain System Not Available”*

None

“Terrain System Not Available”*

TERRAIN FAIL

“Terrain System Failure”

TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE

None

INDEX

APPENDICES

† Annunciation is shown on Terrain-SVS Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “Terrain System Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered.
Table 6-12 Terrain-SVS System Status Annunciations

332

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

6.6 TAWS-B

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain avoidance. TAWS is intended only to enhance

situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage

area.

EIS

NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately

processes and cross-validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

TAWS-B (Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B) is used to increase situational awareness and aid in
reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). TAWS provides visual annunciations and voice alerts when terrain
and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft. The displayed alerts and warnings are
advisory in nature only.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

TAWS-B satisfies TSO-C151b Class B requirements for certification.
TAWS-B requires the following to operate properly:
• A valid terrain/obstacle/airport terrain database
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

TAWS-B uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. Terrain information is based
on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be
shown if available in the database. The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content,
per TSO-C151b. However, the displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data
may be inaccurate.

AFCS

TAWS-B uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude. GPS
altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea
level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea level (MSL) calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to
determine TAWS-B alerts. GSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations
in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local
altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source. Therefore, GSL altitude
provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS-B are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and GSL
altitude, TAWS-B displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and
altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and “predict” the
aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner, TAWS-B can provide
advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions
seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read

333

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
from the altimeter) to differ from the GSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s GSL altitude differing
from the baro-corrected altitude.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

DISPLAYING TAWS-B DATA

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

TAWS-B uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the
aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in the figure and tables below are used to represent terrain,
obstacles, and potential impact points.

Figure 6-48 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS-B

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL

Obstacle Location
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude

AFCS

Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Table 6-13 TAWS-B Obstacle Colors and Symbology

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Potential Impact
Point Symbol

Alert Type

Example Annunciation

Warning

APPENDICES

Caution

INDEX

Table 6-14 TAWS-B Potential Impact Point Symbols with Alert Types

334

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

TAWS-B information can be displayed on the following maps:
• Trip Planning Page

• Navigation Map Page

• Flight Plan Pages

• TAWS-B Page

• AUX - Video Page

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• PFD Inset Map

Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the TAWS-B Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.

EIS

The Map - TAWS-B Page is the principal map page for viewing TAWS-B information. When TAWS-B is
selected on maps other than the TAWS-B Page, an icon is shown to indicate that the feature is enabled for
display. A legend for TAWS-B terrain colors will accompany the icon on the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-49)
and the Flight Plan Pages. The icon is always shown on the TAWS-B Page.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 6-49 TAWS-B Icon and Legend

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

AFCS

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Maps besides the TAWS-B Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation
Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest
obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

335

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-50).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-51).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-52).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
EIS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 6-50 Navigation Map Page Menu

Figure 6-52 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 6-51 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu

336

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

TAWS-B PAGE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The TAWS-B Page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point data in relation to the
aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs)
can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the display
automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the TAWS-B Page.
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the Joystick from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).

EIS

Displaying the TAWS-B Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select TAWS-B Page.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Changing the TAWS-B Page view:
1) Press the VIEW Softkey.
2) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360°’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Showing/hiding aviation information on the TAWS-B Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

337

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)

Map Range Rings
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)

EIS

Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)

Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Yellow Lighted
Obstacles (Between
100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft
Altitude)

Terrain Legend
Annunciation
Window

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 6-53 TAWS-B Page

Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)

Map Range Arc

AFCS

Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Black Terrain
(Terrain More
than 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend

APPENDICES

Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)

Annunciation
Window

INDEX

Figure 6-54 TAWS-B Page (ARC View)

338

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

TAWS-B ALERTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS-B software algorithms.
TAWS-B alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert
is issued, visual annunciations are displayed with voice alerts. Table 6-15 shows TAWS-B alert types with
corresponding annunciations and voice alerts.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The TAWS-B Alert Annunciation is
shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the TAWS-B
Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:

EIS

• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the TAWS-B Page)
Alert Annunciation

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-55 TAWS-B PFD Alert Annunciation

Figure 6-56 Navigation Map Page
TAWS-B Pop-up Alert
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Potential Impact Points

APPENDICES

Terrain Display Enabled
Icon
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

Figure 6-57 Navigation Map Page
(After TAWS-B Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)

339

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Alert Type

PFD/MFD**
Alert
Annunciation

MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except TAWS-B Page)

Voice Alert

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Excessive Descent Rate
Warning (EDR)

“Pull Up”
*

Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)

or
*

EIS

Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”

“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”

Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”

Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)

APPENDICES

Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution (ITI)

Negative Climb Rate
Caution (NCR)

“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”

Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)

Premature Descent Alert
Caution (PDA)
Altitude Callout “500”
Excessive Descent Rate
Caution (EDR)

*
or

Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)

“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”

“Too Low, Terrain”
None

None

“Five-Hundred”
“Sink Rate”
*

“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”

INDEX

* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are installation-dependent. Alerts for the default
configuration when more than one option is available are indicated with asterisks.
** Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-15 TAWS-B Alerts Summary

340

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

EXCESSIVE DESCENT RATE ALERT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide suitable notification when the
aircraft is determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain at an excessive speed. Figure 6-58 shows the
parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151b.
6000
5500
5000

4000

NK
: “SI

ion

Caut

3500

”

RATE

EIS

Height Above Terrain (Feet)

4500

3000

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2500
2000

Warning: “PULL UP”

1500
1000

12000

11000

10000

9000

8000

7000

6000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1000

Descent Rate (FPM)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

500

Figure 6-58 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE

AFCS

The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of TAWS-B compares the aircraft’s projected flight
path with known terrain and obstacles in their respective databases and issues alerts as either a caution or a
warning:

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-59. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
TAWS-B Page.

APPENDICES

Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts
are accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS-B Page. The alert is annunciated when
the projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure 6-59.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

341

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Required Terrain Clearance
RTC Level (FT)

RTC Descending (FT)

800

EIS

Required
Terrain Clearance
(FT)
Required
Terrain
Clearance
(FT)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

700

600

500

400

300

200

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

100

0
0

Distance From Runway (NM)
Distance From Runway (NM)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 6-59 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values

PREMATURE DESCENT ALERTING

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly
below the normal approach path to a runway (Figure 6-60).
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is below 700 feet AGL within 15 nm of the destination airport and
ends when the aircraft is 0.5 nm from the runway threshold.

AFCS

800

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Height Above Destination (Feet)

700

600

500

400

300

PDA ALERTING AREA

200

100

Distance to Destination (NM)

INDEX

Figure 6-60 PDA Alerting Threshold

342

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

PDA and FLTA visual annunciations and voice alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion should be used
when inhibiting TAWS-B, and the system should be enabled when appropriate. When TAWS-B is inhibited,
the annunciation ‘TAWS INH’ is shown on the PFD and MFD (Figure 6-61).

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Figure 6-61 TAWS-B Alerting Disabled (TAWS-B
Inhibited) Annunciation

Inhibiting/enabling TAWS-B alerting:
EIS

1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable TAWS (choice dependent on current state).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Inhibit TAWS’ or ‘Enable TAWS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

If TAWS-B alerts are inhibited when the Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach,
a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation may appear on the PFD next to the Altimeter if the current aircraft altitude is at
least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix. See the Flight Instruments Section for
details.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FIVE-HUNDRED VOICE ALERT
The purpose of the “Five-hundred” voice alert is to provide an advisory alert of when the aircraft descends
to within 500 feet above the terrain or runway threshold. When the aircraft is within five nautical miles of an
airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the nearest runway threshold elevation. When the aircraft
is more than five nautical miles of the nearest airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the height
above terrain (as determined by the GPS altitude and Terrain Database).

AFCS

There are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany this voice alert.

NEGATIVE CLIMB RATE AFTER TAKEOFF ALERT (NCR)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The voice alert “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a pop-up terrain
alert on the display. NCR alerting is only active when departing from an airport and when the following
conditions are met:

APPENDICES

• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
• Distance from the departure airport is 2 nm or less
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees
Figures 6-62 and 6-63 shows the NCR alerting parameters as defined by TSO-C151b.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

343

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1000

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Height Above Terrain (Feet)

900
800
700
600

“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”

500
400
300
200
100
0

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

100

120

140

Altitude Loss (Feet)
Figure 6-62 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1000

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Height Above Terrain (Feet)

900
800
700
600

“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”

500
400
300
200

AFCS

100
0
0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

4500

5000

5500

6000

6500

7000

Sink Rate (FPM)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 6-63 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate

SYSTEM STATUS

APPENDICES

During power-up, TAWS-B conducts a self-test of its alerting capabilities. The system test can also be manually
initiated. A voice alert is issued at test completion. TAWS-B System Testing is disabled when ground speed
exceeds 30 knots.
Manually testing the TAWS-B System:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.

INDEX

2) Press the MENU Key (Figure 6-64).
3) Select ‘Test TAWS System’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.

344

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Figure 6-64 TAWS-B Page Menu
EIS

TAWS-B continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the voice alert “TAWS System Failure” is generated
along with the ‘TAWS FAIL’ alert annunciation.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

TAWS-B requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should the
navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TAWS N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS-B Page. The voice alert “TAWS Not
Available” is generated.

System Test in progress
None

TAWS-B Alerting Inhibited
No GPS position

TAWS TEST

None

“TAWS System Test Test OK”

None

NO GPS POSITION

“TAWS Not Available”

None

“TAWS Not Available”

TAWS FAIL

“TAWS System Failure”

TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE

None

AFCS
APPENDICES

None

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or Out of database coverage
area
TAWS-B System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or invalid,
and TAWS operating with PFD
Terrain or Obstacle databases.

Voice Alert

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

System Test pass

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

PFD/MFD* Alert TAWS-B Page Center Banner
Annunciation
Annunciation

Alert Type

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

† Annunciation is shown on TAWS-B Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “TAWS Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered.
Table 6-16 TAWS-B System Status Annunciations

345

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

6.7 TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

WARNING: The Traffic Information Service (TIS) is intended for advisory use only. TIS is intended to help the
pilot locate traffic visually. It is the responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of a TIS-capable terminal radar

EIS

site. Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) and TIS.
Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent
indication.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

NOTE: TIS is disabled if a Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TIS uses the
Mode S transponder for the traffic data link. TIS receives traffic information from ground stations, and is updated
every 5 seconds. The G950 displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3000 feet below to
3500 feet above the requesting aircraft. Traffic is displayed using the symbology shown in Table 6-17.
TIS Symbol

Description
Non-Threat Traffic

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale

AFCS

Table 6-17 TIS Traffic Symbols

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Traffic Advisories (TA) alert the crew to intruding aircraft. When traffic meets the advisory criteria for the TA,
a solid yellow circle symbol is generated. A TA which is detected but is outside the range of the map on which
traffic is displayed are indicated with a message in the lower left corner of the map.

APPENDICES

TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic is moving, to the nearest 45°. Traffic
information for which TIS is unable to determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in the center of
the Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-65) or in a banner at the lower left corner of maps other than the Traffic Map Page
on which traffic can be displayed.

INDEX

The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder aircraft is displayed above/below the
traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the altitude separation
appears above the traffic symbol; if below, the altitude separation appears below. Altitude trend is displayed as
an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction) to the right of the target symbol. Traffic
symbols for aircraft without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or climb/descent
information.

346

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps (when TIS is operating):
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Nearest Pages

• Traffic Map Page

• Active Flight Plan Page

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• Navigation Map Page

Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
EIS

1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The Map - Traffic Map Page is the principal map page for viewing TIS traffic information. When traffic is
selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, an icon is shown to indicate the feature is enabled for display
(Figure 6-65 and Table 6-19).

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Traffic
Advisory

AFCS

Traffic Display
Enabled Icon
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Traffic
Status
Banner
Figure 6-65 TIS Traffic on the Navigation Map Page

APPENDICES

The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of traffic. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which traffic data (symbols
and labels) are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use settings based on those selected for the
Navigation Map Page.
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):

INDEX

1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

347

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Customizing traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-66).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Traffic’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-67).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-68).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
EIS

• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Alerts only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown (with the option to turn off)
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 6-66 Navigation Map Page Menu

Figure 6-68 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group

INDEX

Figure 6-67 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu

348

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

TRAFFIC MAP PAGE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Traffic Map Page is specialized to show surrounding TIS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current
position and altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up
unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from 2 to 12 nm, as indicated by
the map range rings.
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby to
Operating Mode and the G950 begins to display traffic information. Refer to the System Status discussion for
more information.

EIS

Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode:

Press the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ (shown if TIS is in Standby Mode) and press the ENT Key.
Traffic Mode Annunciation

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

“TIS Not Available”
Voice Alert Status

Non-Threat
Traffic, 2500’
Above,
Descending

AFCS

Traffic Advisory, 500’
Below, Climbing

Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported

Traffic Status
Banners

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

Select
to Mute
“TIS Not
Available”
Voice Alert

INDEX

Figure 6-69 Traffic Map Page

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDICES

Traffic Advisory
Off Scale
400’ Below, Level

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Range
Marking
Ring

“Non-Bearing” Traffic
(System Unable to
Determine Bearing)
Distance is 4.0 nm,
500’ Above,
Descending

349

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

TIS ALERTS
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ Annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds
and remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with traffic.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft, the “Traffic” voice alert is generated only
when the number of TAs increases. For example, when the first TA is displayed, a voice and visual annunciation
are generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display, no additional voice alerts are generated. If a second
TA appears on the display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases, another
voice alert is generated.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected

AFCS

Figure 6-70 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)

A “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert is generated when the TIS service becomes unavailable or is out of
range. TIS may be unavailable in the radar coverage area due to the following:

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIS-capable Mode S radar site.
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and out of range of an adjacent site.

APPENDICES

• Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the coverage extends from about 3000
feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all
directions.
• Traffic does not have an operating transponder.

INDEX

The “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert can be manually muted to reduce nuisance alerting. TNA muting
status is shown in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.

350

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Muting the “TIS Not Available” voice alert:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Press the TNA MUTE Softkey. The status is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘‘’Not Available” Mute On’ (shown if TNA muting is currently off) and press the ENT Key.

SYSTEM STATUS
EIS

The G950 performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby Mode
(on the ground) or Operating Mode (in the air). If TIS fails the power up test, an annunciation is shown in the
center of the Traffic Map Page.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

FAILED

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Traffic Map Page Center
Description
Banner Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the transponder*
Data is being received from the transponder, but a failure is
DATA FAILED
detected in the data stream*
The transponder has failed*

UNAVAILABLE

TIS is unavailable or out of range

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
Table 6-18 TIS Failure Annunciations

AFCS

System Test has
Failed

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Data Not
Received from
Transponder

APPENDICES
INDEX

Figure 6-71 TIS Power-up Test Failure

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

351

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. If traffic is selected for display on another map while Standby
Mode is selected, the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out (also the case whenever TIS has failed). Once
the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic information is displayed. The mode can be
changed manually using softkeys or the page menu.
Mode

Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)

TIS Operating

OPERATING

TIS Standby

STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)

TIS Failed*

FAIL

Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)

* See Table 6-20 for additional failure annunciations

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Switching between TIS modes:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Table 6-19 TIS Modes

Or:

1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Press the STANDBY or OPERATE Softkey to switch between modes. The mode is displayed in the upper left
corner of the Traffic Map Page.
a) Press the MENU Key.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ or ‘Standby Mode’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.

352

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed (Table 6-20).
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation

TA X.X ± XX ↕

TRFC RMVD

Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60 seconds since last message)
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is not displayed
Traffic data has failed
Traffic has not been detected
The traffic service is unavailable or out of range

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
TRFC UNAVAIL

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

TRFC COAST

A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending)
Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds
If after another 6 seconds data is not received, traffic is removed from the display
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age increases
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last message)
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this message is displayed

EIS

AGE MM:SS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

TA OFF SCALE

Description

*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Table 6-20 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

353

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

6.8 TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM (TAS)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: TIS is disabled when a Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed.
NOTE: Refer to the Honeywell KTA 870 Pilot’s Guide for a detailed discussion of the KTA 870 TAS.

TAS SYMBOLOGY

EIS

The optional Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TAS
uses an on-board interrogator-processor and the Mode S transponder for the air-to-air traffic data link. Traffic is
displayed using the symbols shown in Table 6-21.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

TAS Symbol

Description
Non-Threat Traffic

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Proximity Advisory (PA)
Traffic Advisory (TA)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-21 TAS Symbol Description

AFCS

A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond, indicates that an intruding aircraft is at greater than
±1200 feet relative altitude or the distance is beyond 5 nm.
A Proximity Advisory indicates that the intruding aircraft is within ±1200 feet and is within 5 nm range, but
is still not considered a threat.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft. Closing rate, distance,
an4450cnd vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display range is
indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.

354

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

OPERATION
The KTA 870 must be in Operating Mode for traffic to be displayed. The unit starts in Operating Mode upon
power-up.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Pressing the STANDBY Softkey forces the unit into Standby Mode. Pressing the NORMAL Softkey allows
the KTA 870 to switch from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as necessary.
Switching from operating mode to standby mode:
On the Traffic Page, press the STANDBY Softkey

EIS

Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select Standby Mode.
2) Press the ENT Key.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Switching from standby mode to operating mode:
On the Traffic Page, press the NORMAL Softkey
Or:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select Normal Mode.
2) Press the ENT Key. The KTA 870 switches from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as necessary.

System Self Test

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

1) Set the range to 2/6 nm to display full traffic test pattern.
2) Press the TEST Softkey.
3) Self test takes approximately eight seconds to complete. When completed successfully, traffic symbols are
displayed and a voice alert “TAS System Test OK” is heard. In the event that the system test fails, the system
reverts to Standby Mode and a voice alert “TAS System Test Fail” is heard.

AFCS

DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps when the KTA 870 unit is operating:
• Nearest Pages

• Navigation Map Page

• Active Flight Plan Page

• Traffic Map Page

• AUX-Video Page

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• PFD Inset Map

• Trip Planning Page
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

355

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Traffic information is also displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision System (SVS) option is installed and
enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Press the NORMAL Softkey to begin displaying traffic. OPERATING is displayed in the Traffic mode field.
4) Press the ALT MODE Softkey to change the altitude volume.
EIS

5) Press the STANDBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. STANDBY is displayed in the Traffic mode
field.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

6) Turn the Joystick clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Operating
Mode
Altitude
Mode

Traffic Display
Range Ring
Non-Threat
Traffic, 2500’
Above,
Descending

Traffic Advisory,
500’ Below,
Climbing

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

“Non-Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 4.0
nm, 500’ Above,
Descending

Traffic
Advisory Off
Scale, 400’
Below, Level

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Proximity
Advisory, 900’
Above, Level

Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
Figure 6-72 Traffic Map Page

APPENDICES

The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and
altitude, without basemap clutter. It is the principal map page for viewing TAS traffic information. Aircraft
orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick
from 2 to 40 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner.
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):

INDEX

1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.

356

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate TAS is
enabled for display (Figure 6-73 and Table 6-22).
Displaying traffic on the Navigation Map

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

1) Ensure that the TAS system is operating. With the Navigation Map displayed, press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map as shown in the figure.

EIS

Non-Threat
Traffic

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Traffic
Advisory

Proximity
Traffic

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

TA Off Scale
Banner
Non-Bearing
Traffic Advisory

Traffic
Enabled Icon

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-73 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map

Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
AFCS

1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.

APPENDICES

The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

357

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

ALTITUDE DISPLAY

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Pilot can select the volume of airspace in which traffic is displayed. Traffic Advisories (TAs) outside of
these limits will still be shown. Refer to the KTA 870 Pilot’s Guide for specific display thresholds.
Changing the altitude display mode:
1) On the Traffic Page, press the ALT MODE Softkey.
2) Press one of the following Softkeys:
• BELOW

EIS

• NORMAL
• ABOVE

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• UNREST (unrestricted)
3) To return to the Traffic Page, press the BACK Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following:
• BELOW
• NORMAL

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• ABOVE
• UNREST (unrestricted)
3) Press the ENT Softkey.

TRAFFIC MAP PAGE DISPLAY RANGE
AFCS

The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
Joystick from 2 to 40 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Page:

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

1) Turn the Joystick.
2) The following range options are available:
• 2 nm

APPENDICES

• 2 and 6 nm
• 6 and 12 nm
• 12 and 24 nm

INDEX

• 24 and 40 nm

358

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-74).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-75).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-76).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off

EIS

• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Alerts and Proximity Advisories

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Figure 6-74 Navigation Map Page Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Figure 6-76 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

Figure 6-75 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu

359

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

TAS ALERTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: Refer to the KTA 870 documentation for information on alerts generated by the TAS equipment.

When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A “Traffic, Traffic” voice alert is generated when the first TA is displayed.
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds and
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.

EIS

• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated when the number of TAs increases while a previous TA remains
active.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected

AFCS

Figure 6-77 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)

SYSTEM STATUS

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Mode

Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)

TAS Self-test Initiated

TEST
(also shown in white in center of page)

INDEX

TAS Operating

Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)

OPERATING

TAS Standby

STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)

TAS Failed*

FAIL

* See Table 6-23 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-22 TAS Modes

360

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map Page.

DATA FAILED
FAILED

Description

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA

Data is not being received from the TAS unit
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit

Table 6-23 TAS Failure Annunciations
EIS

The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.

TA OFF SCALE

NO TRFC DATA

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

TRFC FAIL

Description

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

TA X.X ± XX ↕

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation

*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
AFCS

Table 6-24 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

361

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Blank Page

362

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for the installed autopilot.

7.1 S-TEC FIFTY FIVE X AUTOPILOT (OPTIONAL)
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODE ANNUNCIATION

EIS

NOTE: Only the additional ‘‘FD’ mode annunciation that may appear in the G950 AFCS Status Box is discussed

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

below. This mode annunciation is not analogous to both the G950 and the S-TEC Fifty Five X. Refer to the
approved S-TEC Fifty Five X Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for comprehensive list of annunciations and
operating instructions.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

In addition to the redundant status/mode annunciations and/or visual representations that are simultaneously
displayed on both the G950 (AFCS Status Box and/or PFD) and the S-TEC Fifty Five X (Autopilot Display and/
or Remote Annunciator Display), the G950 displays an additional mode annunciation of ‘FD’ when the Flight
Director Mode is engaged.
Flight
Director
Mode

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 7-1 Flight Director Mode Engaged
(G950 AFCS Status Box)

ALTITUDE PRESELECT
AFCS

The ALT Knob on the PFD is used to enter the selected altitude, which is provided to the STEC Fifty Five X
autopilot. Refer to the STEC Fifty Five X User’s Manual for details on the altitude preselect function.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

363

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

Blank Page

364

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Additional features of the system include the following:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)(if installed)
• SafeTaxi® diagrams
• ChartView and FliteCharts® electronic charts (if installed)
• Airport Directory
• Auxiliary Video (if installed)

EIS

• Scheduler
• Electronic Checklists (if installed)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Flight Data Logging
The Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT), when installed, provides a three-dimensional forward view of terrain
features on the PFD. SVT imagery shows the pilot’s view of relevant features in relation to the aircraft attitude, as
well as the flight path pertaining to the active flight plan.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The ChartView and FliteCharts, when installed, provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts.
Electronic charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts
may be configured in the system, but not both.
The AOPA and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directories offer detailed information for a selected airport, such
as available services, hours of operation, and lodging options. Either the AOPA or AC-U-KWIK database may be
installed, but not both simultaneously.

AFCS

The G950 system provides a control and display interface to a video system, when installed.
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display short term or long term reminder messages such as
Switch fuel tanks, Change oil, or Altimeter-Transponder Check in the Messages Window on the PFD.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Checklists, when installed, help to quickly find the proper procedure on the ground or during flight.
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD data card.
Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

365

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.1 SYNTHETIC VISION TECHNOLOGY (SVT)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: SVT requires a terrain database that has a resolution of nine arc-seconds.
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.

SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

The optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) is a visual enhancement to the G950 Integrated Flight Deck.
SVT depicts a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The field of
view is 30 degrees to the left and 35 degrees to the right. SVT information is shown on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD), or on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode (Figure 8‑84). The depicted imagery is
derived from the aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a nine arc-second database of
terrain, obstacles, and other relevant features. The terrain data resolution of nine arc-seconds, meaning that
the terrain elevation contours are stored in squares measuring nine arc-seconds on each side, is required for the
operation of SVT. Loss of any of the required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVT to
be disabled until the required data is restored.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The SVT terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural
features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed even
if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid with
lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the terrain.
The optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) or standard Terrain-SVS is integrated within
SVT to provide visual and auditory alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the
projected flight path. Terrain alerts are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.

AFCS

The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of the Terrain–SVT or TAWS terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVT.
• Pathways

• Airport Signs

• Flight Path Marker

• Runway Display

• Horizon Heading Marks

• Terrain Alerting

• Traffic Display

• Obstacle Alerting

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:

366

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 8-1 Synthetic Vision Imagery

SVT OPERATION

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

SVT is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVT is enabled, the pitch ladder increments are reduced to
10 degrees up and 7.5 degrees down.

AFCS

SVT functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Softkey leads into the PFD function
Softkeys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the SYN VIS Softkey displays the SVT feature softkeys. The
softkeys are labeled PATHWAY, SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, and APTSIGNS. The BACK Softkey returns to
the previous level of softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVT feature may be activated.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY Softkeys are only available when the SYN TERR Softkey is
activated (gray with black characters). After activating the SYN TERR Softkey, the HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS,
and PATHWAY softkeys may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When system power
is cycled, the last selected state (on or off) of the SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY
softkeys is remembered by the system.

APPENDICES

• PATHWAY Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
• SYN TERR Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
• HRZN HDG Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
• APTSIGNS Softkey enables airport signposts.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

367

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

PFD

SYN VIS

BACK

Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.

BACK

EIS

PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the previous level of softkeys.

Figure 8-2 SVT Softkeys

Activating and deactivating SVT:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the SYN TERR Softkey. The SVT display will cycle on or off with the SYN TERR Softkey.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the PATHWAY Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the PATHWAY Softkey.

AFCS

Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Press the HRZN HDG Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the HRZN HDG Softkey.

Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.

APPENDICES

2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.

INDEX

3) Press the APTSIGNS Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APTSIGNS Softkey.

368

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SVT FEATURES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Airport
Runway

Pathways

Flight
Path
Marker
Airplane
Symbol

EIS

Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Compass
Heading
Marks

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Synthetic
Terrain

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

SVT
Softkeys
Figure 8-3 SVT on the Primary Flight Display

NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation

information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
AFCS

PATHWAYS

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored rectangular
boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box size represents 700 feet
wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During an approach, the box width is
700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The height is 200 feet or one half full scale
deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the pathway boxes are displayed is determined by
the selected altitude during climb, cruise, and when the active leg is the final approach course prior to intercepting
the glidepath/glideslope. During a descent (except while on the approach glidepath/glideslope), the pathway boxes
are displayed at the selected altitude, or the VNAV altitude programmed for the active leg in the flight plan, or the
published altitude constraint, whichever is higher (Figure 8-4). Just prior to intercepting the glidepath/glideslope,
the pathway boxes are displayed on the glidepath/glideslope, or the selected altitude, whichever is lower.

APPENDICES

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and
navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes that
correspond to the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a green CDI.

369

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
An inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a white line drawn on the
Inset map or MFD map indicating an inactive leg.

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Selected
Altitude

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Programmed
Altitudes

Figure 8-4 Programmed and Selected Altitude

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Pathways provide supplemental glidepath/glideslope information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, and
some LNAV approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be used
independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from the
display when the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the
active leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that
would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.

Departure and Enroute

APPENDICES

Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg
of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the
first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVT
field of view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching
the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum
of four.

INDEX

Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft performance. Flight
plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above the aircraft at the altitude
selected or programmed.

370

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Descent and Approach

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Pathways are shown descending only for a programmed descent (Figures 8-5, 8-6). When the flight plan
includes programmed descent segments, pathways are displayed along the descent path provided that the
selected altitude is lower than the programmed altitude.
When an approach providing vertical guidance is activated, Pathways are shown level at the selected
altitude up to the point along the final approach course where the altitude intercepts the extended vertical
descent path, glidepath, or glideslope. From the vertical path descent, glidepath, or glideslope intercept
point, the pathways are shown inbound to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) along the published lateral
and vertical descent path, or at the selected altitude, whichever is lower.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if GPS is selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with LOC
selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and glide
slope.
VOR, LOC BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are displayed in
magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR final
approach courses are not displayed.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Selected Altitude
set for Departure

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway

Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway

TOD

AFCS

Selected Altitude
for Step Down

Programmed descent
displayed by pathway

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)

APPENDICES

Figure 8-5 SVT Pathways, Enroute and Descent

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

371

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Missed Approach

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.

FAF

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Descent displayed
by pathway

Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)

MAP Climbs NOT displayed
by pathway

Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

MAHP

INDEX

Figure 8-6 SVT Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding

372

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT PATH MARKER

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.

EIS

The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes as shown (Figure 8-7).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by TAWS. However, decisions regarding terrain and/or
obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Zero Pitch
Line

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Color of
Pathways
match the
CDI color

Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)

AFCS

Wind
Display

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 8-7 Flight Path Marker and Pathways
APPENDICES

ZERO PITCH LINE

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the horizon when the terrain
horizon is difficult to distinguish from other terrain being displayed. It may not align with the terrain
horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.

373

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
HORIZON HEADING

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30‑degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the HRZN HDG Softkey.

TRAFFIC
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVT display or may appear as a

EIS

partial symbol.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in
the Inset map or MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the
SVT display. For more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AIRPORT SIGNS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from
an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until
the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the
airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APTSIGNS Softkey.

AFCS

Traffic

Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)

Figure 8-8 Airport Signs

374

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

RUNWAYS
WARNING: Do not use SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not

displayed.

EIS

Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are outlined in white. Other runways will be
outlined in gray. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be
outlined with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft
gets closer to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Runway
Selected for
Approach

Other
Runway
on Airport

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 8-9 Runways

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

375

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TERRAIN-SVS AND TAWS ALERTING

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts, and corresponds to the red and yellow X symbols on the Inset Map and MFD map displays. For more
detailed information regarding Terrain-SVS and TAWS, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVT field of view to the left or right of the aircraft.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

TERRAIN
Annunciation

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Terrain
Caution

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Potential
Impact
Point

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 8-10 Terrain Alert

376

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols found
on the Inset map and MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative
height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. Unlike the Inset map and MFD moving map display,
obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors to warn of potential conflict with the aircraft’s
flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert. Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the
aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and altitude displays.

Obstacle
Annunciation
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Obstacle

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Potential
Impact
Point

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-11 Obstacle Alert
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

377

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

FIELD OF VIEW

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a
V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Displaying field of view:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Map Setup and press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Field of
View

Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu

Map Setup Menu, Map Group, Field of View Option

AFCS

Figure 8-12 Option Menus

3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Map Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to FIELD OF VIEW.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select On or Off.

INDEX

APPENDICES

6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

378

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and FIELD OF
VIEW turned on.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

SVT View on the PFD

Field of View on the MFD

Figure 8-13 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

379

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.2 SAFETAXI

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The
maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to
show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at
lower map ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport
provides enhanced position awareness.

EIS

Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• Navigation Map Page

• VOR Information Page

• Inset Map (PFD)

• User Waypoint Information Page

• Airport Information Page

• Trip Planning Page

• Intersection Information Page

• Nearest Pages

• NDB Information Page

• Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo approaching the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.

380

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
EIS

Aircraft
Position
Airport Hot
Spot Outline

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Airport
Features

DCLTR Softkey
Removes
Taxiway
Markings

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The DCLTR Softkey (declutter) label advances to DCLTR-1, DCLTR -2, and DCLTR-3 each time the softkey is
pressed for easy recognition of decluttering level. Pressing the DCLTR Softkey removes the taxiway markings and
airport feature labels. Pressing the DCLTR-1 Softkey removes VOR station ID, the VOR symbol, and intersection
names if within the airport plan view. Pressing the DCLTR-2 Softkey removes the airport runway layout, unless
the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Pressing the DCLTR-3 Softkey cycles back to the original
map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 8-14 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Taxiway
Identification

AFCS

Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Map Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES
INDEX

Figure 8-15 Navigation Map PAGE MENU, Map Setup Option

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

381

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to SAFETAXI.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

SAFETAXI
Option

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

SafeTaxi
Range
Options

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 8-16 MAP SETUP Menu, Aviation Group, SAFETAXI Range Options

382

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SAFETAXI DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.

SafeTaxi Database
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 8-17 Power-up Page, SafeTaxi Database

Power-up Page Display

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Definition
Normal operation. SafeTaxi database is valid and within current cycle.
SafeTaxi database has expired.
Database card contains no SafeTaxi data.

AFCS

Table 8-1 SafeTaxi Annunciation Definitions

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

383

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be found
on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-18.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is
shown.
The SafeTaxi database cycle number shown in the figure, 14S1, is deciphered as follows:
14 – Indicates the year 2014
S – Indicates the data is for SafeTaxi

EIS

1 – Indicates the first issue of the SafeTaxi database for the year

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The SafeTaxi EFFECTIVE date 13–JAN–14 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. SafeTaxi
EXPIRES date 10–MAR–14 is the revision date for the next database cycle.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

SafeTaxi Data

Figure 8-18 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Current Information

APPENDICES

SafeTaxi information appears in cyan and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in cyan when data is
current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in cyan
when data is current and in yellow when expired (Figures 8‑18 and 8-19). NOT AVAILABLE appears in cyan
in the REGION field if SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card (Figure 8‑19). An expired SafeTaxi
database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.

INDEX

Press the MFD1 DB Softkey a second time. The softkey label will change to PFD1 DB. The DATABASE
window will now be displaying database information for PFD1. As before, scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is shown.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for instructions on revising the SafeTaxi database.

384

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Figure 8-19 illustrates possible SafeTaxi database conditions that may appear on the AUX - System Status
Page. The EFFECTIVE date is the beginning date for this database cycle. If the present date is before the
effective date, the EFFECTIVE date appears in yellow and the EXPIRES date appears in cyan. The EXPIRES date
is the revision date for the next database cycle. NOT AVAILABLE indicates that SafeTaxi is not available on the
database card or no database card is inserted.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

SafeTaxi Database has Expired

SafeTaxi Database Not Installed

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Current Date is before Effective Date

Figure 8-19 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Database Status

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

385

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.3 CHARTVIEW

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in full
color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the planview
of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes (Figure 8-20) are not considered within the chart
boundaries. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the aircraft symbol
is removed from the display.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Figure 8-20 shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, the grey shading is for
illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the published chart or MFD display. These off-scale areas
appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of this
information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the aircraft
symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview, not to
the off-scale area.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Inset Box

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Off-Scale
Area

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Off-Scale
Areas

Figure 8-20 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas

APPENDICES

NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.

INDEX

The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)

• Airport Diagrams

• Departure Procedures (DP)

• NOTAMs

• Approaches

386

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

CHARTVIEW SOFTKEYS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

ChartView functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO-1, DP, STAR, APR, WX, NOTAM,
and GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys shown below appear on the Airport Information Page.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey advances to the next level of softkeys: ALL, HEADER, PLAN, PROFILE,
MINIMUMS, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.

EIS

While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
SHW CHRT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

CHRT OPT

CHRT

INFO

STAR

APR

NOTAM

GO BACK

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Pressing the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.

ALL

HEADER

PLAN

PROFILE

MINIMUMS FIT WDTH FULL SCN

BACK

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pressing the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.

Figure 8-21 ChartView SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

387

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.

Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu

Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu

Figure 8-22 Option Menus

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

When no terminal procedure chart is available for the nearest airport or the selected airport, the banner
CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen. The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to
the Jeppesen subscription, but rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a
selected airport.

APPENDICES

Figure 8-23 Chart Not Available Banner

INDEX

If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.

Figure 8-24 Unable To Display Chart Banner

388

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.

EIS

Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.

AFCS

Chart Scale
Select Desired
Approach Chart
From Menu

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Scroll Through
Chart With
the Joystick

APPENDICES
INDEX

Figure 8-25 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

389

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G950 softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the Joystick. Pressing
the Joystick centers the chart on the screen.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within
the boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears
(Figure 8‑29). If the Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The
Aircraft Not Shown Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Pressing the CHRT Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Colorado Springs, CO (KCOS)
Airport Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
ChartView and WPT Airport Information Page

Figure 8-26 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page

390

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram chart when the view is on a terminal
procedure chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram chart, pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey
returns to the Airport Information Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The aircraft position is shown in magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is within
the chart boundaries. In the example shown, the aircraft is turning onto Taxiway Romeo on the Charlotte, NC
(KCLT) airport.

EIS

Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart for certain airports.
This information source is not related to the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected using
the FMS Knob, the G950 softkeys are blank. The Charlotte, NC airport has five additional charts offering
information; the Airport Diagram, Take-off Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates, and
Airline Parking Gate Location. (The numbers in parentheses after the chart name are Jeppesen designators.)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Aircraft
Current
Position

AFCS

Figure 8-27 Airport Information Page, INFO View, Full Screen Width
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

391

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

In the example shown in Figure 8-27, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Charlotte Class B Airspace Chart (Figure 8-28).

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-28 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from INFO View

Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Chart Not
To Scale

INDEX

Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-29 Departure Information Page

392

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Chart Not
To Scale

EIS

Change Range
and Scroll
Through the
Chart With the
Joystick

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Aircraft Not
Shown Icon

Figure 8-30 Arrival Information Page

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

Figure 8-31 Approach Information Page

393

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and includes weather data such as
METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver, when available. Weather information is available only when
an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the XM WX Satellite Weather subscription is current.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

WX Info
When
Available

WX Softkey
Selected

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-32 Weather Information Page

NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Pressing
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When NOTAMS
are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled as shown in Figure 8-32. The
NOTAM Softkey may appear on the Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections.

394

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

NOTAM
Softkey
Appears for
Selected
Airports
Figure 8-33 NOTAM Softkey Highlighted

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Local
NOTAM on
This Airport

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

NOTAM
Softkey
Selected
Figure 8-34 Airport Information Page, Local NOTAMs

INDEX

Pressing the NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page, Nearest Pages, or Flight
Plan Page).
190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

395

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-21).

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Complete
Chart
Shown

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 8-35 Approach Information Page, ALL View

396

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Pressing the HEADER Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS

Approach
Chart
Briefing Strip

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 8-36 Approach Information Page, Header View

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pressing the PLAN Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Approach
Chart Plan
View

APPENDICES
INDEX

Figure 8-37 Approach Information Page, Plan View

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

397

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Pressing the PROFILE Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Approach
Chart Descent
Profile Strip

Figure 8-38 Approach Information Page, Profile View, Full Screen Width

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pressing the MINIMUMS Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of the
approach chart.

INDEX

APPENDICES

Minimum
Descent
Altitude/
Visibility Strip

Figure 8-39 Approach Information Page, Minimums View, Full Screen Width

398

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey
changes the chart size to fit the available screen width.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Press FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
Figure 8-40 Airport Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Pressed

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

399

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
Selecting Additional Information:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the FULL SCN Softkey to display the information windows
(AIRPORT, INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the AIRPORT, INFO, RUNWAYS, or FREQUENCIES Box (INFO Box shown).

EIS

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Available
Information

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Press FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Full
Screen and Chart
with Info Window

Figure 8-41 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
INDEX

Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.

400

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Chart Setup Option

Full Screen On/Off Selection

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-42 Page Menus

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

401

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

DAY/NIGHT VIEW

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the G950 softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-43 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑44).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.

AFCS

5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.

INDEX

APPENDICES

6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.

402

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 8-44 Arrival Information Page, Day View

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 8-45 Arrival Information Page, Night View

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

403

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

CHARTVIEW CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the
cycle expiration date to the disables date. ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no
longer available for viewing. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page displays the current status of the
ChartView database. See the table below for the various ChartView Power-up Page displays and the definition
of each.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

ChartView Database

Figure 8-46 Power-up Page, ChartView Database

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Power-up Page Display

Definition
Blank Line. system is not configured for ChartView. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for ChartView but no chart database is installed.
Contact Jeppesen for a ChartView database.
Normal operation. ChartView database is valid and within current
cycle.
ChartView database is within 1 week after expiration date. A new cycle
is available for update.
ChartView database is beyond 1 week after expiration date, but still
within the 70 day viewing period.
ChartView database has timed out. Database is beyond 70 days after
expiration date. ChartView database is no longer available for viewing.
System time is not available. GPS satellite data is unknown or the
system has not yet locked onto satellites. Check database cycle number
for effectivity.
System is verifying chart database when new cycle is installed for the
first time.
After verifying, chart database is found to be corrupt. ChartView is not
available.

Table 8-2 ChartView Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions

404

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The ChartView time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The database
CYCLE number, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the ChartView subscription appear in either cyan or yellow
text. When the ChartView EXPIRES date is reached, ChartView becomes inoperative 70 days later. This is
shown as the DISABLES date. When the DISABLES date is reached, charts are no longer available for viewing.
The SHW CHRT Softkey label then appears subdued and is disabled until a revised issue of ChartView is
installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.

EIS

Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the ChartView database information is
shown.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The ChartView database cycle number shown in the figure, 1403, is deciphered as follows:
14 – Indicates the year 2014
03 – Indicates the third issue of the ChartView database for the year
The EXPIRES date 17–FEB–14 is the date that this database should be replaced with the next issue.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The DISABLES date 28–APR–14 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

ChartView
Data

APPENDICES

Figure 8-47 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Current and Available

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

The ChartView database is provided directly from Jeppesen. Refer to Updating Jeppesen Databases in
Appendix B for instructions on revising the ChartView database.

405

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The ChartView database is obtained directly from Jeppesen. Refer to Updating Jeppesen Databases in
Appendix B for instructions on revising the ChartView database.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-48. The EXPIRES date, in yellow,
is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that this database
cycle is no longer viewable. CYCLE NOT AVAILABLE in cyan, indicates no ChartView data is available on the
database card or no database card is inserted.

ChartView has Expired, but is not Disabled

ChartView Database is Disabled

ChartView Database is Not Available

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-48 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Database Status

406

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

8.4 FLITECHARTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed
with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. An aircraft symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area
depicted on some charts.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Departure Procedures (DP)

EIS

Figure 8-49 shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, these areas are not shaded on
the published chart. These off-scale areas appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the
depicted geographical position of this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic
position. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is
relative to the chart planview, not to the off-scale area.
The FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Approaches
• Airport Diagrams

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Off-Scale
Areas

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Off-Scale
Area

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Off-Scale
Areas
Off-Scale
Area

INDEX

Figure 8-49 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

407

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

FLITECHARTS SOFTKEYS
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO-1, DP, STAR, APR, WX, and
GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys appear on the Airport Information Page.

EIS

Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: ALL, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

SHW CHRT

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

CHRT OPT

CHRT

INFO-1

INFO-2

AFCS

ALL

STAR

APR

GO BACK

Pressing the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.

FIT WDTH

FULL SCN

BACK

Pressing the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 8-50 FliteCharts SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys

408

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

EIS

3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu

Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu

Figure 8-51 Option Menus

AFCS

When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen.
The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 8-52 Chart Not Available Banner

APPENDICES

If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.

INDEX

Figure 8-53 Unable To Display Chart Banner

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

409

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

EIS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.

AFCS

Chart Not
To Scale

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu

APPENDICES

Pan Chart
With the
Joystick

INDEX

Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-54 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection

410

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G950 softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, and
the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
Pressing the CHRT Softkey alternates between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Charlotte, NC (KCLT) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
FliteCharts and
Navigation Map Page

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 8-55 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

411

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart.
If the displayed chart is the airport diagram, the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey has no effect.

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart (Figure 8-54) or to
the right of the chart (Figure 8-56) for certain airports. This information source is not related to the INFO1 or INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G950 softkeys are blank.
The Charlotte, NC airport has three additional charts offering information; the Airport Diagram, Alternate
Minimums, and Take-off Minimums.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Info Box
Selected

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 8-56 Airport Information Page, INFO View with Airport Information

412

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

In the example shown in Figure 8-56, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Take-off Minimums and Departure Procedures Chart (Figure 8-57).

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 8-57 Airport Information Page, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS Selected from INFO View

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

Figure 8-58 Departure Information Page

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

413

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.

Figure 8-59 Arrival Information Page

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.

INDEX

Figure 8-60 Approach Information Page

414

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data such as METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver. Weather information is available only
when an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the XM WX Satellite Weather subscription is current.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the WX Softkey to display the information windows (AIRPORT,
INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the INFO Box.

EIS

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. When the INFO Box is selected the G950 softkeys are
blank. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT
Key to complete the selection.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Info Available
on This Airport

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

WX Info
When
Available

AFCS

Chart Not
To Scale

Figure 8-61 Weather Information Page, WX Softkey Selected

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Softkeys are
Blank during
Info Box
Selection

WX Softkey
Selected

APPENDICES

Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

415

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-50).

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete chart on the screen.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Complete
Chart
Shown

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 8-62 Airport Information Page, ALL View Selected

416

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the chart at close range is replaced with the full width chart.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Press FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
Figure 8-63 Approach Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

417

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Press FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Chart on
Full Screen and Chart
with Info Window

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 8-64 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window

INDEX

APPENDICES

Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.

418

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Chart Setup Option

Full Screen On/Off Selection

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-65 Page Menus

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

419

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

DAY/NIGHT VIEW

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the G950 softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-66 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑67).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.

AFCS

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.

INDEX

APPENDICES

6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.

420

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 8-67 Approach Information Page, Day View

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 8-68 Approach Information Page, Night View

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

421

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

FLITECHARTS CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the cycle
expiration date to the disables date. FliteCharts is disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no longer
available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page displays
the current status of the FliteCharts database. See the table below for the various FliteCharts Power-up Page
displays and the definition of each.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

FliteCharts Database

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-69 Power-up Page, FliteCharts Database

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Power-up Page Display

Definition
Blank Line. system is not configured for FliteCharts. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for FliteCharts but no chart database is installed.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for the FliteCharts
database
Normal operation. FliteCharts database is valid and within current
cycle.
FliteCharts database is beyond the expiration date, but still within the
180 day viewing period.
FliteCharts database has timed out. Database is beyond 180 days
after expiration date. FliteCharts database is no longer available for
viewing.

APPENDICES

Table 8-3 FliteCharts Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions

Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-70. ‘FliteCharts Expires’ plus a
date in white, indicates the chart database is current. ‘Chart data is out of date!’ in yellow, indicates charts are
still viewable, but approaching the disable date.

INDEX

When the 180 day grace period has expired, ‘Chart data is disabled.’ in yellow indicates that the FliteCharts
database has expired and is no longer viewable. ‘Chart Data: N/A’ appears in white if no FliteCharts data is
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.

422

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FliteCharts time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The FliteCharts
database REGION, CYCLE number, EFFECTIVE, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the subscription appear in
either cyan or yellow text. Dates shown in cyan are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not
within the current subscription period.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

FliteCharts becomes inoperative 180 days after the FliteCharts EXPIRES date is reached, and is no longer
available for viewing. This date is shown as the DISABLES date. After the disable date the SHW CHRT Softkey
label appears subdued and is unavailable until a revised issue of FliteCharts is installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the FliteCharts database information is
shown.
The FliteCharts database cycle number shown in the figure, 1402, is deciphered as follows:
14 – Indicates the year 2014
02 – Indicates the second issue of the FliteCharts database for the year

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The FliteCharts EFFECTIVE date 10–FEB–14 is the first date that this database is current.
The FliteCharts EXPIRES date 10–MAR–14 is the last date that this database is current.
The DISABLES date 06–SEP–14 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

FliteCharts
Data

APPENDICES

Figure 8-70 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Current and Available
INDEX

The FliteCharts database is provided from Garmin. Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for
instructions on revising the FliteCharts database.

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

423

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The other four possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown here. The EFFECTIVE date, in
yellow, indicates the current date preceeds the date the FliteCharts database becomes effective. The EXPIRES
date, in yellow, is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that
this database cycle is no longer viewable. NOT AVAILABLE in cyan, indicate the FliteCharts database is not
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.

FliteCharts Expired, but is not Disabled

FliteCharts Database is Disabled

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Current Date is Before Effective Date

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

FliteCharts Database is Not Available

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 8-71 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Datbase Status

424

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

8.5 AIRPORT DIRECTORY

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory databases
offer detailed information regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more. This information
is viewed on the Airport Information Page by pressing the INFO Softkey until INFO-2 is displayed as shown in
Figure 8-72.
Both Airport Directories are available for downloading at flygarmin.com. However, copy only one of the
databases to the Supplemental Data Card. The system cannot recognize both databases simultaneously.

EIS

Selecting the Airport Directory Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT’ page group.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AIRPORT INFORMATION Page. Initially, information for the airport closest
to the aircraft’s present position is displayed.
3) If necessary, press the INFO softkey until INFO-2 is displayed.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 8-72 AOPA Information on the Airport Information Page

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

425

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

AIRPORT DIRECTORY DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Airport Directory databases are revised every 56 days and offered on a subscription basis. Check fly.
garmin.com for the current database. The Airport Directory is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Airport Directory Database

Figure 8-73 Power-up Page, Airport Directory Database

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Power-up Page Display

Definition
Normal operation. Airport Directory database is valid and within
current cycle.
Airport Directory database has expired.

AFCS

Database card contains no Airport Directory data.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Table 8-4 Airport Directory Annunciation Definitions

426

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

The Airport Directory Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be
found on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-74.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the Airport Directory database information is shown.
The Airport Directory database cycle number shown in the figure, 14D1, is deciphered as follows:
14 – Indicates the year 2014
D – Indicates the data is for Airport Directory
1 – Indicates the first issue of the Airport Directory database for the year

EIS

The Airport Directory EFFECTIVE date 13–JAN–14 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. The
Airport Directory EXPIRES date 10–MAR–14 is the revision date for the next database cycle.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Airport Directory
Data

AFCS

Figure 8-74 AUX – System Status Page, Airport Directory Current Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Airport Directory information appears in cyan and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in cyan when
data is current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in
cyan when data is current and in yellow when expired (Table 8-4). NOT AVAILABLE appears in cyan in the
REGION field if Airport Directory data is not available on the database card. An expired Airport Directory
database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

427

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

8.6 AUXILIARY VIDEO (OPTIONAL)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

There are four modes of operation of the auxiliary video display: Full-Screen, Full-Screen with Digital Zoom,
Split-Screen with Map, and Split-Screen with Map and Digital Zoom.

The G950 system provides a control and display interface to an optional auxiliary video system. The system
can display video for up to two inputs.

Displaying auxiliary video:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX page group.

EIS

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select VIDEO and display the AUX-VIDEO Page.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

ENGINE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The video display softkeys shown below appear on the AUX - VIDEO Page.

CNTRST -

MAP

INPUT

SETUP

VID ZM+

VID ZM-

MAP ACTV HIDE MAP

VID ACTV

CNTRST +

BRIGHT -

BRIGHT +

SAT -

RESET

SAT +

BACK

Pressing the BACK Softkey returns
to the Previous Level Softkeys.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-75 Video Display Softkeys

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Control of the AUX - VIDEO Page can also be accessed through the Page Menu.

Figure 8-76 AUX - VIDEO Page Menu

Selecting video menu options:
INDEX

1) While viewing the AUX - VIDEO Page press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired video adjustment option and press the ENT Key.

Once the ENT key is pressed on any option, the page menu closes and returns to the AUX - VIDEO Page.
428

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

VIDEO SETUP

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Video brightness, contrast, and saturation may be adjusted be selecting the setup function. While viewing
the setup function softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the AUX - VIDEO Page
softkeys.
Adjusting the video settings:
1) With the AUX-VIDEO Page displayed, press the SETUP Softkey.
2) Press the BRIGHT - or BRIGHT +, to adjust display brightness in five percent increments from 0 to 100%.

EIS

3) Press the CNTRST- or CNTRST +, to adjust display contrast in five percent increments from 0 to 100%.
4) Press the SAT - or SAT +, to adjust display saturationin five percent increments from 0 to 100%.
5) If desired, return the display to the default settings by pressing the RESET Softkey.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

6) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the previous softkey level.

DISPLAY SELECTION

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Pressing the HIDE MAP Softkey removes the map and displays video on the full screen. The softkey label
changes to grey with black characters. Pressing the HIDE MAP Softkey again restores the map view and the
small video image. The softkey label returns to white characters on a black background.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Video
Display

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Map
View

APPENDICES

Figure 8-77 AUX - Video Split-Screen

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

429

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

Figure 8-78 Full Screen Video Display

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

INPUT SELECTION
While on the AUX - VIDEO Page, press the INPUT Softkey to select the EVS or AUX video source.

ZOOM/RANGE

AFCS

Pressing the VID ZM + or VID ZM - Softkeys increases or decreases video display magnification between 1x
and 10x.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The RANGE Knob can be used to increase or decrease the range setting on the map display or zoom in and
out on the video display. While in the Split-Screen mode, pressing the MAP ACTV or VID ACTV Softkey
determines which display the RANGE Knob adjusts. Pressing the softkey to display MAP ACTV allows the
RANGE Knob to control the range setting of the map display. Pressing the softkey to display VID ACTV allows
the RANGE Knob to control the zoom setting of the video display.

INDEX

APPENDICES

When zooming in on the video display, a Zoom Window will appear in the upper right of the display. A box
within this window indicates the portion of the display currently being viewed. The currently displayed portion
of the full display may be adjusted by using Joystick.

430

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Zoom
Window

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Current
View

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 8-79 Zoom Window

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

431

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.7 SCHEDULER

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., Change oil, Switch fuel tanks,
or Altimeter-Transponder Check) in the Alerts Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based on
a specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently
whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically reset
to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, all messages are retained until
deleted, and message timer countdown is resumed.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-80 Scheduler (Utility Page)

Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

AFCS

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Alerts Window and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to Type.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the message alert type:

• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time

• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)

• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero

APPENDICES

7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.

INDEX

8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.

432

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MM-YY) and press the ENT Key.
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.

Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.

EIS

2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key while the message line is cleared to clear the message time.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Scheduler messages appear in the Alerts Window on the PFD. When a scheduler message is waiting, the
ALERTS Softkey label changes to ADVISORY. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey opens the Alerts Window and
acknowledges the scheduler message. The softkey label reverts to ALERTS when pressed, the Alerts Window is
removed from the display, and the scheduler message is deleted from the message queue.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 8-81 PFD Alerts Window

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

433

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.8 ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: Garmin is not responsible for the content of checklists. Checklists are created by the aircraft

manufacturer. Modifications or updates to the checklists are coordinated through the aircraft manufacturer.
The user cannot edit these checklists.
The checklist functions, when installed, are displayed on two levels of softkeys that are available on any MFD
page.

EIS

(Optional)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

SYSTEM

MAP

DCLTR

SYSTEM

SHW CHRT CHKLIST

CHECK

EXIT

EMERGCY

The CHECK Softkey label changes to UNCHECK
when the checklist item is already checked.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 8-82 Checklist Softkeys

The system accesses the checklists from an SD card inserted into the bezel slot. If the SD card contains an
invalid checklist file or no checklist, the Power-up Page messages display ‘Checklist File: Invalid’ or ‘Checklist
File: N/A’ (not available) and the CHKLIST Softkey is not available.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Accessing and navigating checklists:
1) From any page on the MFD, press the CHKLIST Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to select the Checklist Page.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘GROUP’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired procedure and press the ENT Key.

AFCS

4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘CHECKLIST’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key. The selected checklist item is
indicated with white text surrounded by a white box.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

6) Press the ENT Key or CHECK Softkey to check the selected checklist item. The line item turns green and a
checkmark is placed in the associated box. The next line item is automatically selected for checking.

Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.

APPENDICES

Press the CLR Key or UNCHECK Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
7) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be checked, ‘*CHECKLIST NOT FINISHED*’ will be
displayed in yellow text.\
8) Press the ENT Key. ‘GO TO NEXT CHECKLIST?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
INDEX

9) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
10) Press the EXIT Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.

434

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Accessing emergency procedures:
1) From any page on the MFD, press the CHKLIST Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to select the Checklist Page.
2) Press the EMERGCY Softkey.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired emergency checklist and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key or CHECK Softkey to check the selected emergency checklist item. The line item turns green
and a checkmark is placed in the box next to it. The next line item is automatically highlighted for checking.
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.

EIS

Press the CLR Key or UNCHECK Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

5) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be checked, ‘*CHECKLIST NOT FINISHED*’ will be
displayed in yellow text.\
6) Press the ENT Key. ‘GO TO NEXT CHECKLIST?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
7) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
8) Press the RETURN Softkey to return to the previous checklist.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

9) Press the EXIT Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

435

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.9 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being logged by the

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

system.
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data card (up
to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each
1GB of available space on the card.

EIS

Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged on a
specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes the date, time, and nearest airport identifier. The
file is created automatically each time the G950 system is powered on, provided an SD card has been inserted.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The status of the Flight Data Logging feature can be viewed on the AUX-UTILITY Page. If no SD card has been
inserted, “NO CARD” is displayed. When data is being written to the SD card, “LOGGING DATA” is displayed.
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
The following is a list of data parameters the G950 system is capable of logging for the Pilatus PC-6 aircraft.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• Date
• Time
• GPS altitude (MSL)
• GPS altitude (WGS84 datum)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• Vertical speed (fpm)
AFCS

• GPS vertical speed (fpm)
• OAT (degrees C)
• True airspeed (knots)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• GPS horizontal alert limit

• Selected course

• Indicated airspeed (kts)

• Pitch Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Roll Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Lateral and Vertical G Force (g)

APPENDICES

• Longitude (degrees; geodetic;
+East)
• HSI source

• Baro Correction (in/Hg)

• GPS fix
• GPS vertical alert limit
• SBAS GPS horizontal protection
level

• Com1/Com2 frequency

• SBAS GPS vertical protection
level

• Nav1/Nav2 frequency

• Fuel Qty (right & left)(gals)

• CDI deflection

• Fuel Flow (gph)

• VDI/GP/GS deflection

• Oil Pressure (psi)

• Wind Direction (degrees)

• Oil Temperature (deg. F)

• Wind Speed (knots)

• ITT (deg. F)

• Active Waypoint Identifier

• Torque

• Distance to next waypoint (nm)

• NP

• Bearing to next waypoint
(degrees)

• NG

• Magnetic variation (degrees)

INDEX

• Ground Track (degrees
magnetic)

• Autopilot On/Off

• Magnetic Heading (degrees)

• Baro-Corrected altitude (feet)

• Ground Speed (kts)

• Latitude (degrees; geodetic;
+North)

436

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

The file containing the recorded data will appear in the format shown in Figure 8-83. This file can be imported
into most computer spreadsheet applications.

Local 24hr Time
HHMMSS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Local Date
YYMMDD

Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
inserted if no
airport is found)

log_140210_104506_KIXD.csv
EIS

Figure 8-83 Log File Format
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Data logging status can be monitored on the AUX-UTILITY Page.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

437

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.10 ABNORMAL OPERATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SVT TROUBLESHOOTING
SVT is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs. SVT is
disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVT data, the
PFD display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
SVT becomes disabled without the following data resources:

EIS

• Attitude data
• Heading data
• GPS position data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• 9 Arc-second Terrain data
• Obstacle data
• Terrain avoidance function is not available, in test mode, or failed

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.

REVERSIONARY MODE

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

SVT can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If it is enabled when switching
to Reversionary Mode, SVT will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVT PFD display will
be shown in the interim.

Figure 8-84 SVT Reversionary Mode

438

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

UNUSUAL ATTITUDES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Unusual attitudes are displayed with red chevrons overlaid on the display indicating the direction to fly to
correct the unusual attitude condition. The display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or
bottom of the screen to represent earth or sky. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during
extreme pitch attitudes.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 8-85 Unusual Attitude Display

The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great enough to completely fill the display.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Blue Band

AFCS

Terrain
Completely
Fills Display

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 8-86 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

439

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

Blank Page

440

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev A

APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: The PC-6 aircraft Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) supersedes information found in this
document.

The G950 Alerting System conveys alerts using the following:

EIS

• Annunciation Window: The Annunciation Window displays abbreviated annunciation text. Text color is
based on alert levels described in the following section. The Annunciation Window is located to the right
of the Altimeter and Vertical Speed Indicator. All aircraft annunciations can be displayed simultaneously
in the Annunciation Window. A white horizontal line separates annunciations that are acknowledged from
annunciations that are not yet acknowledged. Higher priority annunciations are displayed towards the top of
the window.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Alerts Window: The Alerts Window displays text messages for up to 64 prioritized alert messages. Pressing
the ALERTS Softkey displays the Alerts Window. Pressing the ALERTS Softkey a second time removes the
Alerts Window from the display. When the Alerts Window is displayed, the FMS Knob can be used to scroll
through the alert message list.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• Softkey Annunciation: During certain alerts, the ALERTS Softkey may appear as a flashing annunciation
to accompany an alert. The ALERTS Softkey assumes a new label consistent with the alert level (WARNING,
CAUTION, or ADVISORY). By pressing the softkey when flashing an annunciation, the alert is acknowledged.
The softkey label then returns to ALERTS. If alerts are still present, the ALERTS label is displayed in white
with black text. Pressing the ALERTS Softkey a second time views the alert text messages.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• System Annunciations: Typically, a large red ‘X’ appears over instruments whose information is supplied by
a failed Line Replaceable Unit (LRU). See the G950 System Annunciations Section for more information.
System
Annunciation
(Red ‘X’)

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Annunciation
Window

APPENDICES

Alerts Window

INDEX

Softkey
Annunciation
Figure A-1 G950 Alerting System

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

441

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX A
• Audio Alerting System: The G950 System issues audio alert tones when specific system conditions are met.
See the Alert Level Definitions Section for more information. Should the #1 GIA 63W fail, audio and voice
alerts are not generated. The annunciation tone may be tested from the AUX - System Status Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Testing the system annunciation tone:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) Press the ANN TEST Softkey.
Or:

EIS

a) Press the MENU Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

b) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.

AFCS

Select to Test
Annunciation Tone
Figure A-2 System Status Page, Annunciation Tone Testing

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

ALERT LEVEL DEFINITIONS
The G950 Alerting System uses four alert levels.
• WARNING: This level of alert requires immediate attention.

APPENDICES

Warning alert text is shown in red in the Annunciation Window and is accompanied by a continuous
chime and a flashing WARNING Softkey annunciation (see Figure A-3). Pressing the WARNING Softkey
acknowledges the presence of the warning alert and stops the aural chime.
Warning voice alerts repeat continuously until acknowledged by pressing the WARNING Softkey.

INDEX

• CAUTION: This level of alert indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may require
intervention.

442

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Caution alert text is shown in yellow in the Annunciation Window and is accompanied by a single chime and
a flashing CAUTION Softkey annunciation (see Figure A-3). Pressing the CAUTION Softkey acknowledges
the presence of the caution alert.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Caution voice alerts repeat three times or until acknowledged by pressing the CAUTION Softkey.
• ANNUNCIATION OR MESSAGE ADVISORY: This level of alert provides general information.
Annunciation alert text is shown in white in the Annunciation Window; no aural tone is generated. An
annunciation alert is accompanied by a flashing ADVISORY Softkey annunciation (see Figure A-3). Pressing
the ADVISORY Softkey acknowledges the presence of the annunciation alert.

EIS

Message advisory alerts do not issue annunciations in the Annunciation Window. Instead, message advisory
alerts only issue a flashing ADVISORY Softkey annunciation (see Figure A-3). Pressing the ADVISORY
Softkey acknowledges the presence of the message advisory alert and displays the alert text message in the
Alerts Window.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Message advisory voice alerts generated when the message advisory is issued do not repeat.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure A-3 Softkey Annunciation (ALERTS Softkey Labels)

• SAFE OPERATING ANNUNCIATIONS: This level of alert provides general information about conditions
which are safe for operation.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Safe operating annunciation alert text is shown in green in the Annunciation Window; no aural tone is
generated. It is accompanied by a flashing ADVISORY Softkey annunciation (see Figure A-3). Pressing the
ADVISORY Softkey acknowledges the presence of the alert.

AIRCRAFT ALERTS

AFCS

The following alerts are configured specifically for the the PC-6 aircraft. See the Pilot’s Operating Handbook
(POH) for information regarding pilot responses.

WARNING ALERTS
Audio Alert
Repeating Tone
“Stall” (repeating)
“Trim” (repeating)

APPENDICES

Alerts Window Message
Low voltage on the battery bus.
Low voltage on the generator bus.
Prop low pitch condition exists.
Aircraft stall condition exists.
Trim not in take-off configuration.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Annunciation Window Text
BATT LOW VOLT
GEN LOW VOLT
PROP LOW PITCH
STALL
TRIM

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

443

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX A
CAUTION ALERTS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Annunciation Window Text
BATT HOT
BATT HOT
BATT LIMIT
CHIP DETECT
F FILTER BLOCK
FUEL PRESS LOW
GEN FAIL
L FUEL FLOW
R FUEL FLOW
L FUEL LOW
R FUEL LOW
OXY PRESS LOW

Alerts Window Message
Battery temp monitor mantenance.
Battery temp outside normal op limits.
Electrical load reduction recommended.
Engine oil contamination detected.
Fuel filter is blocked.
Fuel pressure is low.
Generator has failed.
Left external fuel transfer pump inactive.
Right external fuel transfer pump inactive.
Left fuel tank is low.
Right fuel tank is low.
Oxygen pressure is low.

Audio Alert

Single Chime

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

SAFE OPERATING ANNUNCIATIONS

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Annunciation Window Text
AUX F PUMP ON
ANTI ICE ON
BATT DISCHARGE
EXT POWER ON
LDG LIGHT ON
L F PUMP ON
R F PUMP ON
PROP DEICE ON
TOW ACTIVE

Alerts Window Message
Auxiliary fuel pump is active.
Anti ice system on.
Alternate power source/Battery in use.
Aircraft using external power.
Landing light is on.
Left external fuel transfer pump is active.
Right external fuel transfer pump is active.
Prop deice is on.
Tow cable attached.

Audio Alert

None

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

MESSAGE ADVISORY ALERTS
Audio Alert
None
None

INDEX

APPENDICES

Alerts Window Message
PFD FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the PFD is inoperative.
MFD FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the MFD is inoperative.

444

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

G950 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
NOTE: Upon power-up, certain windows remain invalid as G950 equipment begins to initialize. All windows

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window continues to remain flagged, the
G950 System should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed on windows associated with the
failed data (refer to Figure A-4 for all possible flags and the responsible LRUs). Refer to the Pilot’s Operating
Handbook (POH) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

GDC 74A Air
Data Computer

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

GRS 77 AHRS
OR
GMU 44
Magnetometer

GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
OR
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Unit

Figure A-4 G950 System Failure Annunciations

GTX 33 Transponder
OR
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74A Air
Data Computer

EIS

GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units

AFCS

The status of detected LRUs can be checked on the AUX - System Status Page (Figure A-2). Active LRUs
are indicated by green check marks; failed, by red ‘X’s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or
Garmin-authorized dealer informed.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Viewing LRU information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘LRU Info’ Box,

APPENDICES

a) Press the LRU Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) With ‘Select LRU Window’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view LRU status information.

445

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX A
System Annunciation

Comment

System Annunciation

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Attitude and Heading
Reference System is aligning.

Comment

Display system is not receiving
vertical speed input from the
air data computer.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Display system is not receiving
attitude information from the
AHRS.
Display system is not receiving
altitude input from the air data
computer.

AHRS calibration incomplete or
configuration module failure.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

This annunciation is only seen
when the autopilot is engaged.
The annunciation indicates an
AHRS monitor has detected
an abnormal flight parameter,
possibly caused by strong
turbulence. In this case, the
situation should correct itself
within a few seconds. If there
is an actual failure, a red “X”
soon appears over the Attitude
Indicator.
GPS information is either
not present or is invalid for
navigation use. Note that
AHRS utilizes GPS inputs
during normal operation.
AHRS operation may be
degraded if GPS signals are not
present (see POH).

Other Various Red X
Indications

INDEX

Display system is not receiving
airspeed input from air data
computer.

Display system is not receiving
valid heading input from AHRS.
System is not receiving valid
heading input from GMU, but
is receiving GPS-derived track
information.
Display system is not receiving
valid true airspeed information
from air data computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid OAT information from air
data computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid transponder information.
Different versions of GDU
software are installed in the
PFD and MFD. This can also
indicate different versions
of the navigation database
installed in the PFD and MFD.
A cross-talk error between the
PFD and MFD will also cause
this annunciation.
A red ‘X’ through any other
display field (such as engine
instrumentation fields)
indicates that the field is not
receiving valid data.

Table A-1 G950 System Annunciations

446

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

G950 SYSTEM MESSAGE ADVISORIES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

This section describes various G950 system message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU
or an LRU function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red ‘X’ annunciation
as shown previously in the G950 System Annunciation section.
NOTE: This Section provides information regarding G950 message advisories that may be displayed by the

system. Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities must
be considered when responding to a message. Always use sound pilot judgment. The Pilot’s Operating
Handbook (POH) takes precedence over any conflicting guidance found in this section.

EIS

MFD & PFD MESSAGE ADVISORIES

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The PFD and/or MFD self-test has detected a problem. The G950 system should be
serviced.

The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The G950 system should be
serviced.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The PFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The G950
system should be serviced.
The MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
G950 system should be serviced.
The MFD and PFD have different software versions installed. The G950 system should
be serviced.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The PFD and/or MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming
the display. If problem persists, the G950 system should be serviced.

APPENDICES

A key is stuck on the PFD and/or MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing
it several times. The G950 system should be serviced if the problem persists.
The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed. The G950 system should
be serviced.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Comments
The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings. The
pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFD with preferred settings, if desired.
The MFD and PFD are not communicating with each other. The G950 system should
be serviced.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Message
DATA LOST – Pilot stored data was
lost. Recheck settings.
XTALK ERROR – A flight display
crosstalk error has occurred.
PFD1 SERVICE – PFD1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
MANIFEST – PFD1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
MANIFEST – MFD1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
SW MISMATCH – GDU software
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
PFD1 KEYSTK – PFD1 [keyname] Key
is stuck.
MFD1 KEYSTK – MFD [keyname] Key
is stuck.
CNFG MODULE – PFD1 configuration
module is inoperative.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage.

The PFD1 voltage is low. The G950 system should be serviced.
The MFD voltage is low. The G950 system should be serviced.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

447

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX A
DATABASE MESSAGE ADVISORIES

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Message
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 navigation
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 navigation
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 basemap
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 basemap
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 airport terrain
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 airport terrain
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 airport terrain
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 airport terrain
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.

INDEX

MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Airport
Directory database error exists.

448

Comments
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the navigation database. Attempt to reload
the navigation database. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.

The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the basemap database.

The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the
terrain card is properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists,
the system should be serviced.

The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.

The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the obstacle database. Ensure that the data
card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.

The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.

The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the airport terrain database. Ensure that
the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The airport terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified
LRU.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database. Ensure that the
data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the Airport Directory database. Ensure that the data
card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Comments
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in more than one database. If problem
persists, the system should be serviced.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Message
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 multiple
database errors exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 multiple
database errors exists.
DB MISMATCH – Navigation
database mismatch. Xtalk is off.

EIS

The PFD and MFD have different navigation database versions or regions installed.
Crossfill is off. Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions.
Also, check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function
not completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Standby Navigation The PFD and MFD have different standby navigation database versions or regions
database mismatch.
installed. Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions.
Also, check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function
not completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database
The PFD and MFD have different terrain database versions or regions installed. Check
mismatch.
the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions. Also, check the AUXSYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function not completed. After
synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle database The PFD and MFD have different obstacle database versions or regions installed.
mismatch.
Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions. Also,
check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function not
completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Airport Terrain
The PFD and MFD have different airport terrain database versions or regions installed.
database mismatch.
Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions. Also,
check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function not
completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
NAV DB UPDATED – Active
System has updated the active navigation database from the standby navigation
navigation database updated.
database.
TERRAIN DSP – [PFD1 or MFD1]
One of the terrain, airport terrain, or obstacle databases required for TAWS in the PFD
Terrain awareness display unavailable. or MFD is missing or invalid.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

GMA 347 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Comments
The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable. The
G950 system should be serviced.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 configuration The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory.
error. Config service req’d.
The G950 system should be serviced.
MANIFEST – GMA1 software
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The G950 system should be
mismatch. Communication halted.
serviced.
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs
The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio functions
service. Return unit for repair.
may still be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The G950 system
should be serviced when possible.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Message
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is inoperative.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

449

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX A
GIA 63W MESSAGE ADVISORIES

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Message
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 temperature
too low.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 temperature
too low.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over
temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over
temperature.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA1 communication
halted.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA2 communication
halted.
MANIFEST – GIA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GIA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk key
is stuck.

450

Comments
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.

The GIA1 and/or GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The system should be
serviced.

The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
warm up to operating temperature.

The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the system should
be serviced.

The GIA1 and/or GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The system should
be serviced.

A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is SBAS capable.

The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1 and/or COM2. The
transmitter operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2. COM1 and/or COM2 may
still be usable. The system should be serviced when possible.
The COM1 and/or COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or
“pressed”) position. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX A

The COM1 and/or COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
position. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem
persists, the system should be serviced.
The COM1 and/or COM2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The G950 system should be serviced.

EIS

GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight.
Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellites.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
Vertical guidance generated by SBAS is unavailable, use LNAV only minimums.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Displayed after passing the first waypoint of a true north approach when the nav angle is
set to ‘AUTO’.

A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The system should be serviced.

AFCS

A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The system should be serviced.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The remote NAV1 and/or NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
state. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists,
the system should be serviced.

APPENDICES

A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The system
should be serviced.

G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative.

A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The receiver
may still be available. The system should be serviced when possible.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Comments

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative.

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Message
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
COM1 CONFIG – COM1 config error.
Config service req’d.
COM2 CONFIG – COM2 config error.
Config service req’d.
LOI – GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck
with other NAVS.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Insufficient satellites.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Position error.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. GPS fail.
ABORT APR – Loss of GPS navigation.
Abort approach.
APR DWNGRADE – Approach
downgraded.
TRUE APR – True north approach.
Change HDG refereence to TRUE.
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote
transfer key is stuck.

451

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX A
GEA 71 MESSAGE ADVISORIES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Message
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GEA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.

Comments
The GEA1 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The G950 system should be serviced.
The #1 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The G950 system should be serviced.

GTX 33/GTX 33 ES (OPTIONAL) MESSAGE ADVISORIES

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Message
XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GTX1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
XPDR1 SRVC – XPDR1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
XPDR1 FAIL – XPDR1 is inoperative.

Comments
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The G950 system should be serviced.
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The G950 system should be
serviced.
The #1 transponder should be serviced when possible.
There is no communication with the #1 transponder.

GRS 77 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Comments
The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The G950 system should
be serviced.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using backup
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The G950
GPS source.
system should be serviced when possible.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
any GPS information.
limitations. The G950 system should be serviced.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The G950 system should be
backup GPS information.
serviced.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 operating
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The G950 system should be
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
serviced.
AHRS1 SRVC – AHRS1 Magnetic-field The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
model needs update.
when practical.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too far North/ The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading is
South, no magnetic compass.
flagged as invalid.
MANIFEST – GRS1 software
The #1 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The G950 system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Message
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving
airspeed.

GMU 44 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
INDEX

Message
HDG FAULT – AHRS1 magnetometer
fault has occurred.
MANIFEST – GMU1 software
mismatch, communication halted.

452

Comments
A fault has occurred in the #1 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
GPS for backup mode operation. The G950 system should be serviced.
The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The G950 system should be serviced.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

GDC 74A MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Comments
GDC1 is reporting that the altitude error correction is unavailable.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Message
ADC1 ALT EC – ADC1 altitude error
correction is unavailable.
ADC1 AS EC – ADC1 airspeed error
correction is unavailable.
MANIFEST – GDC1 software
mismatch, communication halted.

GDC1 is reporting that the airspeed error correction is unavailable.
The GDC 74A has incorrect software installed. The G950 system should be serviced.

Comments
The GTS and GDU have different copies of the GTS configuration, or the Mode S
address is invalid. The system should be serviced.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Message Advisory
GTS CONFIG – GTS Config error.
Config service req'd.
MANIFEST – GTS software mismatch,
communication halted.

EIS

GTS 870 TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM (IF INSTALLED)

The GTS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.

GWX 68/70 MESSAGE ADVISORIES (OPTIONAL)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Message
GWX CONFIG – GWX config error.
Config service req’d.
GWX FAIL – GWX is inoperative.

A failure has been detected in the GWX 68/70. The GWX 68/70 may still be usable.
The GWX 68/70 indicates severe weather within ±10 degrees of the aircraft heading
at a range of 80 to 320 nm.
The GWX 68/70 has incorrect software installed. The G950 system should be
serviced.

AFCS

GWX SERVICE – Needs service.
Return unit for repair.
WX ALERT – Possible severe weather
ahead.
MANIFEST – GWX software
mismatch, communication halted.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Comments
GWX 68/70 configuration settings do not match those of the GDU configuration. The
G950 system should be serviced.
The GDU is not recieving status packet from the GWX 68/70 or the GWX 68/70 is
reporting a fault. The GWX 68/70 radar system should be serviced.

MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGE ADVISORIES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Message
Comments
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan waypoint Upon power-up, the system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is locked. This
is locked.
occurs when an navigation database update eliminates an obsolete waypoint. The
flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message. This can also
occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted.
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database,
Or
Update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

453

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX A

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has expired.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
Verify user modified procedures.

EIS

Message
FPL WPT MOVE – Flight plan
waypoint moved.

DB CHANGE – Database changed.
Verify stored airways.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been
truncated.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

LOCKED FPL – Cannot navigate
locked flight plan.

Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace within
10 minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active. Activate
approach when required.
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate NAV
receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the CDI to
the correct NAV receiver.
Bad parallel track geometry.
Invalid leg type for parallel offset.
IAF waypoint for parallel offset has been passed.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at waypoint
-[xxxx]
STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead.
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead less
than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less
than 2 nm.
APPR INACTV – Approach is not
active.
SLCT FREQ – Select appropriate
frequency for approach.
SLCT NAV – Select NAV on CDI for
approach.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
bad geometry.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
invalid leg type.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
past IAF.

Comments
The system has detected that a waypoint coordinate has changed due to a new
navigation database update. Verify that stored flight plans contain correct waypoint
locations.
The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent
with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after an navigation database
update. Verify that the user-modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and
up to date.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent
with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after an navigation database
update. Verify use of airways in stored flight plans and reload airways as needed.
This occurs when a newly installed navigation database eliminates an obsolete
approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed
from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains
locked waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan with
current waypoint.

454

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Message
Comments
UNABLE V WPT – Can’t reach current The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum flight path
vertical waypoint.
angle and vertical speed constraints. The system automatically transitions to the next
vertical waypoint.
VNV – Unavailable. Unsupported leg The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn, vector, or other unsupported leg
type in flight plan.
type prior to the active vertical waypoint. This prevents vertical guidance to the active
vertical waypoint.
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive
The current crosstrack exceeds the limit, causing vertical deviation to go invalid.
crosstrack error.
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive track
The current track angle error exceeds the limit, causing the vertical deviation to go
angle error.
invalid.
VNV – Unavailable. Parallel course
A parallel course has been selected, causing the vertical deviation to go invalid.
selected.
NON WGS84 WPT – Do not use GPS The position of the selected waypoint [xxxx] is not calculated based on the WGS84
navigation to [xxxx].
map reference datum and may be positioned in error as displayed. Do not use GPS to
navigate to the selected non-WGS84 waypoint.
TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic device has
The system is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The traffic device
failed.
should be serviced.
FAILED PATH – A data path has failed. A data path connected to the GDU or the GIA 63/W has failed.
MAG VAR WARN – Large magnetic
The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for
variance. Verify all course angles.
geographic locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic course angles may
differ from the actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.
SCHEDULER [#] – .
Message criteria entered by the user.
CHECK CRS – Database course for
Selected course for LOC1 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
LOC1 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
degrees.
CHECK CRS – Database course for
Selected course for LOC2 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
LOC2 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
degrees.
[PFD1, or MFD1] CARD 1 REM –
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the PFD or MFD. The SD card
Card 1 was removed. Reinsert card.
needs to be reinserted.
[PFD1, or MFD1] CARD 2 REM –
The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the PFD or MFD. The SD card
Card 2 was removed. Reinsert card.
needs to be reinserted.
[PFD1, or MFD1] CARD 1 ERR – Card
The SD card in the top card slot of the PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
1 is invalid.
[PFD1, or MFD1] CARD 2 ERR – Card
The SD card in the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
2 is invalid.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

455

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX A

FLIGHT PLAN IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
In some circumstances, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Flight Plan Import/Export Results
‘Flight plan successfully imported.’
‘File contained user waypoints only. User
waypoints imported successfully. No stored
flight plan data was modified.’
‘No flight plan files found to import.’
‘Flight plan import failed.’
‘Flight plan partially imported.’

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

‘File contained user waypoints only.’
‘Too many points. Flight plan truncated.’

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

‘Some waypoints not loaded. Waypoints
locked.’

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

‘User waypoint database full. Not all loaded.’

‘One or more user waypoints renamed.’

AFCS

‘Flight plan successfully exported.’
‘Flight plan export failed.’

Description
A flight plan file stored on the SD card was successfully imported as a stored flight plan.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. These
waypoints have been saved to the system user waypoints. No flight plans stored in the
system have been modified.
The SD card contains no flight plan data.
Flight plan data was not successfully imported from the SD card.
Some flight plan waypoints were successfully imported from the SD card, however others
had errors and were not imported. A partial stored flight plan now exists in the system.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. One or
more of these waypoints did not import successfully.
The flight plan on the SD card contains more waypoints than the system can support. The
flight plan was imported with as many waypoints as possible.
The flight plan on the SD card contains one or more waypoints that the system cannot find
in the navigation database. The flight plan has been imported, but must be edited within
the system before it can be activated for use.
The flight plan file on the SD card contains user waypoints. The quantity of stored user
waypoints has exceeded system capacity, therefore not all the user waypoints on the SD
card have been imported. Any flight plan user waypoints that were not imported are
locked in the flight plan. The flight plan must be edited within the system before it can be
activated for use.
One or more imported user waypoints were renamed when imported due to naming
conflicts with waypoints already existing in the system.
The stored flight plan was successfully exported to the SD card.
The stored flight plan was not successfully exported to the SD card. The SD card may not
have sufficient available memory or the card may have been removed prematurely.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

PILOT PROFILE IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES

INDEX

APPENDICES

Pilot Profile Import/Export Results
‘No pilot profile plan files found to
import.’
‘Overwrite existing profile?’
‘Profile name invalid. Enter a different
profile name.’
‘All available pilot profiles in use. Delete a
profile before importing another.’
‘Pilot profile import failed.’
‘Pilot profile import succeeded.’
‘Overwrite existing file?’
‘Pilot profile export failed.’
‘Pilot profile export succeeded.’

456

Description
Displayed if the SD card does not have one or more valid pilot profile filenames.
Displayed if the profile name matches the name of existing profile.
Displayed if the profile name is invalid.
Displayed if the maximum number for pilot profiles has been reached.
Displayed if the importing operation fails for any other reason.
Displayed if the importing operation succeeds.
Displayed if the filename matches the name of an existing file on the SD card.
Displayed if the export operation fails.
Displayed if the export operation succeeds.

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

TERRAIN-SVT ALERTS

TERRAIN

WARNING TERRAIN

“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”

Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)

TERRAIN

WARNING TERRAIN

“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”

Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)

TERRAIN

WARNING OBSTACLE

“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”

Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)

TERRAIN

WARNING OBSTACLE

“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”

Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)

TERRAIN

CAUTION-TERRAIN

“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”

Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)

TERRAIN

CAUTION-TERRAIN

“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”

Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)

TERRAIN

CAUTION-OBSTACLE

“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”

Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)

TERRAIN

CAUTION-OBSTACLE

“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Aural Message

EIS

MFD Pop-Up Alert (except
Terrain-SVT Page

Alert Type

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation

* Annunciation is shown on the Terrain-SVT Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.

TERRAIN-SVT SYSTEM STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS

None

“Terrain System Test OK”

Terrain Alerting Inhibited

TER INH

None

No GPS position

TER N/A

NO GPS POSITION

“Terrain System Not Available”†

TER N/A

None

“Terrain System Not Available”†

TER FAIL

TERRAIN FAIL

“Terrain System Failure”

None

TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE

None

System Test pass

Excessively degraded GPS signal; or
Out of database coverage area
Terrain System Test Fail;
Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid;
Invalid software configuration; or
System audio fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, TerrainSVT operating with PFD Terrain or
Obstacle databases

INDEX

TERRAIN TEST

APPENDICES

TER TEST

System Test in progress

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Aural Message

AFCS

Terrain-SVS Page Center
Banner Annunciation

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation

Alert Type

* Annunciation is shown on the Terrain-SVT Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
† “Terrain System Available” (in-flight only) when sufficient GPS signal received, or terrain database coverage re-entered.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

457

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX A

TAWS-B ALERTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Annunciations appear on the PFD and the MFD. Pop-up alerts appear only on the MFD.
Alert Type

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Excessive Descent Rate Warning (EDR)

PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation

MFD Pop-Up Alert (except
TAWS-B Page)

Aural Message

PULL UP

PULL-UP

“Pull Up”

TERRAIN-PULL-UP

“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”

Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)

PULL UP

Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)

PULL UP

TERRAIN AHEAD-PULL-UP
TERRAIN AHEAD-PULL-UP
or

TERRAIN-PULL-UP

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)

PULL UP

Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)

TERRAIN

Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)

TERRAIN

Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)

TERRAIN

Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)

TERRAIN

OBSTACLE AHEAD-PULL-UP

“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”

OBSTACLE AHEAD-PULL-UP “Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or

OBSTACLE-PULL-UP
CAUTION-TERRAIN
or

TERRAIN AHEAD
TERRAIN AHEAD
or

CAUTION-TERRAIN
CAUTION-OBSTACLE
or

OBSTACLE AHEAD
OBSTACLE AHEAD

or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”

CAUTION-OBSTACLE

“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”

TERRAIN

TOO LOW-TERRAIN

“Too Low, Terrain”

None

“Five-Hundred”

Excessive Descent Rate Caution (EDR)

TERRAIN

SINK RATE

“Sink Rate”

TERRAIN

DON’T SINK

Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR)

“Don’t Sink”
or
“Too Low, Terrain”

Premature Descent Alert Caution (PDA)
Altitude Callout “500”

INDEX

PULL UP

OBSTACLE-PULL-UP

“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”

TOO LOW-TERRAIN

* Annunciation is shown on the TAWS-B Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.

458

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

TAWS-B SYSTEM STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS

TAWS TEST

None

“TAWS System Test OK”

TAWS-B FLTA Alerting Inhibited

TAWS INH

None

No GPS position

TAWS N/A

NO GPS POSITION

“TAWS Not Available”†

TAWS N/A

None

“TAWS Not Available”†

TAWS FAIL

“TAWS System Failure”

None

TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE

None

System Test pass

Excessively degraded GPS signal; or
Out of database coverage area
TAWS-B System Test Fail;
Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid;
Invalid software configuration; or
System audio fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, TAWS-B
operating with PFD Terrain or
Obstacle databases

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

TAWS TEST

System Test in progress

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Aural Message

EIS

TAWS-B Page Center Banner
Annunciation

Alert Type

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

* Annunciation is shown on the TAWS-B Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
† “TAWS Available” (in-flight only) when sufficient GPS signal received, or terrain database coverage re-entered.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

459

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX A

VOICE ALERTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Voice alerts are provided to the G950 by the #1 GIA 63W; should this unit fail, audio and voice alerts are not
generated.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Voice Alert
“Minimums, minimums”
“Vertical track”
“TIS Not Available”
“TAS System Test OK”
“TAS System Test Fail”
“Traffic”
“Traffic, Traffic”

Alert Trigger
Aircraft is transitioning through the minimum descent altitude/decision height (MDA/DH)
Aircraft is one minute from Top of Descent (issued only when vertical navigation is enabled)
TIS system has failed or cannot communicate
Played when the optional KTA 870 passes a pilot-initiated self test.
Played when the optional KTA 870 fails a pilot-initiated self test.
Traffic Advisory (TA) issued by the TIS system.
Also when additional TAs are issued by the optional KTA 870 system.
Played when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued with the optional KTA 870 TAS system.
Additional TAs
Table A-2 Voice Alerts

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The gender of the voice used to announce audio alerts may be set to male or female on the System Setup Page.
See the Appendices for voice alerts.
Changing the audio alert voice:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the voice in the Audio Alert Box.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and highlight the desired voice and press the ENT Key.

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure A-5 System Setup Page, Alert Voice Settings

460

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

DATABASE MANAGEMENT
CAUTION: Never disconnect power to the system when loading a database. Power interuption during the

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

database loading process could result in maintenance being required to reboot the system.
The system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store various types of data. For basic flight operations, SD
cards are required for database storage as well as navigation databasw updates. Not all SD cards are compatible
with the system. Use only SD cards supplied by Garmin or the aircraft manufacturer.

EIS

CAUTION: When downloading updates to the Navigation Database, copy the data to an SD card other than

a Garmin Supplemental Data Card. Otherwise, data corruption can occur.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

NOTE: When loading database updates, the ‘DB Mismatch’ message will be displayed until database

synchronization is complete, followed by turning system power off, then on. Synchronization can be
monitored on the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page.
NOTE: Loading a database in the system prior to its effective date will result in the expiration date on the

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

power-up screen and the effective date on the AUX-System Status Page being displayed in yellow.
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent avionics of the

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory guidance and information
related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System.

AFCS

• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen are assured compliance with all data quality requirements (DQRs) by virtue
of a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the FAA. A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each database
and can be viewed at http://fly.garmin.com by selecting ‘Type 2 LOA Status.’

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for compliance with
established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures
that may be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established
AFM(S) and regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusion list as discussed

APPENDICES

impact on the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed at www.flygarmin.com by
selecting ‘Aviation Database Alerts.’

INDEX

NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product Support to

coordinate the revised DQRs.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

461

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX B

NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NAVIGATION DATABASES

EIS

The navigation database is updated on a 28-day cycle. The navigation database must be installed from the
Jeppesen or user supplied SD data card. Contact Jeppesen (www.jeppesen.com) for subscription and update
information.
NOTE: After the navigation database is installed, the card may be removed.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Updating the active navigation database (not using the Dual Navigation Database or Automatic
Database Synchronization Features):
1) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the new navigation database version into the top card slot of the
display (PFD or MFD) to be updated (label of SD card facing left).

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

2) Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to the following is displayed in the upper left corner of the display:

AFCS

Figure B-1 Standby Navigation Database Prompt

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Press the NO Softkey to proceed to loading the active database.
4) A prompt similar to the following is displayed, press the YES Softkey to update the active navigation database.

Figure B-2 Database Update Confirmation

462

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

5) After the update completes, the display starts in normal mode. Do not remove power while the display is
starting.
6) Turn the system OFF and remove the SD card from the top card slot.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

7) Repeat steps 1 through 6 for the other display (PFD or MFD). Remove the SD card when finished.
8) Apply power to the system and press the ENT Key to acknowledge the startup screen.
9) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
10) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.

EIS

11) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show active navigation database information for each display (MFD1
DB, PFD1 DB). Verify the correct active navigation database cycle information is shown for each display.

DUAL NAVIGATION DATABASE FEATURE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The dual navigation database feature allows each display to store an upcoming navigation database on the
bottom SD card so that the system can automatically load it to replace the active database when the new
database becomes effective (the next cycle becomes available seven days prior to its effective date).

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

If a navigation database loader card is inserted into the top SD card slot of a display, and an SD card is in the
bottom slot, the system will prompt the user (upon on-ground power up) as to whether the database should
be stored on the bottom SD card as the standby database. If the user responds affirmatively, the system will
copy the navigation database from the top SD card to the bottom SD card. As long as the bottom SD card
remains in the card slot, this standby navigation database will be available for the system to use as the active
database as soon as it becomes effective.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The system checks the active and standby databases upon (on-ground only) power-up. If the standby
database is current and the active database is out of date, the display will upload the standby database into the
active internal database location. Uploading the standby database to the active location takes approximately
45-55 seconds. The pilot is alerted that the update is complete by a system alert message, ‘NAV DB UPDATED’.

AFCS

In some situations, such as an overnight flight in which departure date is prior to the effective date
of the standby database and arrival date is after the effective date, it may be desired to force the loaded
standby database into active service earlier than the system would otherwise make the change. This can be
accomplished by selecting the STBY DB Softkey on the AUX-System Status Page. Turn system power off,
then on to complete the database change.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Loading a standby navigation database:
1) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the new navigation database version into the top card slot
of the MFD.

APPENDICES

2) Verify that an SD card is inserted in the bottom slot of the PFD and the MFD.
3) Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to the following is displayed.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

463

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX B

Figure B-3 Standby Navigation Database Prompt
EIS

4) Press the YES Softkey. The navigation database is copied to the SD card in the bottom card slot of the MFD.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

5) After the navigation database files are copied to the bottom SD card, the display will appear as shown in Figure
B-4.

AFCS

Figure B-4 Standby Navigation Database Update Complete

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

6) As instructed on the display, press any key to continue. The display will now appear as shown in Figure B-5.

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure B-5 Navigation Database Verification Prompt

464

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

7) Press any key to continue. The display will now appear as shown in Figure B-6.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS

Figure B-6 Active Navigation Database Prompt

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

8) Press the NO Softkey. The display now starts in normal mode. Since the database effective date is not yet valid,
it should not be loaded as the active database. The display now starts in normal mode. Do not remove power
while the display is starting.
9) Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the startup screen.
10) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

11) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
12) The new database is copied to the SD card in the bottom card slot of the PFD. Progress can be monitored in the
SYNC STATUS field. When copying is finished, ‘Complete’ is displayed.
13) Turn system power OFF.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

14) Remove the SD card from the top card slot of the MFD.
15) Turn system power ON.
16) Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the startup screen.
17) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.

AFCS

18) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

19) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show standby navigation database information for each display
(MFD1 DB, PFD1 DB). Verify the correct standby navigation database cycle information is shown for each
display.
NOTE: The system compares the active databases on the PFD and the MFD, and displays a system alert

message ‘DB Mismatch’ if they are not identical. Similarly, if the standby databases on the PFD and the MFD
are not identical, the system will display a ‘DB Mismatch’ alert for the standby navigation databases.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

465

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX B

GARMIN DATABASES
The following databases are stored on Supplemental Data Cards provided by Garmin:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• Expanded basemap
• Terrain
• Airport Terrain

• SafeTaxi
• Airport Directory
• Obstacle

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

After subscribing to the desired database product, these database products will be downloaded and ultimately
stored on two Supplemental Data Cards. Each Supplemental Data Card resides in the bottom card of each
display as shown in Figure B-7. These cards must not be removed except to update the databases stored on
each card.

PFD

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

MFD

Figure B-7 Correct Database Locations
AFCS

Since these databases are not stored internally in the displays, a Supplemental Data Card containing identical
database versions must be kept in each display unit.
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and towns.
It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is no expiration date.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The terrain database contains the terrain mapping data. These databases are updated periodically and have
no expiration date.

APPENDICES

The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft.
Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all
obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is
updated on a 56-day cycle.
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin

INDEX

accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of
the data.

466

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the U.S. or
worldwide, respectively. The AOPA Directory offers detailed information for over 5,300 U. S. airports, along
with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs. These databases are updated every 56 days. The
AC-U-KWIK Directory offers detailed information for more than 8,000 airports with runways longer than 3,000
feet worldwide.
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following
ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways,
ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.

AUTOMATIC DATABASE SYNCHRONIZATION FEATURE
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The automatic database synchronization feature automatically transfers the database from a single
SD database card to the SD cards on the PFD and the MFD to ensure that all databases are synchronized
throughout the system. After power-up, the system compares all copies of each applicable database. If similar
databases do not match, the most recent valid database is automatically copied to each card in the system that
does not already contain that database.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The following databases are checked and synchronized: Basemap, Safetaxi, Airport Terrain, Obstacle, Airport
Directory (AOPA or AC-U-KWIK), and Terrain. This feature applies only to databases that are stored on the
SD card that resides in the bottom slot of each display. This feature does not apply to the navigation database
which is stored internally in each display. The typical procedure would be to download new databases to the
MFD card, then synchronize the data to the PFD.
NOTE: The 9-arc second terrain database may take as long as 100 minutes to synchronize using this method.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Therefore the user may want to transfer the data using a PC, or connect the system to a ground power
source while performing the database synchronization.

AFCS

The synchronization progress may be monitored on the AUX-System Status Page in the Sync Status section
of the Database Window (Figure B-8). This section shows the synchronization status of each applicable
database, including the percent complete, time remaining, and to which displays the databases are being
copied. When the synchronization is complete, the status is listed as ‘Complete’, followed by the displays to
which the databases were copied. This sub-section is only present when a sync is occurring or has occurred
on the current power-up.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

An indication of ‘Complete’ still requires a power cycle before the synchronized databases will be used by
the system.

APPENDICES
INDEX

Figure B-8 AUX-System Status Page, Database Window

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

467

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX B

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Display Database Softkey (Figure B-11) is used to place the cursor in the Database Window. Upon
first press of the Display Database Softkey, the softkey will change to a selected state (black text on gray
background) and the cursor will appear in the Database Window. At this point the user can scroll through
all databases in the Database Window to view status information. If the Display Database Softkey is pressed
repeatedly, the softkey will switch between the PFD and MFD. Database status information in the Database
Window will reflect the database of the selected display. After a successful sync and restart, verify that the
proper databases are now in use on the AUX–System Status Page (Figure B-8).

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

If an error occurs during the synchronization, an error message will be displayed, followed by the affected
display in the Sync Status section of the Database Window (Figure B-9). If a synchronization completes on
one display, but an error occurs on another, the error message will be displayed with the affected diaplay
listed after it. When an error message (Table B-1) is displayed, the problem must be corrected before the
synchronization can be completed. A power cycle is required to restart synchronization when ‘Card Full’ or
‘Err’ is shown.

‘Card Full’ Message

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure B-9 Synchronization Error Message

AFCS

Error Message
Description
Canceled
Database synchronization has been canceled by removing the bottom SD card in
display being updated
Card Full
SD card does not contain sufficient memory
Err
Displayed for all other errors that may cause the synchronization process to be halted
Timeout
System timed-out prior to the database transfer completing

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Table B-1 Database Synchronization Error Messages

468

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

UPDATING GARMIN DATABASES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Garmin database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Aviation
Databases’ section of the Garmin website (fly.garmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded
from the website, a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the new
databases onto an existing Supplemental Data Card. Equipment required to perform the update is as follows:
• Windows-compatible PC computer (running Windows XP, Vista, or Windows 7)
• SD Card Reader: SanDisk SDDR-93, SanDisk SDDR-99, Verbatim #96504, or equivalent
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin website

EIS

• Existing Supplemental Database SD Cards (010-00330-4A, -4B, -4C, -4D, -4E, or -4F) from the PFD and
MFD

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.

Updating Basemap, SafeTaxi, Airport Terrain, Obstacle, and Airport Directory Databases

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

These databases may be copied to one Supplemental Data Card, then automatically synchronized to other
card in the system:
1) With system power OFF, remove the MFD database card from the bottom card slot of the MFD.
2) Update the basemap, SafeTaxi, airport terrain, obstacle and/or airport directory databases on the MFD card.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

3) Insert the MFD database card into the bottom card slot of the MFD.
4) Apply power to the system, check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the power-up screen
(Figure B-10). If a ‘Verifying’ message is seen, wait for the system to finish loading before proceeding to step 5.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure B-10 Database Information on the Power-up Screen
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

469

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX B
5) Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT Key or the right most softkey.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

7) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
8) Monitor the Sync Status in the Database Window. Wait for all databases to complete synching, indicated by
‘Complete’ being displayed as seen in Figure B-9.
9) Remove and reapply power to the system.
10) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
EIS

11) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
12) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show database information for each display (MFD1 DB, PFD1
DB). Verify the correct database cycle information is shown for each database for each display.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

MFD1 DB

PFD1 DB

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Unselected
MFD1 DB Selected PFD1 DB Selected
Figure B-11 Display Database Softkey

Updating Terrain, FliteCharts, and ChartView Databases
1) With system power OFF, remove the Supplemental Data Card from the bottom card slot of the MFD and PFD.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Copy the updated terrain database to each of the Supplemental Data Cards. Copy the updated FliteCharts or
ChartView database to one Supplemental Data Card.
3) Insert the updated Supplemental Data Cards into the bottom card slot of the MFD and PFD. The Supplemental
Data Card containing the FliteCharts or ChartView database is inserted in the MFD.

AFCS

4) Apply power to the system, check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the power-up screen
(Figure B-10). A ‘Verifying’ message may be seen. If this message is present, wait for the system to finish
loading before proceeding to step 5.
5) Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT Key or the right-most softkey.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

7) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
8) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show database information for each display (MFD1 DB, PFD1
DB). Verify the correct database cycle information is shown for each database for each display.

INDEX

APPENDICES

9) Remove power from the system.

470

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

MAGNETIC FIELD VARIATION DATABASE UPDATE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

A copy of the current magnetic field variation database (MV DB) is included with the navigation database.
At startup, the system compares this version of the MV DB with that presently being used by the AHRS. If
the system determines the MV DB needs to be updated, a prompt is displayed on the Navigation Map Page,
as shown in Figure B-12.

EIS

Figure B-12 GRS1 Magnetic Field Variation Database Update Prompt
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Loading the magnetic field variation database update:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1) With ‘OK’ highlighted, as seen in Figure B-12, press the ENT Key on the MFD. A progress monitor is displayed
as shown in Figure B-13. When the upload is complete, the system is ready for use.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Figure B-13 Uploading Database to GRS1

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

471

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX B

Blank Page

472

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX C
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

GARMIN AVIATION GLOSSARY

INDEX

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

APPENDICES

Degrees Celsius
Center Runway
Course to Altitude Leg
Calibrated
Calculator
Indicated airspeed corrected for
installation and instrument errors.
Crew Alerting System
Course to DME Distance Leg
Course Deviation Indicator
Control Display Unit
Course to Fix Leg
Channel

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

°C
C
CA
CAL
CALC
Calibrated
Airspeed
CAS
CD
CDI
CDU
CF
CH, CHNL

AFCS

BFO
BKSP
BRG

Both Runways
Barometric Altitude
Barometer, Barometric
Battery
Backcourse
The compass direction from the present
position to a destination waypoint.
Beat Frequency Oscillator
Backspace
Bearing

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

B
B ALT
BARO
BATT
BC
Bearing

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Arrival
Airspeed
Aviation Support Branch
Automated Surface Observing System
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
Automatic Terminal Information Service
Along Track
Automatic Sequence
Auxiliary
Average
Automated Weather Observing System

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

190-00870-02 Rev. A

ARV
AS
ASB
ASOS
ATC
ATCRBS
ATIS
ATK
AUTOSEQ
AUX
AVG
AWOS

EIS

AF
AFCS
AFM
AFMS
AFRM
AGL
AHRS
AIM
AIRMET
AIRREP
ALRT
ALT
ALT, ALTN
ALTS
ALTV
AMPS
ANNUNC
ANT
AOA
AOG
AOPA
AP
AP DISC
APPR, APR
APT
APTSIGNS
ARINC
ARSPC
ARTCC

Accuracy
Active, Activate, Altitude Compensated Tilt
Air Data Computer
Automatic Direction Finder
Attitude Direction Indicator
Air Defense Identification Zone
Automatic Dependent SurveillanceBroadcast
Arc to Fix Leg
Automatic Flight Control System
Airplane Flight Manual
Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
Airframe
Above Ground Level
Attitude and Heading Reference System
Aeronautical Information Manual
Airman’s Meteorological Information
Air Reports
Alert
Altitude
Alternator
Selected Altitude Capture Mode
VNAV Altitude Capture Mode
Amperes
Annunciation
Antenna
Angle of Attack
Aircraft On Ground
Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association
Autopilot
Autopilot Disconnect
Approach
Airport, Aerodrome
Airport Signs
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
Airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

ACC
ACT, ACTV
ADC
ADF
ADI
ADIZ
ADS-B

473

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX C

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

CHT
CHKLIST
CI
CLD
CLR
CM
CN
CNS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

CO
COM
CONFIG
COOL
COPLT
Course

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Course to
Steer

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

CPDLC
CPL
CR
CRG
CRNT
Crosstrack
Error
CRS
CRSR
CSC
CTA
CTR
CTRL
Cumulative,
CUM
CVR
CVRG
CWS
CYL

474

Cylinder Head Temperature
Checklist
Course to Intercept Leg
Cloud
Clear
Centimeter
Canada
Communication, Navigation, &
Surveillance
Carbon Monoxide
Communication Radio
Configuration
Coolant
Copilot
The line between two points to be
followed by the aircraft.
The recommended direction to steer
in order to reduce course error or stay
on course. Provides the most efficient
heading to get back to the desired course
and proceed along the flight plan.
Controller Pilot Datalink Communications
Couple
Course to Radial Leg
Cockpit Reference Guide
Current
The distance the aircraft is off a desired
course in either direction, left or right.
Course, Course to Steer
Cursor
Current Speed Control
Control Area
Center
Control
The total of all legs in a flight plan.
Cockpit Voice Recorder
Coverage
Control Wheel Steering
Cylinder

D ALT
DB, DBASE
dBZ
DCLTR, DECLTR
DEC FUEL
DEG
DEIC, DEICE
DEP
Desired Track
DEST
DEV
DF
DFLT
DG
DGRD
DH
Dilution of
Precision
DIR
DIS
Distance
DME
DN
DOP
DP
DPRT
DR
DSBL
DTK
E
ECU
Efficiency
EGNOS

Density Altitude
Database
Decibels ‘Z’ (Radar Return)
Declutter
Decrease Fuel
Degree
De-icing
Departure
The desired course between the active
“from” and “to” waypoints.
Destination
Deviation
Direct to Fix Leg
Default
Directional Gyro
Degrade
Decision Height
A measure of GPS satellite geometry
quality on a scale of one to ten (lower
numbers equal better geometry, where
higher numbers equal poorer geometry).
Direction
Distance
The ‘great circle’ distance from the
present position to a destination
waypoint.
Distance Measuring Equipment
Down
Dilution of Precision
Departure Procedure
Departure
Dead Reckoning
Disabled
Desired Track
Empty, East
Engine Control Unit
A measure of fuel consumption,
expressed in distance per unit of fuel.
European Geostationary Navigation
Overlay Service

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX C

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Glideslope
Go-Around
Gallon(s)
Gearbox
Ground Clutter Suppression
Garmin Air Data Computer
Garmin Display Unit
Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit
Geographic
Garmin Flight Control
Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit

APPENDICES
INDEX

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Degrees Fahrenheit
Course From Fix to Altitude Leg
Federal Aviation Administration
Final Approach Fix
Failure
Course From Fix to Distance Leg

G/S
GA
GAL, GL
GBOX
GCS
GDC
GDU
GEA
GEO
GFC
GIA

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

°F
FA
FAA
FAF
FAIL
FC

Federal Communication Commission
Forecast
Flight Director, Course From Fix to DME
Distance Leg
FDE
Fault Detection and Exclusion
FF, FFLOW
Fuel Flow
FIS-B
Flight Information Services-Broadcast
FISDL
Flight Information Service Data Link
FL
Flight Level
FLC
Flight Level Change
FM
Course From Fix to Manual Termination
Leg
FMS
Flight Management System
FOB
Fuel On Board
FOD
Fuel Over Destination
FPA
Flight Path Angle
FPL
Flight Plan
FPM
Feet Per Minute, Flight Path Marker
FREQ
Frequency
FRMT
Format
FRZ
Freezing
FSS
Flight Service Station
FT
foot/feet
Fuel Flow
The fuel flow rate, expressed in units of
fuel per hour.
Fuel On Board The total amount of usable fuel on board
the aircraft.
FWD
Forward

EIS

Electromagnetic Interference
Endurance
Flight endurance, or total possible flight
time based on available fuel on board.
ENG
Engine
ENGD
Engaged
ENR
Enroute
Enroute Safe The recommended minimum altitude
Altitude
within ten miles left or right of the desired
course on an active flight plan or directto.
ENT
Enter
EPE
Estimated Position Error
EPU
Estimated Position Uncertainty
ERR
Error
ESA
Enroute Safe Altitude
ESP
Electronic Stability and Protection
Estimated
A measure of horizontal GPS position
Position Error error derived by satellite geometry
conditions and other factors.
Estimated
The estimated time at which the aircraft
Time of Arrival should reach the destination waypoint,
based upon current speed and track.
Estimated
The estimated time it takes to reach
Time Enroute the destination waypoint from the
present position, based upon current
groundspeed.
ETA
Estimated Time of Arrival
ETE
Estimated Time Enroute
EXPIRD
Expired

FCC
FCST
FD

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Exhaust Gas Temperature
Engine Indication System
Elevation, Elevator
Emergency

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

EGT
EIS
ELEV
EMER, EMERG,
EMERGCY
EMI
END, ENDUR
Endurance

475

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX C

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

GMA
GMC
GMT
GMU
GND
GPH
GPN
GPS
GPWS
Grid MORA

Groundspeed

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Ground Track
GRS
GS
GSA
GSL
GTS
GTX
GWX

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HA
HDG
HDOP
Heading
HF

INDEX

APPENDICES

HFOM
Hg
HI
HI SENS
HM
Horizontal
Figure of
Merit

476

Garmin Audio Panel System
Garmin Mode Controller
Greenwich Mean Time
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
Ground
Gallons per Hour
Garmin Part Number
Global Positioning System
Ground Proximity Warning System
Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitude; One
degree latitude by one degree longitude
in size and clears the highest elevation
reference point in the grid by 1,000 feet
for all areas of the grid or 2,000 feet for
mountainous
The velocity that the aircraft is travelling
relative to a ground position.
See Track
Garmin Reference System
Ground Speed, Glideslope
Garmin Servo Adapter
Geodetic Sea Level
Garmin Traffic System
Garmin Transponder
Garmin Weather Radar
Hold Terminating at Altitude Leg
Heading
Horizontal Dilution of Precision
The direction an aircraft is pointed,
based upon indications from a magnetic
compass or a properly set directional gyro.
High Frequency, Hold Terminating at Fix
Leg
Horizontal Figure of Merit
Mercury
High
High Sensitivity
Hold with Manual Termination Leg
A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s horizontal position.

hPa
HPL
HR
HRZN HDG
HSDB
HSI
HT
HUL
Hz

Hectopascal
Horizontal Protection Level
Hour
Horizon Heading
High-Speed Data Bus
Horizontal Situation Indicator
heat
Horizontal Uncertainty Level
Hertz (cycles per second)

I
IAF
IAS
IAT
IAU
ICAO
ICS
ID
IDENT, IDNT
IF
IFR
IG
ILS
IMC
IN
INACTV
INC FUEL
IND
Indicated

Inner Marker
Initial Approach Fix
Indicated Air Speed
Indicated Air Temperature
Integrated Avionics Unit
International Civil Aviation Organization
Intercom System
Identification/Morse Code Identifier
Identification
Initial Fix
Instrument Flight Rules
Imperial Gallon
Instrument Landing System
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
Inch
Inactive
Increase Fuel
Indicator, Indicated
Information provided by properly
calibrated and set instrumentation on the
aircraft panel.
Information
Inches of Mercury
Intersection(s)
Integrity (RAIM unavailable)
Infrared Data Association
International Standard Atmosphere
Interstage Turbine Temperature, InterTurbine Temperature

INFO
IN Hg
INT
INTEG
IrDA, IRDA
ISA
ITT

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX C

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

AFCS

North
Navigation
Navigation Aid

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

190-00870-02 Rev. A

N
NAV
NAVAID

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

M
Meter, Middle Marker
MMO (VMO)
Maximum Speed
Mach Number Mach number is the ratio of the true
airspeed to the speed of sound.
MAG
Magnetic

MSG
MSL
MT, M
mV
MVFR

MKR
MOA
MON
MOV
MORA
MPEL
MPM
MSA
MSAS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Left, Left Runway
Latitude
Label
Pound
Liquid Crystal Display
Local
Light Emitting Diode
The amount of fuel remaining on board
after the completion of one or more legs
of a flight plan or direct-to.
Left Over Fuel The amount of flight time remaining,
Reserve
based on the amount of fuel on board
after the completion of one or more legs
of a flight plan or direct-to, and a known
consumption rate.
Leg
The portion of a flight plan between two
waypoints.
LGND
Legend
LIFR
Low Instrument Flight Rules
LNAV
Lateral Navigation
LO
Low
LOC
Localizer
LOI
Loss of Integrity (GPS)
LON
Longitude
LPV
Localizer Performance with Vertical
Guidance
LRU
Line Replaceable Unit
LT
Left
LTNG
Lightning
LVL
Level

Magnetic Variation
Missed Approach Hold Point
Manifold Pressure (inches Hg)
Manual Squelch
Missed Approach Point
Master Avionics Squelch
Maximum
Maximum Speed (overspeed)
Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude
Manual Electric Pitch Trim
Manual Electric Trim
Aviation Routine Weather Report
Multi Function Display
Multi Function Window
Military Grid Reference System
Megahertz
Microphone
Minimum
Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe
altitude within ten miles of the aircraft
present position.
Marker Beacon
Military Operations Area
Monitor
Movement
Minimum Off-Route Altitude
Maximum Permissible Exposure Level
Meters per Minute
Minimum Safe Altitude
Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation
System
Message
Mean Sea Level
Meter
Millivolt(s)
Marginal Visual Flight Rules

EIS

L
LAT
LBL
LB
LCD
LCL
LED
Left Over Fuel
On Board

MAG VAR
MAHP
MAN IN
MAN SQ
MAP
MASQ
MAX
MAXSPD
MDA
MEPT
MET
METAR
MFD
MFW
MGRS
MHz
MIC
MIN
Minimum Safe
Altitude

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Key Stuck
Kilogram
Kilohertz
Kilometer
Knot

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

KEYSTK
KG
kHz
KM
KT

477

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX C

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NDB
NEXRAD
NM
NoPT

478

NOTAM
NRST

Non-Directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar
Nautical Mile(s)
No Procedure Turn Required (procedure
shall not be executed without ATC
clearance)
Notice To Airman
Nearest

O
OAT
OBS
OFST
OXY

Outer Marker
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
Offset
Oxygen

P ALT
PA
PASS
PC
PFD
PI
PIREP
PIT, PTCH
POH
POHS
POS, POSN
PPH
PPM
P. POS
PRES, PRESS
PROC
PROP
PROX
PSI
PT
PTK
PTT
PWR

Pressure Altitude
Passenger Address, Proximity Advisory
Passenger(s)
Personal Computer
Primary Flight Display
Procedure Turn to Course Intercept Leg
Pilot Report
Pitch
Pilot’s Operating Handbook
Pilot’s Operating Handbook Supplement
Position
Pounds per Hour
Parts per Million
Present Position
Pressure
Procedure(s), Procedure Turn
Propeller
Proximity
Pounds per Square Inch
Procedure Turn
Parallel Track
Push-to-Talk
Power

QTY

Quantity

R
RA
RAD
RA, RAD ALT
RAIM
RAM
RAT
RCVR
REF
REM
REQ
RES
REV
RF
RMI
RMT
RNAV
RNG
RNP
RNWY, RWY
ROL
ROM
RPM
RST FUEL
RSV
RT
RVRSNRY
RX

Right, Right Runway
Resolution Advisory, Radio Altimeter
Radial
Radio Altimeter
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
Random Access Memory
Return Air Temperature
Receiver
Reference
Remaining (fuel remaining), Reminder
Required
Reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
Reverse, Revision, Revise
Radio Frequency, Constant Radius Turn to
Fix Leg
Radio Magnetic Indicator
Remote
Area Navigation
Range
Required Navigation Performance
Runway
Roll
Read Only Memory
Revolutions Per Minute
Reset Fuel
Reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
Right
Reversionary
Receive

S
SA
SAT
SBAS
SCIT
SD
SEC
SEL, SLCT
SENS

South
Selective Availability
Static Air Temperature
Satellite-Based Augmentation System
Storm Cell Identification and Tracking
Secure Digital
Second(s)
Select
Sense

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX C

APPENDICES
INDEX

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Velocity (airspeed)
Maximum landing gear extended speed
Maximum landing gear operating speed

AFCS

V, Vspeed
VLE
VLO

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Unavailable
United States
User
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Transverse Mercator/ Universal
Polar Stereographic Grid

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

190-00870-02 Rev. A

UNAVAIL
US
USR
UTC
UTM/UPS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

TRUE
Traffic Advisory
Tactical Air Navigation System
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
True Airspeed, Traffic Advisory System
Total Air Temperature
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
Terminal Control Area

Track Angle
Error
TRK
TRSA
TRUNC
TTL
TURB
TURN
TX

Traffic Alert Collision Avoidance System
Telephone
Temperature
Terminal
Track Between Two Fixes Leg
Temporary Flight Restriction
Target
True Heading
Traffic Information Service
Turbine Inlet Temperature
Track Angle Error
Terminal Maneuvering Area
Timer/Reference
Top of Climb
Top of Descent
Take-Off, Go-Around
Topographic
Total
Direction of aircraft movement relative to
a ground position; also ‘Ground Track’.
The angle difference between the desired
track and the current track.
Track
Terminal Radar Service Area
Truncated
Total
Turbulence
Procedure Turn
Transmit

EIS

T
TA
TACAN
TAF
TAS
TAT
TAWS
TCA

TCAS
TEL
TEMP
TERM
TF
TFR
TGT
T HDG
TIS
TIT
TKE
TMA
TMR/REF
TOC
TOD
TOGA, TO/GA
TOPO
TOT
Track

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Surface
Standard Instrument Approach Procedures
Standard Instrument Departure
SIGMET/AIRMET
Significant Meteorological Information
Simulator
Supercooled Large Droplet
Slip/Skid
Symbol
Space
Speed
Special Position Identification
Speaker
Squelch
Service
Stabilization
Stall
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
Statistics
Standby
Standard
Stormscope
Special Use Airspace
Suspend
Synthetic Vision Technology
Software
Synchronize
Synthetic Terrain
Synthetic Vision
System

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SFC
SIAP
SID
SIG/AIR
SIGMET
SIM
SLD
SLP/SKD
SMBL
SPC
SPD
SPI
SPKR
SQ
SRVC, SVC
STAB
STAL
STAR
STATS
STBY
STD
STRMSCP
SUA
SUSP
SVT, SYN VIS
SW
SYNC
SYN TERR
SYN VIS
SYS

479

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX C

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

VMC
VMO (MMO)
VNE
VR
VX
VY
VYSE
V
V DEV
VA
VAC
VAPP
VAR
VD
VDC
VERT
Vertical Figure
of Merit
Vertical Speed
Required

AFCS

VFOM
VFR
VHF
VI
VLOC
VM

VOR
VORTAC
VPATH, VPTH
VPL
VPROF
VR
VS
VSI
VSR, VS REQ
VTF

VHF Omnidirectional Range
VHF Omnidirectional Range Station and
Tactical Air Navigation
Vertical Path
Vertical Protection Level
VNAV Profile, Vertical Profile
Heading Vector to Radial Leg
Vertical Speed
Vertical Speed Indicator
Vertical Speed Required
Vector to Final

W
WAAS
WARN
WATCH
WGS-84
WPT
WT
WW
WX

Watt(s), West
Wide Area Augmentation System
Warning
Weather Attenuated Color Highlight
World Geodetic System - 1984
Waypoint(s)
Weight
World Wide
Weather

XFER, XFR
XM LTNG
XPDR
XTALK
XTK

Transfer
SiriusXM Lightning
Transponder
Cross-Talk
Cross-Track

Yaw Damper

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

VMC
VNAV, VNV
VOL

Minimum Control Speed
Maximum Speed
Never-Exceed Speed
Rotate Speed
Best Angle of Climb Speed
Best Rate of Climb Speed
Best Single-Engine Rate of Climb Speed
Volts
Vertical Deviation
Heading Vector to Altitude Leg
Volts Alternating Current
VOR Approach
Variation
Heading Vector to DME Distance Leg
Volts Direct Current
Vertical
A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s vertical position.
The vertical speed necessary to descend/
climb from a current position and altitude
to a defined target position and altitude,
based upon current groundspeed.
Vertical Figure of Merit
Visual Flight Rules
Very High Frequency
Heading Vector to Intercept Leg
VOR/Localizer Receiver
Heading Vector to Manual Termination
Leg
Visual Meteorological Conditions
Vertical Navigation
Volume

480

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX D
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

If a particular aspect of G950 operational capability is not addressed by these commonly asked questions or in
the index, contact Garmin (see the copyright page or back cover for contact information) or a Garmin-authorized
dealer. Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers.

What is SBAS?

EIS

The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) uses a system of ground stations to correct any GPS signal
errors. These ground stations correct for errors caused by ionospheric disturbances, timing, and satellite
orbit errors. It also provides vital integrity information regarding the health of each GPS satellite. The signal
correction is then broadcast through geostationary satellites. This correction information can then be received
by any SBAS-enabled GPS receiver.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

SBAS is designed to provide the additional accuracy, availability, and integrity necessary to enable users to rely
on GPS for all phases of flight.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

There are several SBAS systems serving different parts of the world. The Wide Area Augmentation System
(WAAS) is currently available in the United States, including Alaska and Hawaii. The European Geostationary
Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS) offers coverage of Europe, parts of the Middle East, and parts of northern
Africa. The Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation System (MSAS) covers mainly Japan.

How does SBAS affect approach operations?

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Both LNAV/VNAV and LPV approaches use the accuracy of SBAS to include vertical (glide path) guidance
capability. The additional accuracy and vertical guidance capability allows improved instrument approaches to
an expanded number of airports throughout the U.S.

AFCS

The implementation of RNAV LP and LPV approaches further improves precision approach capabilities.
RNAV LPV approaches are designed to make full use of the improved GPS signal from the SBAS. This approach
combines localizer precision lateral guidance with vertical guidance similar to the typical Instrument Landing
System (ILS). RNAV LPV approaches allow lower approach minimums

What is RAIM and how does it affect approach operations?

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring. RAIM is a GPS receiver function that
performs the following functions:
• Monitors and verifies integrity and geometry of tracked GPS satellites
• Notifies the pilot when satellite conditions do not provide the necessary coverage to support a certain phase
of flight

APPENDICES

• Predicts satellite coverage of a destination area to determine whether the number of available satellites is
sufficient to satisfy requirements
NOTE: If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

active, as indicated by the “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP” message and the LOI annunciation
flagging on the HSI.

481

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX D
For RAIM to work correctly, the GPS receiver must track at least five satellites. A minimum of six satellites is
required to allow RAIM to eliminate a single corrupt satellite from the navigation solution.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection
limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and en route, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). The
G950 System monitors RAIM and issues an alert message when RAIM is not available (see Appendix A). Without
RAIM, GPS position accuracy cannot be monitored. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the pilot
must fly the missed approach procedure.

What is GSL altitude?
EIS

GSL (Geodetic Sea Level) altitude is the height above Mean Sea Level (MSL), as calculated geometrically,
generally using a global positioning system (GPS) as the primary data source. The calculated result may or may
not include a barometric component, but the primary source is geometric.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Why might there be no approaches available for a flight plan?

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind
that some VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a
published approach, the G950 indicates “NONE” for the available procedures.

What happens when an approach is selected? Can a flight plan with an approach, a departure, or an
arrival be stored?

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure,
or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan, along with a header line showing the title of the selected
instrument procedure. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active, unless the instrument
procedure is activated. This may be done either when the procedure is loaded or at a later time.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a departure, or an arrival. Note the most recent active flight
plan is restored when the system is turned on, if the aircraft position is the same as the origin airport in the most
recent active flight plan. Also, the active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When
storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an arrival, the system uses the waypoint information from
the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the system automatically
updates the information, provided the procedure has not been modified. Should an approach, departure, or
arrival procedure no longer be available, the flight plan becomes locked until the procedure is deleted from the
flight plan.

Can “slant Golf” (“/G”) be filed using the G950?

APPENDICES

“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. The G950 system meets the requirements of TSO-C145a Class 3 or TSOC145c Class 3, and ETSO C145 Class 3 installations. GPS approaches are not to be flown with an expired
database. See the approved AFM as well as the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for more information.

What does the OBS Softkey do?

INDEX

The OBS Softkey is used to select manual sequencing of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets the current
active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and prevents the system from sequencing to the next
waypoint in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled, automatic waypoint sequencing is continued, and the
G950 automatically activates the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present active
waypoint.
482

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX D
OBS
Manual sequencing - ‘holds’ on selected waypoint
Manually select course to waypoint from HSI
Indicates ‘TO’ or ‘FROM’ waypoint
Cannot be set for final approach course or published holding patterns

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

•
•
•
•

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

•
•
•
•

Normal (OBS not activated)
Automatic sequencing of waypoints
Manual course change on HSI not possible
Always navigates ‘TO’ the active waypoint
Must be in this mode for final approach course

When OBS mode is active, the G950 allows the pilot to set a desired course to/from a waypoint using the
CRS/BARO Knob and HSI (much like a VOR).

EIS

The most common application for using the OBS Softkey is the missed approach. The G950 suspends
automatic waypoint sequencing (indicated by a ‘SUSP’ annunciation placed on the HSI) when the missed
approach point (MAP) is crossed. This prevents the G950 from automatically sequencing to the missed approach
holding point (MAHP). During this time, the OBS Softkey designation changes to SUSP. Selecting the SUSP
Softkey reactivates automatic waypoint sequencing. The OBS Softkey then resumes its normal functionality.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Why might the G950 not automatically sequence to the next waypoint?

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The G950 only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no ‘OBS’ or
‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI). For automatic sequencing to occur, the aircraft must also cross the bisector of
the turn being navigated. The bisector is a line passing through the waypoint common to two flight plan legs
at an equal angle from each leg.

How can a waypoint be skipped in an approach, a departure, or an arrival?

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The G950 allows the pilot to manually select any approach, departure, or arrival leg as the active leg of the
flight plan. This procedure is performed on the MFD from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the
desired waypoint and selecting the ACT LEG Softkey then the ENT Key to approve the selection. The GPS
then provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg.

When does turn anticipation begin?
AFCS

The G950 smooths adjacent leg transitions based on a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability to roll up to
30°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• A waypoint alert (‘Next DTK ###° in # seconds’ or ‘Next HDG ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10
seconds before the turn point and flashes as it counts down to zero.
• A flashing turn advisory (‘Turn [right/left] to ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10 seconds before the
turn and flashes as it counts down to zero. ‘Turn [right/left] to ###° now’ or ‘Next [DTK/HDG] to ###° now’
is displayed when the pilot is to begin the turn and the HSI (GPS mode) automatically sequences to the next
DTK or HDG value.

APPENDICES

• The To/From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate that the midpoint of the turn has been
crossed.

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

483

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX D
When does the CDI scale change?

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Once a departure is activated, the G950 Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) full scale deflection is set to 0.3
nm. The CDI scale changes to 1.0 nm (terminal mode) then ramps up to 2.0 nm (enroute mode) at 30 nm
from the departure airport. When 31 nm from the destination, the CDI scale smoothly transition from 2.0 nm
back to 1.0 nm (terminal mode). At 2.0 nm before the FAF during an active approach, the CDI scale transitions
down further based on the service level of the active approach (LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LP, and LPV). When a
missed approach is activated, the CDI is set to 0.3 nm. See the Flight Instruments Section for more details on
CDI scaling.

EIS

Why does the HSI not respond like a VOR when OBS mode is active?

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the crosstrack distance to the desired
course, not on the angular relationship to the destination. Therefore, the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant
regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when further away from the
destination.

What is the correct missed approach procedure? How is the missed approach holding point selected?

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

To comply with TSO specifications, the G950 does not automatically sequence past the MAP. The first
waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP Softkey is selected
after crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be followed, as indicated on the
approach plate.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP (not recommended), select the Active Flight Plan
Page and use the ACT LEG Softkey to activate the missed approach portion of the procedure.

After a missed approach, how can the same approach be re-selected? How can a new approach be
activated?
NOTE: Do not attempt to reactivate the current approach prior to crossing the missed approach point

AFCS

(MAP). If an attempt to do so is made, an alert message “Are you sure you want to discontinue the current
approach?” appears. The G950 directs the pilot back to the transition waypoint and does not take into
consideration any missed approach procedures, if the current approach is reactivated.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

After flying the missed approach procedure, the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attempt by
pressing the PROC Key. Once the clearance is given for another attempt, activate the approach by highlighting
‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ using the large FMS Knob and pressing the ENT Key. The G950 provides navigation
along the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that point.

APPENDICES

To activate a new approach for the same airport, select the new procedure by pressing the PROC Key. Choose
‘SELECT APPROACH’, select the desired approach from the list shown, and press the ENT Key. Select the
desired transition, then activate the approach using the ENT Key.

INDEX

To activate a new approach to a different airport, press the Direct-to Key and select the desired airport using
the FMS Knobs. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected airport, then follow the steps in the preceding
paragraph to select an approach for the new airport.

484

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX E
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

GENERAL TIS INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to TIS.

EIS

The Traffic Information Service (TIS) provides traffic advisory information to non-TAS/TCAS-equipped
aircraft. TIS is a ground-based service providing the relative locations of all ATCRBS Mode-A and Mode-C
transponder equipped aircraft within a specified service volume. The TIS ground sensor uses real-time track
reports to generate traffic notification. The G950 System displays TIS traffic information on the Traffic Map
Page of the MFD. TIS information may also be displayed for overlay on the MFD Navigation Map Page, as
well as on the PFD Inset Map. Surveillance data includes all transponder-equipped aircraft within the coverage
volume. The G950 System displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5 nm radius, from 3,000 feet below, to
3,500 feet above the requesting aircraft.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

TIS VS. TAS/TCAS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The main difference between the Traffic Information System (TIS) and Traffic Advisory (TAS) or Traffic
Collision Avoidance Systems (TCAS) is the source of surveillance data. TAS/TCAS uses an airborne interrogator
with a half-second update rate, while TIS utilizes the terminal Mode-S ground interrogator and accompanying
data link to provide a five-second update rate. TIS and TAS/TCAS have similar ranges.

TIS LIMITATIONS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

NOTE: TIS is not intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not relieve the pilot of the

responsibility to “see and avoid” other aircraft. TIS shall not be used for avoidance maneuvers during
instrument meteorological conditions (IMC) or when there is no visual contact with the intruder aircraft.

AFCS

NOTE: Refer to the TIS Limitations section of the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for a more

comprehensive explanation.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

TIS relies on surveillance of the Mode-S radar system, which is a “secondary surveillance” radar system
similar to that used by ATCRBS. Many limitations are inherent in secondary radar surveillance. Information
provided by TIS is neither better nor more accurate than the information used by ATC. TIS is intended only
to assist in visual acquisition of other aircraft in visual meteorological conditions (VMC). While TIS is a useful
aid for visual traffic avoidance, system limitations must be considered to ensure proper use. No recommended
avoidance maneuvers are given, nor authorized, as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or TIS advisory.

APPENDICES

• TIS operation may be intermittent during turns or other maneuvering.
• TIS is dependent on two-way, line-of-sight communications between the aircraft and the Mode-S radar
antenna. Whenever the structure of the aircraft comes between the transponder antenna and the groundbased radar antenna, the signal may be temporarily interrupted.

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

• Other limitations and anomalies associated with TIS are described in the AIM.

485

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX E

WARNING: Garmin is not responsible for Mode S geographical coverage. Operation of the ground stations

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

is the responsibility of the FAA. Refer to the AIM for a Terminal Mode S radar site map.
NOTE: TIS is unavailable at low altitudes in many areas of the United States. This is often the case in

mountainous regions.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

TIS information is collected during a single radar sweep. Collected information is then sent through the
Mode S uplink on the next radar sweep. Because of this, the surveillance information is approximately five
seconds old. TIS ground station tracking software uses prediction algorithms to compensate for this delay.
These algorithms use track history data to calculate expected intruder positions consistent with the time of
display. Occasionally, aircraft maneuvering may cause variations in this calculation and create slight errors on
the Traffic Map Page. Errors affect relative bearing information and target track vector. This can cause a delay in
the displayed intruder information. However, intruder distance and altitude typically remain relatively accurate
and may be used to assist in spotting traffic.
The following errors are common examples:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• When the client or intruder aircraft maneuvers excessively or abruptly, the tracking algorithm may report
incorrect horizontal position until the maneuvering aircraft stabilizes.
• When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course that intercepts the client aircraft course at a shallow angle
(either overtaking or head-on) and either aircraft abruptly changes course within 0.25 nm, TIS may display
the intruder aircraft on the incorrect side of the client aircraft.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

These are rare occurrences and are typically resolved within a few radar sweeps once the client/intruder
aircraft course stabilizes.

AFCS

Pilots using TIS can provide valuable assistance in the correction of malfunctions by reporting observations
of undesirable performance. Reports should identify the time of observation, location, type, and identity of
the aircraft, and describe the condition observed. Reports should also include the type of transponder and
transponder software version. Since TIS performance is monitored by maintenance personnel, not ATC,
malfunctions should be reported in the following ways:
• By telephone to the nearest Flight Service Station (FSS) facility

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• By FAA Form 8000-7, Safety Improvement Report (postage-paid card can be obtained at FAA FSSs, General
Aviation District Offices, Flight Standards District Offices, and General Aviation Fixed Base Operators)

486

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX F
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

MAP SYMBOLS
AIRPORTS

BASEMAP
Symbol

Item
Interstate Highway

Non-towered, Non-serviced Airport

State Highway

Towered, Non-serviced Airport

US Highway

Symbol

EIS

Unknown Airport

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Item

National Highway

Non-towered, Serviced Airport

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

City

Towered, Serviced Airport

State/Province Border

Restricted (Private) Airport
Heliport

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

International Border
Road

NAVAIDS

Railroad
Symbol

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Item

Latitude/Longitude

Intersection
LOM (compass locator at outer marker)

AIRSPACE BOUNDARIES

VOR/ILS

Warning Area Prohibited Area
Alert Area
Restricted Area
Caution Area Training Area
Danger Area
Unknown Area
Class C
Terminal Radar Service Area
Mode C Area

VORTAC
TACAN

APPENDICES

Mode C Tower Area

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

VOR/DME

Symbol

AFCS

VOR

Item
ICAO Control Area
Class B Airspace

NDB (non-directional radio beacon)

Military Operations Area (MOA)
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

487

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX F
HAZARD AVOIDANCE FEATURES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Feature

MISCELLANEOUS

Symbol

Terrain Proximity display enabled

ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency

Traffic display enabled

Map Pointer (when panning)

EIS

Loss of hazard avoidance feature
(a white X is shown over the symbol
to indicate not available; e.g., traffic
symbol)

Measuring Pointer

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Wind Vector
Item

Non-threat Traffic

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Proximity Advisory
Traffic Advisory, Out of Range
Traffic Advisory

Symbol

Elevation Pointer
(on Topography Scale when panning)

TRAFFIC

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Item

Symbol

Overzoom Indicator
User Waypoint
Vertical Navigation Along Track Waypoint
Parallel Track Waypoint
Unanchored Flight Path Waypoint
Top of Descent (TOD)

AFCS

Bottom of Descent (BOD)

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Navigating using Dead Reckoning

488

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDIX F
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

OBSTACLE DATABASE
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL

Obstacle Location

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude

EIS

Gray obstacle is more than 1000 ft
below aircraft altitude

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Table G-1 Obstacle Colors

TERRAIN AVOIDANCE COLORS AND SYMBOLS

Aircraft Altitude

100 ft Threshold

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude

1000 ft

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude

Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude

AFCS

Figure F-1 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

489

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX F

Blank Page

490

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

INDEX

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

B
Backlighting-------------------------------------------------- 47
Barometric Setting, Altimeter---------------------50, 56–57
Bearing/distance, measuring------------------------------145
Bearing Information--------------------------------51, 62–63
Bearing line-------------------------------300, 301, 303, 304
Bus voltage-----------------------------------------------84, 86

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Calibrated Airspeed-----------------------------------------250
CAUTION-----------------------------------------------------442
Caution alerts-----------------------------------------------444
CDI---------------------------- 242, 258, 269, 277, 284, 454
Chart Not Available---------------------------------- 388, 409
Chart options----------------------------------------- 396, 416
Chart setup box-------------------------------------- 402, 420
ChartView---------------------------------365, 386, 387, 405
ChartView database----------------------------------------405
ChartView plan view---------------------------------------397
ChartView profile View-------------------------------------398
Checklists--------------------------------------------- 434–435
Checklist softkeys-------------------------------------------434
Closest Point-------------------------------------------------224
COM channel spacing--------------------------------------105
COM Frequency Box----------------------------------------- 98
Communication (COM) Frequency Box------------------- 50
COM Tuning Failure-----------------------------------------132
Controls
PFD/MFD------------------------------------------19–20, 28
Softkeys------------------------------------------------ 21–24
Copy a Flight Plan------------------------------------------211
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)------------41–42, 64–65

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

AFCS

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Arc HSI--------------------------------------------------------- 60
Arrival Alerts-------------------------------------------------- 40
Arrival procedure------192, 206, 239, 241, 267, 269, 278
Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)-3, 8, 13,
13–14
Attitude Indicator----------------------------------------50, 54
Audio alerting system--------------------------------------442
Audio Panel----------------------------------------------------- 2
Audio Panel Fail-Safe Operation--------------------------132
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS)----------------363
Automatic squelch------------------------------------------106
Auto-tuning, COM------------------------------------------101
Auto-tuning, NAV------------------------------------ 110, 114
Auto Zoom---------------------------------------------------138
AUX - system status page-384, 385, 405, 406, 422, 423,
424, 427
Aviation Symbols------------------------------------- 150, 192

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Activate a Flight Plan---------------------------------------211
Active database-------------------------------------- 462, 463
Active frequency--------------------------------------- 98, 107
AC-U-KWIK------------------------------------- 365, 425, 467
Advisory alerts-----------------------------------------------444
AHRS----------------------------------------------------------452
Aircraft range-------------------------------------------- 89–90
Air Data Computer (ADC)------------------------------------ 3
Airport
Information-----------------------------------------------170
Nearest----------------------------------------------------- 42
Airport Directory-------------------------365, 425, 426, 467
Airspace Alerts--------------------------------- 185, 186, 286
Airspeed Indicator----------------------------------50, 52–53
Airways
Collapsed--------------------------------------------------224
Expanded--------------------------------------------------224
Alerting system----------------------------------------------441
Alerts---------------------------------------------------------441
Aircraft-----------------------------------------------------443
Airspace---------------------------------------------------- 40
Audio voice------------------------------------------ 41, 460
Levels------------------------------------------------------442
Alerts Window------------------------------------------------ 74
Along Track Offset----------------------------------- 215, 216
ALT------------------------------------------------------------282
Altimeter---------------------------------------------50, 55–57
Altimeter Barometric Setting------------------------------- 50
Altitude
Buffer------------------------------------------------------- 40
Constraints------------------------------------------------231
Altitude Alerting--------------------------------------------- 76
Altitude constraints-----------------------------------------269
Ammeter--------------------------------------------------84, 86
Annunciations
System------------------------------------------------ 10, 445
Test tone---------------------------------------------- 12, 442
Annunciations, Softkey-------------------------------------- 74
Annunciation Window----------------------------------51, 74
Annunciator lights------------------------------------------123
Antenna Stabilization--------------------------------------305
AOPA-------------------------------------------- 365, 425, 467
AOPA Airport Directory------------------------------ 426, 427
Approach-----------------------------------------------------482
Activating-------------------------------------------------246
Loading--------------------------------------- 208, 243, 245
Removing--------------------------------------------------246
Approach box-----------------------------------------------411
Approach channel----------------------------------- 208, 243
APR softkey------------------------------------------- 245, 253

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

I-1

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

INDEX
D

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Databases-----------------------------------------7, 8, 12, 461
Database Synchronization-------------------- 462, 467, 468
Data entry------------------------------------------------ 28–29
Data logging-------------------------------------------------437
Date, time----------------------------------------------------- 38
Day/Night views-------------------------------------- 402, 420
Day view----------------------------------402, 403, 420, 421
DB Mismatch------------------------------------------------465
DCLTR---------------------------------------------------------- 26
Dead Reckoning---------------------------------------------- 79
Decision Height (DH)------------------------------------51, 77
Declutter, Display-------------------------------------------- 81
Delete
Entire airway--------------------------------------- 213, 214
Entire procedure----------------------------------- 213, 214
Flight plan items-----------------------------------------212
Flight plans------------------------------------------------211
Individual waypoint------------------------------- 212, 213
Density Altitude---------------------------------------------252
Departure
Procedure------------------------------204, 218, 236, 238
Select------------------------------------236, 239, 243, 246
Time--------------------------------------------------------250
Departure procedure chart------------------------- 392, 413
Digital audio entertainment---------------------------------- 4
Dilution of Precision (DOP)--------------------------------- 18
Direct-to-- 163, 187, 188, 189, 190, 191, 229, 230, 267,
269, 284
Display controls----------------------------------------- 19–26
DME Information Window---------------------------------- 63
Dual navigation database---------------------------------463

AFCS

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Electrical indications----------------------------------------- 84
Electronic checklists-------------------- 365–366, 434, 435
Emergency checklist----------------------------------------435
Emergency Frequency--------------------------------------132
Endurance----------------------------------------------------- 89
ENGINE-------------------------------------------------------- 26
Engine Indication System (EIS)------------------------ 83–92
Entering Flight ID-------------------------------------------116
Entertainment inputs---------------------------------------129
Estimated Position Error (EPE)----------------------------- 18
Export Flight Plan-------------------------------------------456

INDEX

Field of View (SVS)------------------------------------------161
Flaps-------------------------------------------------- 84, 86, 89
Flight Data Logging----------------------------------------365

I-2

Flight ID----------------------------------------------- 116, 122
Flight plan
Closest point to reference------------------------------224
Storing-----------------------------------------------------482
FliteCharts-------------------------------------------- 365, 407
FliteCharts cycle---------------------------------------------423
FliteCharts expiration--------------------------------------423
FliteCharts functions---------------------------------------408
FPA----------------------------------------------------- 231, 274
Frequency
Nearest----------------------------------------------------183
Frequency spacing------------------------------------------105
Frequently asked questions--------------------------------481
Fuel
Calculations------------------------------------------------ 88
Efficiency--------------------------------------------------252
Endurance-------------------------------------------------252
Flow-----------------------------------------------------84, 88
Quantity------------------------------------------------84, 88
Remaining-------------------------------------------- 89, 252
Required---------------------------------------------------252
Statistics---------------------------------------------------252
Used--------------------------------------------------------- 89
Fuel on Board-----------------------------------------------252

G
Gain-----------------------------------------------------------303
Generator speed------------------------------------ 84, 86, 88
Geodetic Sea Level (GSL)--------------------- 316, 324, 333
Glidepath-----------------------------------------------------282
Glidepath Indicator------------------------------------------ 58
Glideslope----------------------------------------------------282
Glideslope Indicator----------------------------------------- 58
Global Positioning System (GPS)
Navigation----------------------------------------- 187–288
GPS receiver--------------------------------------------- 14–16
Ground Mapping--------------------------------------------307
GTS 800------------------------------------------------------453
GTX 33 Mode S Transponders----------------------------116
GWX 70------------------------------------------------------290

H
Heading------------------------------------------------------- 50
HI SENS-------------------------------------------------------115
Horizontal Scan------------- 299, 300, 301, 302, 305, 306
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)-19, 20, 39, 50, 59–70,
244, 246, 258, 269, 278, 282, 284, 286, 483, 484
HSI double green arrow------------------------------------107
HSI magenta arrow-----------------------------------------107
HSI single green arrow-------------------------------------107

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

INDEX

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

APPENDICES

Navigation mode selection--------------------------------107
Navigation (NAV)
Database------------------------------------- 189, 231, 232
Map-------------------------------------133, 145, 168, 189

Page
Menus------------------------------------------------------ 27
Page groups--------------------------------------------- 29–32
Parallel Track------------------------------------------ 217, 218
Passenger address------------------------------------------127
PA system----------------------------------------------------127
PFDSee Primary Flight Display (PFD)
PFD failure---------------------------------------------------132
Pilot Profile Import/Export Messages--------------------456
Pilot profiles--------------------------------------------- 34–35
Pitch indication----------------------------------------------- 54
Power-up page----------------------------------------------434
Power-up, system---------------------------------------------- 8
Pressure, oil------------------------------------------ 84, 86, 88
Primary Flight Display (PFD)---------------------------------- 2
Controls----------------------------------------------- 19–20
Softkeys------------------------------------------------ 21–23
Profile Path--------------------------------------------------322
Profile View--------------------------------------------------321
Propeller speed-------------------------------------- 84, 86, 88

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Map Panning------------------------------------------------140
Map symbols------------------------------------------------487
Marker Beacon----------------------------------------------115
Marker Beacon Annunciations----------------------------- 75
MASQ processing-------------------------------------------- 93
Measurement units------------------------------------------ 38
Menus--------------------------------------------------------- 27
Message advisories--------- 443, 447, 448, 449, 452, 453
Messages
Reminder--------------------------------------------------- 45
Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA)--------------------51, 77
Missed Approach----------------- 192, 247, 254, 258, 284
MKR/MUTE--------------------------------------------------115
Mode S-------------------------------------------------- 23, 116
Mode selection softkeys---------------------------- 116, 117
Morse code identifier---------------------------------------109
Multi Function Display (MFD)-------------------------------- 2
Controls----------------------------------------------- 19–20
Softkeys----------------------------------------------------- 25

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

OBS Mode----------------------------------------------- 69–70
Obstacles---------------------------------------------- 449, 450
Odometer----------------------------------------------------- 45
Oil
Pressure------------------------------------------- 84, 86, 88
Temperature-------------------------------------- 84, 86, 88
Omni Bearing Selector (OBS)----------------------- 482–483
Other Statistics--------------------------------------- 250, 252
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)------------------------50, 71

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Land Symbols------------------------------------------------149
Line Replaceable Units (LRU)------------------------ 2–5, 11
LNAV----------------------------------------------------------258
LO SENS------------------------------------------------------115
Low Altitude Annunciation--------------------------------- 77
LPV----------------------------------------------------- 258, 284

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

IDENT function----------------------------------------------122
ID indicator--------------------------------------------------109
Import Flight Plan-------------------------------------------456
Indicated Altitude-------------------------------------------250
INFO box-----------------------------------------------------412
Inset Map----------------------------------------------------- 51
Intercom system (ICS)--------------------------------------129
Intersection
Information---------------------------------------- 171–172
Interstage Turbine Temperature (ITT)------------- 84, 86, 88
Inverting a flight plan--------------------------------------211
IOI------------------------------------------330, 340, 457, 458
ITT----------------------------------------------------- 84, 86, 88

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Jeppesen-----------------------------------------------------462

Navigation (NAV) Frequency Box-------------------------- 50
Navigation Source-------------------------------------- 64–66
Navigation Status Box-------------------------------------- 50
Nav radio selection-----------------------------------------107
Nearest
Airports-31, 42, 133, 134, 163, 167, 168, 169, 170, 189
Page------------------------------------------- 168, 169, 170
Airspaces---------------------------------- 31, 40, 183, 185
Intersections-----------------------------------31, 171, 172
NDB--------------------------------------------------- 31, 174
User Waypoint--------------------------------------------178
VOR---------------------------------------------31, 171, 176
Nearest Airport(s)-------------------------------------------245
Nearest airports, frequency tuning-----------------------101
NEXRAD------------------------------------------------------291
Night view--------------------------------402, 403, 420, 421
Normal display operation------------------------------------- 9
NOTAMs------------------------------------------------------394

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

I-3

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

INDEX
Q
Quick tuning 121.500 MHz-------------------------------100

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Radar---------------------------------------------------------290
RAIM----------------------------16, 242, 254, 255, 256, 257
Range---------------------------------------------------------159
Range, aircraft------------------------------------------- 89–90
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM)-1 6 – 1 7 ,
254, 481
Reminder messages----------------------------------------- 45
Required Vertical Speed------------------------------------275
Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI)--------- 275, 276
Reversionary Mode-----------------------------------------132
ROC----------------------------------------330, 340, 457, 458
Runway
Minimum length------------------------------------------- 42
Surface------------------------------------------------------ 42
RX indicator--------------------------------------------------- 99

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Safe Operating Annunciations--------------------- 443, 444
SafeTaxi------------------------------------------ 365, 380, 383
SafeTaxi database-------------------------------------------384
SBAS-------------------------- 254, 256, 257, 258, 450, 481
Scheduler------------------------------ 45–46, 365–366, 432
Sector Scan------------------------------------------- 303, 304
Secure Digital (SD) card-------------------------- 7, 434, 461
Selected Altitude-----------------------------------------50, 76
Selected Altitude Bug--------------------------------------- 50
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc----------------------------162
Selected Course------------------------------------------51, 60
Selected Heading----------------------------------------51, 60
Selecting a COM radio-------------------------------------- 98
Sequencing waypoints
Automatic-------------------------------------------------483
Sequencing waypoints, suspend--------------------------- 70
Slip/Skid Indicator----------------------------------------50, 54
Softkey annunciations--------------------------------------- 74
Softkeys
MFD--------------------------------------------------------- 25
PFD-------------------------------------------------22–24, 50
Speaker-------------------------------------------------------123
Split COM operation----------------------------------------128
STAB----------------------------------------------------------305
Standby frequency-------------------------------98, 101, 107
Standby frequency field------------------------------------- 98
Standby Navigation Database--------------------- 463, 465
Stereo headsets---------------------------------------------123
Stuck microphone-------------------------------------------132
Sunrise/Sunset-----------------------------------------------251

I-4

SVT troubleshooting----------------------------------------438
Symbols, map------------------------------------------------487
Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)-------------54, 365, 366
System
Annunciations--------------------------------------- 10, 441
Message advisories--------------------------------------447
Power-up----------------------------------------------------- 8
Time--------------------------------------------------------- 38
System time--------------------------------------------------- 50

T
TA-------------------------------------------------------------460
TAS----------------------299, 300, 301, 302, 303, 304, 354
TAWS-B------------------------------------------------ 316, 458
ALERTS-----------------------------------------------------458
System Status---------------------------------------------344
System Status Annunciations---------------------------459
Temperature, Interstage Turbine------------------ 84, 86, 88
Temperature, oil------------------------------------- 84, 86, 88
Terminal Procedures Charts------------------------ 388, 409
Terrain------------------------------------------- 449, 457, 458
Color indications-----------------------------------------489
Terrain Annunciation---------------------------------------- 51
Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS)-------- 76
Terrain Proximity--------------------------------------------316
Terrain-SVS-------------------------------------- 316, 324, 363
Alerts-------------------------------------------------------457
System Status Annunciations---------------------------457
Tilt-------------------------------------------------------------302
Tilt line--------------------------------------------------------302
Timer
Departure--------------------------------------------------- 44
Flight-------------------------------------------------------- 44
TOPO DATA------------------------------------- 146, 147, 156
Top of Descent (TOD)-------------------------- 274, 275, 281
TOPO SCALE-------------------------------------------------148
Torque------------------------------------------------ 84, 86, 88
Track----------------------------------------------------------- 59
Traffic advisory----------------------------------------------299
Traffic Advisory System-------------------------------------453
Traffic Advisory (TA)----------------------------------- 75, 460
Traffic Annunciation----------------------------------------- 51
Traffic Information Service (TIS)-------------------- 485–486
Transponder----------------------------------------------------- 3
Status Box-------------------------------------------------- 50
Transponder code entry------------------------------------120
Transponder data box--------------------------------------- 93
Transponder ground mode--------------------------------117
Transponder mode field------------------------------------- 93
Transponder standby mode-------------------------------118
Trend Vector
Turn Rate--------------------------------------------------- 62

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

INDEX

XM weather/radio--------------------------------------------- 4

Z
Zoom
Auto--------------------------------------------------------138

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

VDISee Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
Vertical
Deviation--------------------------------------------------- 56
Guidance--------------------------------------------------232
Direct-to---------------------------------------------------230
Navigation------------------------------------------------231
Speed
Guidance--------------------------------------------------232
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)--------------58, 275, 276
Vertical navigation
Direct-to---------------------------------------------------230
Vertical Scan------------------------------------------ 301, 302
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)------------------- 50, 58, 276
Vertical Track alert------------------------------------------460
VFR code-----------------------------------------------------121
Video settings-----------------------------------------------429
Video system----------------------------------------- 365, 428
VNAV-------------------------------------------------- 191, 455
VNV-----------------------------------------------------------274
Guidance
Disabling--------------------------------------------------229
Enabling---------------------------------------------------229
VNV Indications, PFD---------------------------------------- 73
Voice alerts--------------------------------------------------443
Voice Alerts, TIS Traffic---------------------------75, 350, 360
Voltmeter--------------------------------------------------84, 86
VOR, NearestSee Nearest: VOR
VOR selection------------------------------------------------107
VSISee Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
Vspeeds------------------------------------------------------- 53
VS TGT------------------------------------------------- 231, 274

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

WAAS-------------------------------------------------- 258, 481
WARNING----------------------------------------------------442
Warning alerts-----------------------------------------------443
Waypoint
Automatic sequencing----------------------------------483
Skipping---------------------------------------------------483
Waypoint Selection Submenu----------188, 195, 199, 254
Waypoint Sequencing, Suspend--------------------------- 70
Weather Alert (WX Alert)----------------------------------290
Weather Attenuated Color Highlight (WATCH)- 305, 306
Weather (real-time)-------------------------------------------- 4
Wind----------------------------------------------------------158
Wind Data---------------------------------------------------- 51

EIS

Unable to display chart----------------------------- 388, 409
Units, measurement----------------------------------------- 38
Updating Garmin databases------------------------------384
Updating Jeppesen databases----------------------------405
User-Defined Holding Pattern-----------------------------226

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Trim--------------------------------------------------- 84, 86, 89
Trip
Planning-------------------------------------- 250, 251, 252
Statistics----------------------------------------45, 251, 252
True Airspeed (TAS)------------------------- 50, 52, 252, 452
Turn anticipation--------------------------------------------483
Turn Rate Indicator--------------------------------------50, 62
TX indicator--------------------------------------------------- 99

INDEX

190-00870-02 Rev. A

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

I-5

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

INDEX

Blank Page

I-6

Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Pilatus PC-6

190-00870-02 Rev. A

G950

Integrated Avionics System
Pilot’s Guide

G950 Pilot’s Guide

Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
p:913.397.8200
f:913.397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
p:503.391.3411
f:503.364.2138

Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road
Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
p:886/02.2642.9199
f:886/02.2642.9099

Pilatus PC-6

Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
p:44 (0) 23 8052 4000
f:44 (0) 23 8052 4004
Aviation Support:44 (0) 87 0850 1243

www.garmin.com
190-00870-02
Revision A

Pilatus PC-6

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2014:10:20 16:16:06-05:00
Creator                         : Adobe InDesign CS6 (Windows)
Modify Date                     : 2014:10:28 10:43:26-05:00
Tagged PDF                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Metadata Date                   : 2014:10:28 10:43:26-05:00
Creator Tool                    : Adobe InDesign CS6 (Windows)
Version ID                      : 1
Instance ID                     : uuid:a7a73032-82aa-417d-8583-cca0ab1a4c61
Original Document ID            : adobe:docid:indd:cede5f94-51d6-11de-aa04-88824cee24b5
Document ID                     : xmp.id:8D9CE6B29D58E411A20A8C380AFBF753
Rendition Class                 : proof:pdf
Derived From Instance ID        : xmp.iid:889CE6B29D58E411A20A8C380AFBF753
Derived From Document ID        : xmp.did:653866A69658E411A20A8C380AFBF753
Derived From Original Document ID: adobe:docid:indd:cede5f94-51d6-11de-aa04-88824cee24b5
Derived From Version ID         : 1
Derived From Rendition Class    : default
History Action                  : converted
History Parameters              : from application/x-indesign to application/pdf
History Software Agent          : Adobe InDesign CS6 (Windows)
History Changed                 : /
History When                    : 2014:10:20 16:16:06-05:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Producer                        : Adobe PDF Library 10.0.1
Trapped                         : False
Page Count                      : 510

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Garmin Pilatus Pc 6

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation